Contents
Setting Up
Basic Operations
Copying
Faxing
Printing
- Printing from a Computer
  - Canceling Prints
  - Checking the Printing Status and Log
Scanning
Linking with Mobile Devices
Managing the Machine
Setting Menu List
Maintenance
Troubleshooting
Appendix
SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

Canon MF264dw User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for MF264dw by Canon which is a product in the Multifunctionals category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Canon EF 85mm f/1.8 USM Manual

Canon 5D + EF 24-105mm + EF 100-400mm Kit Manual

Canon 105 Manual

Canon MF3010 Manual

Canon LBP7010C Manual

imageCLASS

MF269dw / MF267dw / MF264dw / MF269dw VP

User's Guide

USRMA-3281-01 2019-02 en Copyright CANON INC. 2019

Contents

Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................ 3

Main Functions ......................................................................................................................................................... 4

Preparations Required Before Use ............................................................................................................................. 5

Preventing Unauthorized Access ................................................................................................................................ 7

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide .............................................................................................................................. 9

Setting the Date/Time ............................................................................................................................................. 11

Setting Up the Network Environment ...................................................................................................................... 14

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN ..................................................................................................................... 16

Connecting to a Wired LAN .................................................................................................................................. 17

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ............................................................................................................................... 18

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ....................................................................................... 20

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode ........................................................................................... 22

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ....................................................................................... 24

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ...................................................................................... 27

Checking the SSID and Network Key ............................................................................................................... 30

Setting IP Addresses ........................................................................................................................................... 31

Setting IPv4 Address ..................................................................................................................................... 32

Setting IPv6 Addresses .................................................................................................................................. 35

Viewing Network Settings .................................................................................................................................... 38

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ...................................................................................... 41

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ........................................................................................... 42

Conguring Printer Ports ............................................................................................................................... 45

Setting Up Print Server .................................................................................................................................. 49

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ......................................................................................... 52

Conguring Ethernet Settings ........................................................................................................................ 53

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ...................................................................................................... 55

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .............................................................................................. 56

Conguring DNS .......................................................................................................................................... 57

Conguring SMB .......................................................................................................................................... 61

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ......................................................................................... 63

Conguring SNTP ......................................................................................................................................... 67

Installing Drivers .................................................................................................................................................... 69

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions ........................................................................................................... 70

Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use .............................................................................................................. 71

Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name .......................................................................................................... 72

Selecting the Receive Mode .................................................................................................................................. 73

Connecting the Telephone Line ............................................................................................................................ 74

Conguring Scan Settings ....................................................................................................................................... 76

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ........................................................................................................... 77

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail ..................................................................................................................... 78

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings .................................................................................................................... 79

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings .................................................................................................... 82

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location ........................................................................................ 85

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location ....................................................................................................... 86

Basic Operations .......................................................................................................................................... 91

Parts and Their Functions ........................................................................................................................................ 94

Front Side .......................................................................................................................................................... 95

Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................... 97

Interior .............................................................................................................................................................. 98

Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................... 99

Multi-Purpose Tray ........................................................................................................................................... 100

Drawer ............................................................................................................................................................ 101

Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................................... 102

Turning ON the Machine ....................................................................................................................................... 107

Turning OFF the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 108

Using the Operation Panel .................................................................................................................................... 109

Basic Screens ................................................................................................................................................... 110

Home Screen ............................................................................................................................................. 111

<Status Monitor> Screen ............................................................................................................................. 115

Message Display ......................................................................................................................................... 117

Basic Operation ................................................................................................................................................ 118

Entering Text ................................................................................................................................................... 123

Placing Originals ................................................................................................................................................... 128

Loading Paper ....................................................................................................................................................... 132

Loading Paper in the Drawer .............................................................................................................................. 134

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ............................................................................................................. 138

Loading Envelopes ............................................................................................................................................ 141

Loading Preprinted Paper .................................................................................................................................. 143

Specifying Paper Size and Type .......................................................................................................................... 145

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer ................................................................................................ 146

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ................................................................................ 147

Registering a Custom Paper Size .................................................................................................................. 148

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ................................................................................................................ 150

Customizing the Display ........................................................................................................................................ 151

Customizing the Home Screen ........................................................................................................................... 152

Changing the Default Settings for Functions .......................................................................................................... 154

Setting Sounds ...................................................................................................................................................... 155

Entering Quiet Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 157

Entering Sleep Mode ............................................................................................................................................. 159

Registering Destinations ....................................................................................................................................... 161

Registering Destinations in the Address Book ...................................................................................................... 163

Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial ........................................................................................................ 165

Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group ................................................................................................. 167

Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book ................................................................................. 169

Copying .............................................................................................................................................................. 171

Basic Copy Operations ........................................................................................................................................... 173

Canceling Copies .............................................................................................................................................. 177

Checking the Copying Status and Log ................................................................................................................. 179

Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality ................................................................................................................... 180

Selecting the Type of Original for Copying ........................................................................................................... 181

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness) ...................................................................................................... 182

Useful Copy Functions ........................................................................................................................................... 184

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) .......................................................................................... 185

Using <Paper Save Copy> .................................................................................................................................. 187

Collating Copies by Page ................................................................................................................................... 188

Making ID Card Copies ...................................................................................................................................... 189

Making Passport Copy ....................................................................................................................................... 190

Faxing .................................................................................................................................................................. 193

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes ....................................................................................................................... 195

Canceling Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................................... 202

Receiving Faxes .................................................................................................................................................... 203

Useful Functions When Sending ............................................................................................................................. 207

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings) ............................................................................. 208

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending) ............................................................................................... 210

Various Receiving Methods .................................................................................................................................... 212

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception) ........................................................................ 213

Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically ............................................................................................... 215

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents .................................................................................... 217

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) .......................................................................................................... 219

Sending PC Faxes ............................................................................................................................................. 220

Printing .............................................................................................................................................................. 223

Printing from a Computer ..................................................................................................................................... 224

Canceling Prints ............................................................................................................................................... 226

Checking the Printing Status and Log .................................................................................................................. 228

Scanning ........................................................................................................................................................... 231

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals ................................................................................................................ 233

Scanning and Saving to a Computer .................................................................................................................... 234

Scanning Using the Shortcut Key ........................................................................................................................ 236

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder ......................................................................................... 239

Canceling Sending Documents ........................................................................................................................... 247

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals .................................................................................................... 249

Scanning Clearly ................................................................................................................................................... 251

Adjusting Image Quality .................................................................................................................................... 252

Adjusting Density ............................................................................................................................................. 253

Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness) ................................................................................................. 254

Useful Scanning Functions .................................................................................................................................... 255

Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality ......................................................................................... 256

III

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings) ................................................................... 257

Specifying E-Mail Settings .................................................................................................................................. 259

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan) .......................................................................................................... 261

Scanning Documents from an Application ........................................................................................................... 262

Using ScanGear MF ........................................................................................................................................... 264

Linking with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................ 266

Connecting with Mobile Devices ............................................................................................................................ 267

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) ........................................................................................ 268

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ............................................................................................................. 269

Utilizing the Machine through Applications ........................................................................................................... 272

Using AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................................... 273

Printing with AirPrint ........................................................................................................................................ 278

Scanning with AirPrint ....................................................................................................................................... 281

Faxing with AirPrint .......................................................................................................................................... 283

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ................................................................................................................................. 285

Using Google Cloud Print ....................................................................................................................................... 286

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control ....................................................................................................... 288

Managing the Machine ........................................................................................................................ 290

Setting Access Privileges ....................................................................................................................................... 292

Setting the System Manager PIN ........................................................................................................................ 293

Setting a Remote UI PIN .................................................................................................................................... 295

Conguring the Network Security Settings ............................................................................................................ 297

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ..................................................................................................... 299

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings .................................................................................................. 300

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings .............................................................................................. 303

Changing Port Numbers .................................................................................................................................... 305

Setting a Proxy ................................................................................................................................................. 306

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .......................................................................................................... 308

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 310

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ................................................................................... 313

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication ...................................................................... 316

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings .................................................................................................. 318

Restricting the Machine's Functions ...................................................................................................................... 322

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions .................................................................................... 324

Restricting Use of the Address Book ............................................................................................................. 325

Limiting Available Destinations ..................................................................................................................... 327

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions ........................................................................................................... 329

Restricting USB Functions .................................................................................................................................. 331

Disabling HTTP Communication ......................................................................................................................... 332

Disabling Remote UI ......................................................................................................................................... 333

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ............................................................................................ 334

Starting Remote UI ........................................................................................................................................... 335

Checking the Status and Logs ............................................................................................................................ 338

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ........................................................................................................... 344

Registering Destinations from Remote UI .............................................................................................................. 347

Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI ....................................................................................................... 351

Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software ...................................................................... 353

Updating the Firmware ......................................................................................................................................... 355

Initializing Settings ............................................................................................................................................... 358

Setting Menu List ...................................................................................................................................... 361

<Direct Connection> .............................................................................................................................................. 362

<Network Settings> .............................................................................................................................................. 363

<Output Rprt.>/<Output Reports> .......................................................................................................................... 374

<Preferences> ....................................................................................................................................................... 375

<Timer Settings> ................................................................................................................................................... 381

<Common Settings> .............................................................................................................................................. 385

<Copy Settings> .................................................................................................................................................... 387

<Fax Settings> ...................................................................................................................................................... 389

<Scan Settings> ..................................................................................................................................................... 400

<Printer Settings> ................................................................................................................................................. 405

<Adjustment/Maintenance> .................................................................................................................................. 415

<System Management Settings> ............................................................................................................................ 421

Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................. 430

Regular Cleaning .................................................................................................................................................. 432

Cleaning the Exterior ........................................................................................................................................ 433

Cleaning the Platen Glass .................................................................................................................................. 434

Cleaning the Feeder .......................................................................................................................................... 435

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ............................................................................................................................. 439

Cleaning the Machine Interior ............................................................................................................................ 440

Replacing the Toner Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 443

Replacing the Drum Cartridge ............................................................................................................................... 447

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables .................................................................................................. 451

Relocating the Machine ......................................................................................................................................... 452

Viewing the Counter Value .................................................................................................................................... 454

Printing Reports and Lists ..................................................................................................................................... 455

Consumables ........................................................................................................................................................ 460

Troubleshooting ......................................................................................................................................... 464

Common Problems ................................................................................................................................................ 466

Installation/Settings Problems ........................................................................................................................... 467

Copying/Printing Problems ................................................................................................................................ 471

Faxing/Telephone Problems ............................................................................................................................... 474

When You Cannot Print Properly ............................................................................................................................ 476

Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ................................................................................................................... 478

Paper Creases or Curls ...................................................................................................................................... 487

Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ..................................................................................................................................... 489

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed .................................................................... 490

Countermeasures for Each Message ................................................................................................................... 491

Countermeasures for Each Error Code ................................................................................................................ 504

Clearing Paper Jams .............................................................................................................................................. 510

Paper Jams in the Feeder ................................................................................................................................... 511

Paper Jams inside the Machine ........................................................................................................................... 514

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved ......................................................................................................................... 518

Appendix ........................................................................................................................................................... 521

Third Party Software ............................................................................................................................................. 522

Feature Highlights ................................................................................................................................................ 523

Going Green and Saving Money ......................................................................................................................... 524

Improving Eciency ......................................................................................................................................... 526

Going Digital .................................................................................................................................................... 528

So Much More .................................................................................................................................................. 530

Specications ....................................................................................................................................................... 532

Main Unit ........................................................................................................................................................ 533

Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................ 536

Available Paper ................................................................................................................................................ 538

Fax Function .................................................................................................................................................... 541

Scan Function .................................................................................................................................................. 542

Printer Functions .............................................................................................................................................. 543

Management Functions ..................................................................................................................................... 545

System Environment ......................................................................................................................................... 546

Network Environment ....................................................................................................................................... 548

Manuals and Their Contents .................................................................................................................................. 549

Using User's Guide ................................................................................................................................................ 550

Screen Layout of User's Guide ............................................................................................................................ 551

Viewing User's Guide ........................................................................................................................................ 554

Basic Windows Operations .................................................................................................................................... 556

Menu Route Map ................................................................................................................................................... 564

Notice .................................................................................................................................................................. 565

Setting Up

Setting Up ............................................................................................................................................................... 3

Main Functions ...................................................................................................................................................... 4

Preparations Required Before Use ....................................................................................................................... 5

Preventing Unauthorized Access .......................................................................................................................... 7

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide ........................................................................................................................ 9

Setting the Date/Time ......................................................................................................................................... 11

Setting Up the Network Environment ............................................................................................................... 14

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN .............................................................................................................. 16

Connecting to a Wired LAN ............................................................................................................................. 17

Connecting to a Wireless LAN ......................................................................................................................... 18

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode ............................................................................. 20

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode .................................................................................. 22

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router ............................................................................. 24

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings ............................................................................ 27

Checking the SSID and Network Key ........................................................................................................ 30

Setting IP Addresses ....................................................................................................................................... 31

Setting IPv4 Address ................................................................................................................................ 32

Setting IPv6 Addresses ............................................................................................................................ 35

Viewing Network Settings ............................................................................................................................... 38

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer ............................................................................ 41

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions ................................................................................. 42

Conguring Printer Ports ......................................................................................................................... 45

Setting Up Print Server ............................................................................................................................ 49

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment ............................................................................... 52

Conguring Ethernet Settings ................................................................................................................. 53

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit ............................................................................................. 55

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network .................................................................................... 56

Conguring DNS ...................................................................................................................................... 57

Conguring SMB ...................................................................................................................................... 61

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP ............................................................................... 63

Conguring SNTP .................................................................................................................................... 67

Installing Drivers ................................................................................................................................................. 69

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions ................................................................................................... 70

Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use ....................................................................................................... 71

Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name .................................................................................................. 72

Selecting the Receive Mode ............................................................................................................................ 73

Setting Up

Connecting the Telephone Line ...................................................................................................................... 74

Conguring Scan Settings ................................................................................................................................... 76

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner ................................................................................................... 77

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail .............................................................................................................. 78

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings ............................................................................................................ 79

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings ............................................................................................ 82

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location .............................................................................. 85

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location .............................................................................................. 86

Setting Up

2KUU-000

Before using the functions of the machine, the environmental conditions must be set in advance. To begin with, check

the sequences of ow required to complete the setup, and then perform the actual settings. Preparations Required

Before Use(P. 5)

●The functions installed on the machine vary depending on the model you purchased. Before using the

machine, see Main Functions(P. 4) and check the available functions.

Conguring Initial Settings of the Machine (Setup Guide)

●You can easily congure the initial settings required to use the machine, such as date, time, and network

settings, by following the on-screen guidance. Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 9)

Setting Up

Main Functions

2KUU-001

This manual covers all the functions of the model series you purchased. Before getting started, check which functions

are available on the model you purchased.

: With function : Without function

Function MF269dw MF267dw MF264dw MF269dw VP

Copy

Fax

Scan

2-sided printing

Forward received faxes

Send scanned data (e-Mail/SMB)

Wired LAN connection

Wireless LAN connection

Linking with Mobile Devices

Display Touch Panel Touch Panel 5 Lines LCD Touch Panel

Feeder / Platen glass cover Feeder (2-sided

scanning)

Feeder (1-sided

scanning)

Feeder (1-sided

scanning)

Feeder (2-sided

scanning)

●For the available driver types, see the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM supplied with the machine, or see the Canon

website (https://global.canon).

●In the User's Guide, when operations differ depending on screens, distinctions are highlighted with the

different descriptions: "Touch Panel Model" and "5 Lines LCD Model".

●When operations are the same for both models, the screens from the touch panel display will be used for

explanation in most cases. The 5 Lines LCD Model has screens different from those of the Touch Panel

Model. In either case, follow the on-screen terms to perform operations.

LINKS

Viewing User's Guide(P. 554)

Setting Up

Preparations Required Before Use

2KUU-002

Set up the machine following steps 1 to 5 in order. For more information about a particular step, click on the link to go

to the corresponding section. In addition, to use the machine safely, also check Preventing Unauthorized

Access(P. 7) .

Step 1 Setting Up Using the Setup Guide(P. 9)

Step 2 Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)

●Congure the network settings that are not covered in the Setup Guide. If you do not need

to use the Setup Guide, congure the network settings from here.

Step 3 Installing Drivers(P. 69)

Step 4 Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 70)

Step 5 Conguring Scan Settings(P. 76)

Setting Up

Setting from the Remote UI

●When the network environment settings are complete, you can eciently set the machine from a computer

using Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

Setting Up

Preventing Unauthorized Access

2KUU-003

This section describes the security measures on how to prevent unauthorized access from the external network. This is

a must-read for all users and administrators before using this machine, other printers, and multifunction machines

connected to the network. In recent years, a printer/multifunction machine connected to the network can offer you a

variety of useful functions, such as printing from a computer, operating from a computer using the remote function,

and sending scanned documents via the Internet. On the other hand, it is essential to take security measures to

reduce the security risk for information leakage, as a printer/multifunction machine has become more exposed to

threats, such as unauthorized access and theft, when it is connected to the network. This section explains necessary

settings you need to specify to prevent unauthorized access before using a printer/multifunction machine connected

to the network.

Security Measures to Prevent Unauthorized Access from the External Network

Assigning a Private IP Address(P. 7)

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission(P. 8)

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication (P. 8)

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Machine(P. 8)

Assigning a Private IP Address

An IP address is a numerical label assigned to each device participating in a computer network. A "global IP address" is

used for the communication connecting to the Internet, and a "private IP address" is used for the communication

within a local area network, such as a LAN in the company. If a global IP address is assigned, your printer/

multifunction machine is open to the public and can be accessed via the Internet. Thus, the risk of information leakage

due to unauthorized access from external network increases. On the other hand, if a private IP address is assigned,

your printer/multifunction machine is closed to a local area network and can be accessed by only users on your local

area network, such as a LAN in the company.

Global IP Address

Can be accessed from the external network

Private IP Address

Can be accessed from the users within a local area network

Basically, assign a private IP address to your printer/multifunction machine. Make sure to conrm the IP address,

assigned to the printer/multifunction machine you are using, is a private IP address or not. A private IP address is

found in one of the following ranges.

Ranges for Private IP addresses

●From 10.0.0.0 to 10.255.255.255

●From 172.16.0.0 to 172.31.255.255

●From 192.168.0.0 to 192.168.255.255

For information on how to conrm the IP address, see Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32) .

●If a global IP address is assigned to a printer/multifunction machine, you can create a network environment

to reduce the risk of unauthorized access by installing security software, such as a rewall that prevents

Setting Up

access from the external networks. If you want to assign a global IP address to and use a printer/

multifunction machine, contact your network administrator.

Using Firewall to Restrict Transmission

A rewall is a system that prevents unauthorized access from the external networks and protects against attacks/

intrusions to a local area network. You can use a rewall on your network environment to block access from the

external network that appears to be dangerous, by restricting communication from specied IP address of the

external network. The function installed to a Canon printer/multifunction machine enables you to set up the IP

address lter. For information on how to set up an IP address lter, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall

Settings(P. 300) .

Specifying the TLS Encrypted Communication

For information on the TLS Encrypted Communication, see Conguring the Network Security Settings(P. 297) ,

and on the procedures to specify, see Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308) .

Setting PIN to Manage Information Stored in the Machine

If a malicious third party attempts to gain unauthorized access to a printer/multifunction machine, setting PIN to

information stored in the machine will reduce the risk of information leakage. Canon printers/multifunction machines

enable you to protect various type of information by setting PIN.

Setting PIN to Each Function

●Setting PIN for Using Remote UI

For more information, see Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 295) .

●Setting PIN for the System Manager Settings

For more information, see Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293) .

●Address Book PIN

For more information on setting a PIN, see Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325) .

Listed above are some examples of security measures for preventing unauthorized access. For more information on

the other security measures, see Managing the Machine(P. 290) and take necessary security measures for

preventing unauthorized access to suit your environment.

Setting Up

Setting Up Using the Setup Guide

2KUU-004

When the machine is turned on ( Turning ON the Machine(P. 107) ) for the rst time, the Setup Guide starts up to

assist you to congure the initial settings of the machine by following the on-screen guidance. In the Setup Guide, the

setting screens are displayed in the following order.

Step 1 Setting the Display Language and the Country or Region

Set the language to be displayed on the operation panel screen or in reports, as well as the

country or region where the machine will be used.

1Select a language.

2For a touch panel model, select <Yes>.

3Select a country or region.

Step 2 Setting the Date and Time

Adjust the machine's date/time.

1Select a time zone.

What is UTC?

●Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the

world regulates clocks and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required

for Internet communications.

2Enter the date and time, and press <Apply> ( ).

Touch Panel Model

Tap < > or < > to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using

the numeric keys. Tap < > or < > to switch between <AM> or <PM>.

5 Lines LCD Model

Use or to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the

numeric keys. Use or to switch between <AM> or <PM>.

Step 3 Setting the Wireless LAN

Congure the settings to connect to the network using the wireless LAN.

1Select <Yes>.

●Select <No> to nish the Setup Guide without conguring the wireless LAN

settings. Read the displayed message, and press <Close> ( ).

2Select <OK>.

3Select the setting method.

●For more information about the wireless LAN settings, see Connecting to a

Wireless LAN(P. 18) .

4Read the message that is displayed, and press <Close> ( ).

Setting Up

➠When the Setup Guide is complete, the screen below appears.

Touch Panel Model 5 Lines LCD Model

Setting Up

Setting the Date/Time

2KUU-005

Set the date and time for the machine. The date and time are used as the reference for the functions specifying the

time, therefore, they need to be set accurately.

Setting the Time Zone(P. 11)

Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 11)

Setting the Daylight Saving Time(P. 12)

Setting the Time Zone

If the time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Zone>.

3Select the time zone.

What is UTC?

●Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks and

time. Time differences exist depending on the country or area where the machine is used. The correct UTC

time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

Setting the Current Date and Time

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Setting Up

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Current Date/Time Settings>.

3Enter the date and time.

Touch Panel Model

Tap < > or < > to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the numeric keys. Tap < >

or < > to switch between <AM> or <PM>.

5 Lines LCD Model

Use or to move the cursor, and enter the date and time using the numeric keys. Use or to

switch between <AM> or <PM>.

4Press <Apply> ( ).

●Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed later, the

current date and time are also changed accordingly.

●The display format of the date and time can be changed, respectively.

<Date Format>(P. 381)

<Time Format>(P. 382)

Setting the Daylight Saving Time

If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to which daylight saving time is in effect.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Daylight Saving Time Settings>.

Setting Up

3Select <Off> or <On> in <Daylight Saving Time>.

●When you select <On>, proceed to step 4.

4Set the month and day for the start date, and then select <Apply>.

●To set the day, specify "what day of which week."

5Set the month and day for the end date, and then select <Apply>.

●To set the day, specify "what day of which week."

Setting Up

Setting Up the Network Environment

2KUU-006

When connecting the machine to a wired or wireless local area network (LAN), you need to set an IP address unique to

the selected network. Select "wired" or "wireless" depending on your communication environment and networking

devices. For specic IP address settings, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

●If the machine is connected to an unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third

party.

●The machine cannot connect to both wired and wireless LANs at the same time.

●The machine does not come with a LAN cable or router. Have them ready as necessary.

●For more information about your networking devices, see the instruction manuals for the devices or contact

your manufacturer.

◼Before You Start

Follow these steps to connect the machine to a network.

Check your computer settings.

●Make sure that the computer is correctly connected to the network. For more

information, see the instruction manuals for the devices you are using, or contact the

device manufacturers.

●Make sure that the network settings have been completed on the computer. If the

network has not been set up properly, you will not be able to use the machine on the

network, even if you perform the rest of the procedure below.

●Depending on the network, you may need to change settings for the communication

method or the Ethernet type ( Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53) ). For more

information, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

●To check the MAC address of the machine.

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 38)

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 39)

Setting Up

●To connect to an IEEE 802.1X network, see Conguring IEEE 802.1X

Authentication Settings(P. 318) .

Select wired or wireless LAN.

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 16)

Connect to a wired or wireless LAN.

●Proceed to the section that corresponds to the setting you selected in step 2.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Set the IP address as necessary.

●At the time of purchase, the machine is set to automatically acquire an IP address.

Change this setting if you want to use a specic IP address. Setting IP

Addresses(P. 31)

LINKS

Conguring Settings for Communication with a Computer(P. 41)

Conguring the Machine for Your Network Environment(P. 52)

Setting Up

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN

2KUU-007

After you decide on wired or wireless LAN to connect the machine to the computer, select wired LAN or wireless LAN

using the operation panel. Note that if you change the setting from <Wired LAN> to <Wireless LAN> or vice versa, you

will need to uninstall the drivers installed on your computer and then reinstall them. For more information, see the

manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Select Wired/Wireless LAN>.

4Select <Wired LAN> or <Wireless LAN>.

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wired LAN

2KUU-008

Connect the machine to a computer via a router. Use a LAN cable to connect the machine to the router.

1Connect a LAN cable.

●Connect the machine to a router by using a LAN cable.

●Push the connector in until it clicks into place.

2Wait for several minutes.

➠The IP address is set automatically.

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)

Setting Up

Connecting to a Wireless LAN

2KUU-009

Wireless routers (or access points) connect the machine to a computer via radio waves. If your wireless router is

equipped with Wi-Fi Protected Setup (WPS), conguring your network is automatic and easy. If your networking

devices do not support automatic conguration, or if you want to specify authentication and encryption settings in

detail, you need to manually set up the connection. Make sure that your computer is correctly connected to the

network.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS(P. 18)

Manually Setting Up Connection(P. 19)

Risk of information leak

●Use wireless LAN connection at your own discretion and at your own risk. If the machine is connected to an

unsecured network, your personal information might be leaked to a third party because radio waves used in

wireless communication can go anywhere nearby, even beyond walls.

Wireless LAN security

●The wireless LAN function of this machine supports WEP, WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK. For the wireless security

compatibility of your wireless router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or contact

your manufacturer.

Required devices for wireless LAN connection

●The machine does not come with a wireless router. Have the router ready as necessary.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS

When using WPS, two modes are available: push button mode and PIN code mode.

◼Push Button Mode

Find the WPS mark shown below on the package of your wireless router. Also make sure that there is a WPS button on

your networking device. Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 20)

Setting Up

◼PIN Code Mode

Some WPS routers do not support the push button mode. If WPS PIN code mode is mentioned on the package or in

the instruction manuals of your networking device, set up the connection by entering the PIN code. Setting Up

Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 22)

●If the wireless router is set to use WEP authentication, you may not be able to set up connection using WPS.

Manually Setting Up Connection

When manually setting up a wireless connection, you can either select a wireless router or manually enter the required

information. Regardless of the method, make sure that you have the required setup information, including the SSID

and network key. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

◼Selecting a Wireless Router

Select this setup option if you need to manually set up the connection but want to complete the setup as easily as

possible. Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)

◼Manually Entering the Setup Information

If you want to specify security settings in detail, such as authentication and encryption settings, manually enter the

SSID and network key to set up the connection. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

LINKS

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 16)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode

2KUU-00A

If your wireless router supports WPS push button mode, you can easily set up a connection with a WPS button.

●How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your

networking device for help.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?>/<Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select

<Yes>.

●If the <Direct Connection will be terminated. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

4Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

5Select <WPS Push Button Mode>.

6Select <Yes>.

7Press and hold the WPS button on the wireless router.

●The button must be pressed within 2 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 6.

●Depending on the networking device, you may need to press and hold the button for 2 seconds or longer.

See the instruction manuals for your networking device for help.

Setting Up

If an error message is displayed during setup

●Select <Close> and return to step 5.

8Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

➠Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)

●On the touch panel model, while the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is

displayed in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Reducing power consumption

●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 364)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode

2KUU-00C

If your wireless router supports WPS PIN code mode, generate a PIN code with the machine and register the code to

the networking device.

●How to operate the wireless router may vary on each device. See the instruction manuals for your

networking device for help.

From a Computer

1Access your wireless router from a computer and display the screen for entering a

WPS PIN code.

●For more information, see the instruction manuals for your networking device.

From the Operation Panel

2Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

3Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

4Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?>/<Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select

<Yes>.

●If the <Direct Connection will be terminated. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

5Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

6Select <WPS PIN Code Mode>.

7Select <Yes>.

Setting Up

➠The PIN code is generated and shown on the display.

From a Computer

8Register the generated PIN code to the wireless router.

●Register the PIN code on the setup screen displayed in step 1.

●The PIN code must be registered within 10 minutes after selecting <Yes> in step 7.

If an error message is displayed during setup

●Select <Close> and return to step 6.

From the Operation Panel

9Wait until the message <Connected.> is displayed.

➠Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)

●On the touch panel model, while the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is

displayed in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Reducing power consumption

●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 364)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router

2KUU-00E

You can search the wireless routers (or access points) available for connection and select one from the display of the

machine. For the network key, enter a WEP key or PSK. Before selecting a wireless router, check and write down the

required setup information, including the SSID and network key ( Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30) ).

Security settings

●If the wireless connection is set up by selecting a wireless router, the WEP authentication method is set to

<Open System> or the WPA/WPA2 encryption method is set to <Auto> (AES-CCMP or TKIP). If you want to

select <Shared Key> for WEP authentication or <AES-CCMP> for WPA/WPA2 encryption, you need to set up

the connection using <Enter Manually>. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?>/<Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select

<Yes>.

●If the <Direct Connection will be terminated. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

4Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

5Select <SSID Settings>.

6Select <Select Access Point>.

➠The machine starts searching for available wireless routers.

●If a message is displayed telling that access point cannot be found, see Countermeasures for Each

Message(P. 491) .

Setting Up

7Select a wireless LAN router.

●Select the router whose SSID matches the one that you have written down.

If your wireless router is not found

●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network. Installation/

Settings Problems(P. 467)

8Enter the network key that you have written down.

●Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

9Select <Yes>.

If an error message is displayed during setup

●Select <Close>, check whether the network key is correct, and return to step 5.

10 Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

➠Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)

●On the touch panel model, while the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is

displayed in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Reducing power consumption

●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 364)

Setting Up

If the IP address of the machine has changed

●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Setting Up

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings

2KUU-00F

If you want to specify the security settings in detail or cannot establish the wireless connection using the other

procedures, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN connection. Before specifying detailed

settings, check and write down the required information, including the SSID, network key, and wireless security

protocols. Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?>/<Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select

<Yes>.

●If the <Direct Connection will be terminated. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

4Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

5Select <SSID Settings> <Enter Manually>.

6Enter the SSID that you have written down.

●Enter the SSID, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

7Specify the security settings based on the information that you have written down.

●If you do not need to specify the security settings, select <None>.

Setting Up

Using WEP

1Select <WEP>.

2Select an authentication method.

Sets open system authentication, which is also called "open authentication."

Uses the WEP key as a password.

When <Open System> is selected

●When connecting to a wireless LAN, the machine experiences an authentication error if the shared key

authentication is set on the wireless router. If this happens, the machine automatically changes the

setting to <Shared Key> and retries the connection.

3Select the WEP key you want to edit.

●Select <Edit WEP Key> WEP key (1 to 4).

●Up to four WEP keys can be registered.

4Enter the network key that you have written down.

●Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

5Select the desired WEP key.

●Select <Select WEP Key> select the WEP key you have edited.

Using WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK

1Select <WPA/WPA2-PSK>.

2Select an encryption method.

<Auto>

Sets the machine to automatically select AES-CCMP or TKIP to match the setting of the wireless router.

<AES-CCMP>

Sets AES-CCMP as the encryption method.

Setting Up

3Enter the network key that you have written down.

●Enter the network key, and select <Apply>.

8Select <Yes>.

If an error message is displayed during setup

●Select <Close>, check whether the specied settings are correct, and return to step 5.

9Wait until message <Connected.> is displayed.

➠Wait several minutes until the IP address and other items are set automatically.

Signal strength

●When more than one wireless router is available for connection, the machine connects to the device

with the strongest signal. Signal strength is measured using RSSI (Received Signal Strength Indication).

●You can set the IP address manually. Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)

●On the touch panel model, while the machine is connected to the wireless LAN, the Wi-Fi icon is

displayed in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Reducing power consumption

●You can set the machine to enter <Power Save Mode> based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Power Save Mode>(P. 364)

If the IP address of the machine has changed

●In a DHCP environment, the IP address of the machine may be changed automatically. If this happens, the

connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong to the same subnet.

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Setting Up

Checking the SSID and Network Key

2KUU-00H

When manually setting up a wireless connection, you need to specify the SSID and network key of your wireless router.

The SSID and network key may be indicated on these networking devices. Check your devices and write down the

necessary information before setting up the connection. For more information, see the instruction manuals for your

networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

SSID A name given for identifying a specic wireless LAN. Some other terms used for SSID include

"access point name" and "network name."

Network Key A keyword or password used for encrypting data or authenticating a network. Some other

terms used for network key include "encryption key," "WEP key," "WPA/WPA2 passphrase,"

and "preshared key (PSK)."

Wireless Security Protocols

(Authentication/Encryption)

When manually setting up a wireless connection by specifying detailed settings, you need to

specify security settings. Check the following information:

●Security types (WEP/WPA-PSK/WPA2-PSK)

●Authentication method (Open System/Shared Key)

●Encryption method (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

Setting Up

Setting IP Addresses

2KUU-00J

Connecting the machine to a network requires a unique network IP address. Two versions of IP addresses are

available: IPv4 and IPv6. Congure these settings depending on the network environment. To use IPv6 addresses, you

need to properly congure the IPv4 address settings.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)

Setting Up

Setting IPv4 Address

2KUU-00K

The machine's IPv4 address can be either assigned automatically by a dynamic IP

addressing protocol, such as DHCP, or entered manually. When connecting the

machine to a wired LAN, make sure that the connectors of the LAN cable are rmly

inserted into the ports ( Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17) ). You can test the

network connection if necessary.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)

Testing the Network Connection(P. 33)

Setting IPv4 Address

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <IP Address Settings>.

4Congure IP address settings.

Select to automatically assign an IP address via DHCP protocol. When <On> is displayed, automatic

addressing is enabled.

Select to congure the IP address settings by manually entering an IP address. In order to select this option,

the automatic acquirement must be set to <Off>.

Select when you want to view the current IP address settings.

Setting Up

Automatically assigning an IP address

1Select <Auto Acquire>.

2Select the protocol.

●Select <Select Protocol> <DHCP>.

If you do not want to use DHCP/BOOTP/RARP to assign an IP address

●Select <Off>. If you select <DHCP> when these services are unavailable, the machine will waste time

and communication resources searching the network for these services.

3Check that <Auto IP> is set to <On>.

●If <Off> is selected, change the setting to <On>.

4Select <Apply>.

●IP addresses assigned via DHCP override the address obtained via Auto IP.

Manually entering an IP address

1Congure a setting to disable auto-acquisition.

●Select <Auto Acquire>, and set both <Select Protocol> and <Auto IP> to <Off>.

2Select <Manually Acquire>.

3Specify the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address (or default gateway).

●Enter these values in each screen, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

Checking whether the settings are correct

●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer ( Starting Remote

UI(P. 335) ). If a computer is not available, you can check the connection by using the operation panel (

Testing the Network Connection(P. 33) ).

When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver

●When the MFNP port is used, the connection is maintained as long as the machine and the computer belong

to the same subnet; therefore, you do not need to add a new port. When the standard TCP/IP port is used,

you need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

*If you do not know which port is used, see Checking the Printer Port(P. 561) .

Testing the Network Connection

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Setting Up

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <IPv4 Settings> <PING Command>.

4Enter the IPv4 address of another device on the network, and select <Apply>.

➠If a proper connection has been established, <Received response from host.> is displayed.

LINKS

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

Setting Up

Setting IPv6 Addresses

2KUU-00L

The IPv6 addresses of the machine can be congured via the Remote UI. Before

setting IPv6 addresses, check the IPv4 address settings ( Viewing IPv4

Settings(P. 38) ). You need to set the correct IPv4 settings to use IPv6 addresses.

Note that the scan function that uses the scanner driver or MF Scan Utility is not

available in an IPv6 environment. The machine can use the following multiple IPv6

addresses:

Type Description

Link-local address An address that is only valid within a subnet or link and cannot be used to communicate with

devices beyond a router. A link-local address is automatically set when the IPv6 function of the

machine is enabled.

Manual address An address that is entered manually. When using this address, specify the prex length and default

router address.

Stateless address An address that is generated automatically using the MAC address of the machine and the network

prex that is advertised by the router.

Stateful address An address obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].

5Select the [Use IPv6] check box and congure the required settings.

Setting Up

[Use IPv6]

Select the check box to enable IPv6 on the machine. When not using IPv6, clear the check box.

[Use Stateless Address]

Select the check box when using a stateless address. When not using a stateless address, clear the check box.

[Use Manual Address]

When you want to manually enter an IPv6 address, select the check box and enter the IP address, prex

length, and default router address in the corresponding text boxes.

[IP Address]

Enter an IPv6 address. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) and the loopback address (::1)

cannot be entered.

[Prex Length]

Enter a number that indicates how many bits are available for the network address.

[Default Router Address]

Specify the IPv6 address of the default router as necessary. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast

address) and the loopback address (::1) cannot be entered.

[Use DHCPv6]

Select the check box when using a stateful address. When not using DHCPv6, clear the check box.

6Click [OK].

Checking whether the settings are correct

●Make sure that the Remote UI screen can be displayed with your computer by using the IPv6 address of the

machine. Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

Selecting settings from the operation panel

●IPv6 settings can also be accessed from the <Menu> screen. <IPv6 Settings>(P. 367)

Setting Up

When you have changed the IP address after installing the printer driver

●You need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

Setting Up

Viewing Network Settings

2KUU-00R

Viewing IPv4 Settings(P. 38)

Viewing IPv6 Settings(P. 38)

Viewing Direct Connection Information(P. 38)

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 38)

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN(P. 39)

●The IP address is not correctly congured if it is displayed as "0.0.0.0".

●Connecting the machine to a switching hub or bridge may result in a connection failure even when the IP

address is correctly congured. This problem can be solved by setting a certain interval before the machine

starts communicating. Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

●You can print a list of the current network settings. User Data List(P. 457)

Viewing IPv4 Settings

<Network Information> <IPv4> Select the setting to view Check the settings

Viewing IPv6 Settings

<Network Information> <IPv6> Select the setting to view Check the settings

Viewing Direct Connection Information

<Network Information> <Direct Connection Information> <Connection Details> Check

the settings

Viewing the MAC Address for Wired LAN

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

Setting Up

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings>.

➠MAC address is displayed.

Viewing the MAC Address and Information for Wireless LAN

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Wireless LAN Settings>.

●If the <Do you want to enable the wireless LAN?>/<Enable the wireless LAN?> message is displayed, select

<Yes>.

●If the <Direct Connection will be terminated. Is it OK?> message is displayed, select <Yes>.

4Read the message that is displayed, and select <OK>.

5Select <Wireless LAN Information>.

6Select the setting to view.

Setting Up

Viewing security information

●To view WEP and WPA/WPA2-PSK information, use the following procedure.

<Security Settings> Select the displayed security protocol Select the setting to view

Viewing from the <Status Monitor> screen

●<Wireless LAN Status> and <Latest Error Information> can be viewed from .

<Network Information> <Network Connection Method> <Conn. Info>/<Connection

Information> Select the setting to view

LINKS

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)

Conguring DNS(P. 57)

Setting Up

Conguring Settings for Communication with a

Computer

2KUU-00S

Specify the protocol and port when operating the machine from a computer via the network. Before conguring the

machine for printing from a computer, perform the basic setup procedures. For more information, see the manuals

for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

Setting Up Print Server(P. 49)

●Protocols explained here are rules for delivering document data between a computer and the machine, and

can be selected according to intended purposes or the network environment.

●Ports are gateways for passing data between network devices. If a communication failure occurs in the

network connection, the port settings may be the cause of the problem.

Setting Up

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions

2KUU-00U

Congure the protocols that are used for printing documents from a networked computer.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Congure printing protocols.

Conguring LPD or RAW

1Click [Edit] in [LPD Print Settings] or [RAW Print Settings].

2Congure the settings as necessary.

[Use LPD Printing]

Select the check box to print via LPD. When not using LPD printing, clear the check box.

[Use RAW Printing]

Select the check box to print via RAW. When not using RAW printing, clear the check box.

3Click [OK].

Conguring WSD

1Click [Edit] in [WSD Settings].

2Congure the settings as necessary.

Setting Up

[Use WSD Printing]

Select the check box to print via WSD. When not using WSD printing, clear the check box.

[Use WSD Browsing]

Select the check box to obtain information about the machine from a computer via WSD. This check box is

automatically selected when the [Use WSD Printing] check box is selected.

[Use WSD Scanning]

WSD scanning enables you to scan documents to a computer without installing the scanner driver. Select

the check box to scan documents via WSD. When not using WSD scanning, clear the check box.

[Use Computer Scanning]

Select the check box to use WSD scanning by operating the machine with the operation panel. This check

box can only be selected when the [Use WSD Scanning] check box is selected. To perform scanning, select

<Scan> in the Home screen or press (COPY/SCAN) key and specify a WSD-connected computer as

a scan destination ( Scanning and Saving to a Computer(P. 234) ).

[Use Multicast Discovery]

Select the check box to set the machine to reply to multicast discovery messages. If the check box is

cleared, the machine stays in sleep mode even when multicast discovery messages are owing on the

network.

3Click [OK].

Selecting settings from the operation panel

●LPD, RAW, and WSD settings can also be accessed from the <Menu> screen.

<LPD Print Settings>(P. 369)

<RAW Print Settings>(P. 369)

<WSD Settings>(P. 369)

Setting up WSD network devices

●The WSD network devices can be added from the printer folder. Open the printer folder ( Displaying the

Printer Folder(P. 556) ) click [Add a device] or [Add a printer] and follow the on-screen instructions. For

more information about how to install the driver for the WSD network, see the manuals for the relevant

drivers on the online manual website.

To change the port number

●The same port number used for the machine and a computer must be used for printing protocol.

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

Changing Port Numbers(P. 305)

Setting Up

LINKS

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

Setting Up

Conguring Printer Ports

2KUU-00W

Printing errors can occur when the IP address of the machine has been changed, or when a printer has been added via

the Windows printer folder. These errors are typically caused by incorrect printer port settings. For example, an

incorrect port number or port type may have been specied. In such situations, your attempt to print fails because the

document data cannot reach the machine. To x this type of problem, congure the printer port settings on the

computer.

●To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 556)

2Right-click the driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

3Click the [Ports] tab and congure the required settings.

Adding a port

If you have changed the IP address of the machine or you have selected an incorrect port while installing

drivers from the Windows printer folder, add a new port. There are two types of port: "MFNP Port" and

"Standard TCP/IP Port." Select the port type according to your environment.

MFNP Port

(only for IPv4 environment)

This is a port that allows the IP address of the machine to be detected automatically.

Even if the IP address of the machine is changed, the connection is maintained,

provided that the machine and the computer are in the same subnet. You do not need

to add a new port every time the IP address is changed. If you are using the machine

in an IPv4 environment, you should normally select this type of port.

●You can add an MFNP port only when you installed the driver from the provided

CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, or when you downloaded and installed the printer driver or

the fax driver from the Canon website.

Setting Up

Standard TCP/IP Port This is a standard Windows port. When you use this type of port, you need to add a

new port every time that the IP address of the machine is changed. Select this type of

port when you are using the machine in an IPv6 environment and when you cannot

add an MFNP port.

Adding an MFNP port

1Click [Add Port].

2Select [Canon MFNP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].

3Select [Auto Detect] and select the machine when it is detected, and then click [Next].

If the machine is not detected

●Click [Refresh]. If the problem persists, select [IP address] or [MAC address], enter the IP address or

MAC address of the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 38) ) and then click [Next].

4Click [Add] [Finish].

5Click [Close].

Adding a standard TCP/IP port

1Click [Add Port].

2Select [Standard TCP/IP Port] in [Available port types] and click [New Port].

3Click [Next].

4Enter the IP address or the DNS name of the machine, and click [Next].

●The [Port Name] is entered automatically. If necessary, you can change it.

Setting Up

●When the next screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the screen.

*When you select the [Device Type], select [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Standard].

5Click [Finish].

6Click [Close].

Changing the port type or number

If the printing protocol (LPD or RAW) has been changed on the machine side ( Conguring Printing

Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42) ) or the port number has been changed ( Changing Port

Numbers(P. 305) ), the corresponding settings on the computer must also be congured. This operation is

not needed for WSD ports.

MFNP port

1Click [Congure Port].

2Under [Protocol Type], select [RAW] or [LPR], and change the [Port Number].

3Click [OK].

Standard TCP/IP port

1Click [Congure Port].

2Under [Protocol], select [Raw] or [LPR].

Setting Up

●If you selected [Raw], change the [Port Number].

●If you selected [LPR], enter "lp" in [Queue Name].

3Click [OK].

4Click [Close].

LINKS

Setting Up Print Server(P. 49)

Setting Up

Setting Up Print Server

2KUU-00X

With a print server, you can reduce the load on the computer that you print from. The print server also makes it

possible to install the drivers on each computer over the network, which saves you the trouble of installing the drivers

on each computer by using the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. To set up a computer on the network as a print server,

congure the settings for sharing the printer.

●To perform the following procedure, log in to your computer with an administrator account.

●You may be unable to install drivers over the network depending on the operating system and the bit

architecture (32-bit or 64-bit) of the print server and client computers.

●When implementing a print server in a domain environment, consult your Network Administrator.

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 556)

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

3Click the [Sharing] tab, select [Share this printer], and enter the share name of the

machine.

●Click the [Change Sharing Options] button if displayed.

4Install additional drivers as necessary.

●This operation is required if you want to install the drivers in other computers running a different bit

architecture via the print server.

1Click [Additional Drivers].

2Select the check box for the bit architecture that other computers are running, and click [OK].

Setting Up

●Select additional drivers from the following, according to the operating system of the print server.

Print server Select the check box for

32-bit operating systems [x64]

64-bit operating systems [x86] under [Processor]

●If you do not know whether your Windows operating system is a 32-bit or 64-bit version, see

Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 559) .

3Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer, click [Browse] to specify the folder

that contains the drivers, and then click [OK].

●If the print server runs a 32-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] [x64] [Driver] folders

on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.

●If the print server runs a 64-bit operating system, select [intdrv] [UFRII] [32bit] [Driver] folders

on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM.

4Follow the on-screen instructions to install additional drivers.

5Click [OK].

◼Installing the Drivers on a Computer via the Print Server

1Locate the shared printer in the print server. Displaying Shared Printers in the

Print Server(P. 557)

2Double-click the shared printer.

3Follow the on-screen instructions to install the drivers.

LINKS

Setting Up

Printing from a Computer(P. 224)

Setting Up

Conguring the Machine for Your Network

Environment

2KUU-00Y

The conguration of a network varies depending on the purpose of the network. The machine has been designed to

be compatible with as many network congurations as possible, and it is equipped with a variety of technologies.

Consult your Network Administrator and set a conguration to suit your network environment.

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53)

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 55)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

Conguring DNS(P. 57)

Conguring SMB(P. 61)

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 63)

Conguring SNTP(P. 67)

Setting Up

Conguring Ethernet Settings

2KUU-010

Ethernet is a standard for communicating data in a local area network (LAN). You can

set the communication mode and the Ethernet type. In general, the machine can be

used without changing the defaults ( <Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 372) ), but

you can change these settings to suit your network environment.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Ethernet Driver Settings> <Auto Detect>.

4Select whether to congure Ethernet settings automatically or manually.

●If auto-detection is enabled, the machine detects and automatically sets the Ethernet communication mode

and the type that can be used.

Conguring Ethernet settings automatically

Select <On> in <Auto Detect>.

Conguring Ethernet settings manually

1Congure a setting to disable Auto Detect.

Select <Off> in <Auto Detect>.

2<Communication Mode> select the communication mode.

Setting Up

Alternately sends and receives communication data. Select when the machine is connected to a

networking device using half duplex.

Simultaneously sends and receives communication data. Use this setting for most environments.

3<Ethernet Type> select the Ethernet type.

4Select <Apply>.

LINKS

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 55)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

Setting Up

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit

2KUU-011

In most Ethernet networks, the maximum size of a packet that can be sent is 1500 bytes. A packet refers to a chunk of

data into which the original data is divided before being sent. The maximum transmission unit (MTU) may vary on each

network. Change the settings of the machine as necessary. For more information, contact your Network Administrator.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <MTU Size>.

4Select the MTU.

LINKS

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53)

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

Setting Up

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network

2KUU-012

When a network is designed to enjoy redundant connectivity with multiple switching hubs or bridges, it must have a

mechanism to prevent packets from looping. One effective solution is to dene the role of each switch port. However,

communication may still be disrupted for several tens of seconds immediately after you change the way that network

devices are connected, or if you add a new device. If this type of problem occurs, set a wait time for connecting to the

network.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>.

4Enter the waiting time required to start a communication with the network, and

press <Apply> ( ).

LINKS

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53)

Changing the Maximum Transmission Unit(P. 55)

Setting Up

Conguring DNS

2KUU-013

DNS (Domain Name System) provides a service for name resolution that associates a host (or domain) name with an IP

address. Congure the DNS, mDNS, or DHCP option settings as necessary. Note that the procedures for conguring

DNS are different for IPv4 and IPv6.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Click [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Congure DNS settings.

Conguring IPv4 DNS

1Click [Edit] in [IPv4 Settings].

2Congure IPv4 DNS settings.

[DNS Settings]

Setting Up

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any.

[Host Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS

server.

[Domain Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as

"example.com."

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is

changed. When specifying the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS

Dynamic Update Interval] text box.

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS and enter the mDNS name in the

[mDNS Name] text box.

[DHCP Option Settings]

[Acquire Host Name]

Select the check box to enable Option 12 to obtain the host name from the DHCP server.

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to enable Option 81 to dynamically update the DNS records through the DHCP

server.

[Acquire SMTP Server Address ]

Select the check box to enable Option 69 to obtain an SMTP server address from the DHCP server.

[Acquire POP Server Address]

Select the check box to enable Option 70 to obtain a POP3 server address from the DHCP server.

3Click [OK].

Conguring IPv6 DNS

1Click [Edit] in [IPv6 Settings].

2Congure IPv6 DNS settings.

●The [Use IPv6] check box must be selected to congure the settings. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)

Setting Up

[DNS Settings]

[Primary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a DNS server. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast address) cannot be

entered.

[Secondary DNS Server Address]

Enter the IP address of a secondary DNS server, if any. Addresses that start with "ff" (or multicast

address) cannot be entered.

[Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same host and domain names as in IPv4.

[Host Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the host name of the machine that is to be registered to the DNS

server.

[Domain Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the domain the machine belongs to, such as

"example.com."

[DNS Dynamic Update]

Select the check box to dynamically update the DNS records whenever the machine's IP address is

changed. To specify the type(s) of addresses you want to register to the DNS server, select the

check box for [Register Manual Address], [Register Stateful Address], or [Register Stateless

Address]. To specify the interval between updates, enter the time in hours in the [DNS Dynamic

Update Interval] text box.

[mDNS Settings]

[Use mDNS]

Adopted by Bonjour, mDNS (multicast DNS) is a protocol for associating a host name with an IP

address without using DNS. Select the check box to enable mDNS.

[Use Same mDNS Name as IPv4]

Select the check box to use the same mDNS name as in IPv4. To set a different name, clear the

check box and enter the mDNS name in the [mDNS Name] text box.

3Click [OK].

Selecting settings from the operation panel

●DNS settings can also be accessed from the <Menu> screen.

<IPv4 Settings>(P. 366)

<IPv6 Settings>(P. 367)

Setting Up

LINKS

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)

Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

Setting Up

Conguring SMB

2KUU-014

Server Message Block (SMB) is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and

printers, with more than one device in a network. The machine uses SMB to store

scanned documents into a shared folder. Depending on your network, you may have

to set the NetBIOS name and workgroup name.

NetBIOS Name

In a Windows network that uses NetBIOS, NetBIOS names are used for identifying network-connected

computers as well as for le sharing and other network services. Most computers use the computer name as

the NetBIOS name.

Workgroup Name

Workgroup name is a name for grouping multiple computers so that basic network functions, such as le

sharing, become available in a Windows network. Specify the workgroup name to identify the group that the

machine belongs to.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [SMB Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Specify the required settings.

[NetBIOS Name]

Setting Up

Enter alphanumeric characters for the NetBIOS name of the machine.

[Workgroup Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the workgroup that the machine belongs to.

6Click [OK].

Setting Up

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP

2KUU-015

Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) is a protocol for monitoring and controlling communication devices in a

network by using Management Information Base (MIB). The machine supports SNMPv1 and security-enhanced

SNMPv3. You can check the status of the machine from a computer when you print documents or use the Remote UI.

You can enable either SNMPv1 or SNMPv3, or both at the same time. Specify the settings for each version to suit your

network environment and the purpose of use.

SNMPv1

SNMPv1 uses information called "community" to dene the scope of SNMP communication. Because this

information is exposed to the network in plain text, your network will be vulnerable to attacks. If you want to

ensure network security, disable SNMPv1 and use SNMPv3.

SNMPv3

With SNMPv3, you can implement network device management that is protected by robust security features.

Note that TLS must be enabled for the Remote UI before conguring SNMPv3 ( Conguring the Key and

Certicate for TLS(P. 308) ).

●The machine does not support the trap notication feature of SNMP.

●To change the port number of SNMP, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 305) .

●SNMP management software, when installed on a computer on the network, enables you to congure,

monitor, and control the machine remotely from the computer. For more information, see the instruction

manuals for your management software.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [SNMP Settings].

4Click [Edit].

Setting Up

5Specify SNMPv1 settings.

●If you do not need to change SNMPv1 settings, proceed to the next step.

[Use SNMPv1]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv1. You can specify the rest of SNMPv1 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Use Community Name 1]/[Use Community Name 2]

Select the check box to specify a community name. If you do not need to specify a community name, clear

the check box.

[Community Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the community.

[MIB Access Permission]

For each community, select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Use Dedicated Community]

Dedicated Community is a preset community, intended exclusively for Administrators using Canon software.

Select the check box to use Dedicated Community, and specify [MIB Access Permission]. If you do not need to

use Dedicated Community, clear the check box.

6Specify SNMPv3 settings.

●If you do not need to change SNMPv3 settings, proceed to the next step.

Setting Up

[Use SNMPv3]

Select the check box to enable SNMPv3. You can specify the rest of SNMPv3 settings only when this check box

is selected.

[Enable User]

Select the check box to enable [User Settings 1]/[User Settings 2]/[User Settings 3]. To disable user settings,

clear the corresponding check box.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[MIB Access Permission]

Select [Read/Write] or [Read Only] for the access privileges to MIB objects.

[Read/Write] Permits both viewing and changing the values of MIB objects.

[Read Only] Permits only viewing the values of MIB objects.

[Security Settings]

Select [Authentication On/Encryption On], [Authentication On/Encryption Off], or [Authentication Off/

Encryption Off] for the desired combination of authentication and encryption settings.

[Authentication Algorithm]

Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] or [Authentication On/Encryption Off] for [Security Settings] for

the algorithm that corresponds to your environment.

[Encryption Algorithm]

Click the [Authentication On/Encryption On] for [Security Settings] for the algorithm that corresponds to your

environment.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the password in

the [Authentication Password] or [Encryption Password] text box. For conrmation, enter the same password

in the [Conrm] text box. Passwords can be set independently for authentication and encryption algorithms.

[Context Name 1]/[Context Name 2]/[Context Name 3]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the context name. Up to three context names can be registered.

7Specify Printer Management Information Acquisition Settings.

Setting Up

●With SNMP, the printer management information, such as printing protocols and printer ports, can be

monitored and obtained regularly from a computer on the network.

[Acquire Printer Management Information from Host]

Select the check box to enable monitoring of the printer management information of the machine via SNMP.

To disable monitoring of the printer management information, clear the check box.

8Click [OK].

Disabling SNMPv1

●If SNMPv1 is disabled, some of the functions of the machine become unavailable, such as obtaining machine

information via the printer driver.

Using the operation panel

●You can also specify SNMPv1 settings and enable/disable SNMPv3 settings from the <Menu> screen.

<SNMP Settings>(P. 370)

Enabling Both SNMPv1 and SNMPv3

●If both versions of SNMP are enabled, it is recommended that MIB access permission in SNMPv1 be set to

[Read Only]. MIB access permission can be set independently in SNMPv1 and SNMPv3 (and for each user in

SNMPv3). Selecting [Read/Write] (full access permission) in SNMPv1 negates the robust security features

that characterize SNMPv3 because most of the machine settings can then be controlled with SNMPv1.

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308)

Setting Up

Conguring SNTP

2KUU-016

Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) enables you to adjust the system clock by using the time server on the network.

If SNTP is used, the time server is checked at the specied intervals; therefore, the correct time can always be

maintained. The time is adjusted based on Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), so specify the time zone setting before

conguring SNTP ( Setting the Date/Time(P. 11) ). SNTP settings can be specied via the Remote UI.

●The SNTP of the machine supports both NTP (version 3) and SNTP (versions 3 and 4) servers.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Click [Edit] in [SNTP Settings].

5Select the [Use SNTP] check box and specify the required settings.

[Use SNTP]

Select the check box to use SNTP for synchronization. If you do not want to use SNTP, clear the check box.

[NTP Server Name]

Enter the IP address of the NTP or the SNTP server. If DNS is available on the network, you can enter a host

name (or FQDN) consisting of alphanumeric characters instead (example: ntp.example.com).

[Polling Interval]

Specify the interval between one synchronization and the next.

6Click [OK].

Setting Up

Testing communication with the NTP/SNTP server

●You can view communication status with the registered server by clicking [Settings/Registration] [Network

Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Check NTP Server] in [SNTP Settings]. If a proper connection has been

established, the result is displayed as shown below. Note that this operation does not adjust the system

clock.

Setting Up

Installing Drivers

2KUU-017

Install the various drivers and associated software on your computer.

1Make the necessary preparation before proceeding with the installation.

●If the machine is supplied with a CD-ROM/DVD-ROM, insert the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the

computer.

●You can download drivers and software you are going to use from the Canon website (https://global.canon).

●When new versions of drivers and software become available, they will be uploaded to the Canon website.

You can download them as necessary after checking their system requirements.

●Depending on your machine or environmental conditions, some functions may not be available.

●Some of the drivers are not supported depending on the OS. For more information about the supported

status of the latest OS, see the Canon website.

2Proceed with the installation.

●For more information about the installation procedure, see the manuals for the drivers and software you are

going to use.

●Installation of drivers is impossible if receiving of the IP address are not permitted in [IP Address Filter]. For

more information, see Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 300) .

●If sending and receiving of the IP address of the computer on which drivers are installed become disabled by

[IP Address Filter], it is no longer possible to perform printing or send faxes from that computer.

Setting Up

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions

2KUU-018

Follow steps 1 to 4 described below to congure the fax settings. First, determine which receive mode best suits your

intended use, and then follow the on-screen instructions to congure the settings. For more information about a

particular step, click on the link to go to the corresponding section.

Step 1 Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use(P. 71)

Step 2 Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 72)

Step 3 Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 73)

Step 4 Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 74)

Setting Up

Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to Use

2KUU-019

Before conguring the fax settings, determine which receive mode best suits your intended use.

Intended use Receive mode

Use fax only/Never use telephone <Auto>

This setting is for when you want to use the machine exclusively for receiving faxes,

and you do not want to use the telephone.

Mostly use telephone/Almost never use fax <Manual>

Connect your telephone to the machine. This setting is for when you mostly want to

use the telephone. You can receive incoming faxes manually.

Use both fax and telephone Use answering machine <Answering Machine>

Connect your answering machine. Callers can record a

message if they call while you are away from the telephone.

The machine automatically receives incoming faxes.

Use standard telephone <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>

Connect your telephone. The machine automatically receives

incoming faxes, and the telephone rings for incoming calls.

●Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes

properly.

●If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone

company, <DRPD: Select Fax> is also available for the receiving mode.

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

»Continue to Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name(P. 72)

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Setting Up

Registering the Fax Number and Unit Name

2KUU-01A

the machine.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <Fax Settings> <Fax Setup Guide>.

3Select <Set Up Now>.

4Select <Next>.

5Enter the fax number, and select <Apply>.

6Select <Next>.

7Enter the unit name (such as a user name or company name), and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

➠When the unit name has been registered, the RX mode setting screen is displayed.

»Continue to Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 73)

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Setting Up

Selecting the Receive Mode

2KUU-01C

Select the receive mode that suits your intended use beforehand ( Deciding Which Fax Receive Mode to

Use(P. 71) ).

1Select <Next>.

2Select the receive mode.

●Select <Yes> or <No> to select the receive mode for the operations you intend to carry out.

●If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your telephone

company, <DRPD: Select Fax> is also available for the receiving mode. Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

To set the receive mode to <Auto>

Select <No>.

To set the receive mode to <Answering Machine>

Select <Yes> <Yes>.

To set the receive mode to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>

Select <Yes> <No> <Yes>.

To set the receive mode to <Manual>

Select <Yes> <No> <No>.

3Select <Apply>.

➠When the RX mode has been set, the telephone line connection method is displayed.

»Continue to Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 74)

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Setting Up

Connecting the Telephone Line

2KUU-01E

Connect the telephone line to the machine.

1Select <Next>.

●One of the screens shown here is displayed after the receive mode has been set. Selecting the Receive

Mode(P. 73)

2Connect the telephone line to the machine.

●Connect the included telephone cable to the telephone line jack on the machine ( ) and the telephone line

jack on the wall.

●If you are using a telephone or answering machine, connect it to the external telephone jack ( ).

●If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set up the telephone to receive faxes

manually.

3Select <Next> after the telephone line has been connected.

4Select <Yes>.

Setting Up

If the machine does not automatically set the type of telephone line

Follow the procedure below to set the type of telephone line. If you are not sure of the type of phone line you

are using, contact your local telephone company.

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Select Line Type> Select the type of telephone

line

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Setting Up

Conguring Scan Settings

2KUU-01F

To send scanned originals directly by e-mail or save them to shared folders, you need to congure the network. The

Send Function Setting Tool, an application that is included with the machine, will assist you with the required setup. Set

the necessary conguration depending on your purpose and network environment.

Saving to a Computer

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 77)

Scanning to E-mail

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail(P. 78)

Scanning to Shared Folders

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 85)

LINKS

System Environment(P. 546)

Scan Function(P. 542)

Setting Up

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner

2KUU-01H

To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of software to a

computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website. In Windows,

when connecting this machine to a computer via a wireless or wired LAN, you need to register this machine in "MF

Network Scanner Selector" using the following procedure. This procedure is not required if the machine and your

computer are connected via USB.

●The scan function is not available if the machine and your computer are connected in an IPv6 environment.

Use IPv4 or a USB connection.

1Click in the system tray.

2Select the check box for the machine, and click [OK].

Setting Up

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail

2KUU-01J

Before conguring the machine for scanning to e-mail, check the setup ow shown below.

Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)

Make sure that you have the following information:

●The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

●An e-mail address to be registered as a destination.

●Information about the e-mail server, including the SMTP server name, port

numbers, whether authentication is required, and the user name and password

for authentication.

●For more information about the e-mail server settings, contact your Internet

service provider or Network Administrator.

Make sure that the computer meets the system requirements for the Send

Function Setting Tool (sending e-mail).

●System requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool System

Environment(P. 546)

●Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 332)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 333)

Set the machine conguration.

●Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 79)

●Conguring Detailed E-Mail Communication Settings (Authentication,

Encryption, etc.) Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82)

Setting Up

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings

2KUU-01K

This section describes how to congure the e-mail settings by using the Send Function Setting Tool. With the Send

Function Setting Tool, you can also register e-mail addresses to the Address Book.

●The Send Function Setting Tool helps you congure the basic settings for sending e-mails. Instead of the

Send Function Setting Tool, you can use the Remote UI to congure more detailed settings such as the

settings for POP authentication before sending or for encrypted communication. Conguring E-Mail

Communication Settings(P. 82)

1Start the Send Function Setting Tool.

Using a Web browser

Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html" in the address eld of a Web browser,

and press the [ENTER] key.

Using the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM

1Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.

●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.

2Click [Start Software Programs].

●If the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software

Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 558) .

●If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].

3Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].

4Click [Next].

●If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set].

●If the screen that cancels the Windows rewall is displayed, click [Yes].

5Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].

Setting Up

If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]

●Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the

machine, and then click [OK].

6Conrm the settings and click [OK].

2Click [Start].

●If the login screen is displayed, enter the appropriate PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then click

[Logon].

3Click [Send to E-mail Settings].

●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book,

and click [OK]. Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

4Specify the required settings.

[Registration]

[One-touch Speed Dial Number]

Setting Up

With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register an e-mail address into <One-Touch> in the

Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.

[Name for One-touch Speed Dial Number]

Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to

nd later in the Address Book.

[Send Destination Settings]

[Destination E-mail Address]

Enter the e-mail address that you want to send your scanned originals to.

[SMTP Server Settings]

[SMTP Server]

Enter the SMTP server name.

[SMTP Authentication]

Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the authentication settings of the SMTP server. When

[Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [User Name] text box and password in the [Password] text

box.

Authentication methods for sending e-mails

●To prevent e-mail transmissions by unauthorized users, the machine supports SMTP authentication (SMTP

AUTH) and POP before SMTP. For more information about the required authentication method, contact

your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

●POP before SMTP authentication can only be congured by using the Remote UI. Conguring E-Mail

Communication Settings(P. 82)

5Click [Next].

6Conrm the settings and click [Register].

7Restart the machine.

●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

Additional settings may be required depending on the network you are using. For more information, contact

your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

●To enable TLS for e-mailing, see Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82) .

●To change port numbers, see Changing Port Numbers(P. 305) .

LINKS

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail(P. 78)

Specifying E-Mail Settings(P. 259)

Registering Destinations(P. 161)

Setting Up

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings

2KUU-01L

Use the Remote UI to congure the detailed send settings, such as the settings for POP authentication and encryption

of communication before you send e-mail. Contact your provider or network administrator for the required settings.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [E-Mail Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Specify the required settings.

[SMTP Server]

Enter alphanumeric characters as the SMTP server name (or IP address) for sending e-mail.

[E-Mail Address]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the e-mail address that you want to use for the machine.

[POP Server]

Enter alphanumeric characters as the POP3 server name or IP address for sending e-mail.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters as the user name for the specied e-mail account when a POP3 server is used.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password when a POP3 server is used, select the check box and enter alphanumeric

characters in [Password].

Setting Up

Conguring Pop Authentication before Sending

POP before SMTP authentication prevents unauthorized users from using e-mail by performing user

authentication on the POP3 server.

[Use POP Authentication Before Sending]

To use the POP3 server for authentication before you send e-mail, select the check box.

[Use APOP Authentication]

Select the check box to use APOP to encrypt the password during the authentication process.

Conguring SMTP authentication

If you congure SMTP authentication (SMTP AUTH), user identication by user name and password is

performed at the time of sending e-mail.

[Use SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)]

To enable authentication on the SMTP server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters in the

[User Name] text box.

[Set/Change Password]

To specify or change the password, enter alphanumeric characters in the [Password] text box.

Conguring encrypted communication

You can congure encryption of communication with an SMTP or POP3 server.

Setting Up

[Use TLS for SMTP]

Select the check box to use TLS for encrypting communication with the SMTP server. Select the check box for

[Verify Certicate] or [Add CN to Verication Items] depending on your needs.

[Use TLS for POP]

Select the check box to encrypt communication with the POP3 server using TLS. Select the [Verify Certicate]

and [Add CN to Verication Items] check boxes as required.

6Click [OK].

●Depending on the network you are using, you may need to change the SMTP or POP3 port setting (

Changing Port Numbers(P. 305) ). For more information, contact your Internet service provider or Network

Administrator.

LINKS

Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail(P. 78)

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 79)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Setting Up

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save

Location

2KUU-01R

Before conguring the machine for scanning to shared folders, check the setup ow shown below.

Make sure that the machine and the computer are correctly connected.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)

Make sure that you have the following information:

●The IP address of the machine. Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

●The name of the computer where the shared folder is located. Checking the

Computer Name(P. 560)

●Path to and the name of the shared folder (If access restrictions are set to the

folder, the user name and password information is also needed).

●For instructions on how to create a new shared folder, see "Send Setting Guide"

(included with the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM).

Make sure that the computer meets the system requirements for the Send

Function Setting Tool.

●System requirements for the Send Function Setting Tool System

Environment(P. 546)

●Also make sure that <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> are set to <On>.

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 332)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 333)

Set the machine conguration. Setting a Shared Folder as a Save

Location(P. 86)

Setting Up

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location

2KUU-01S

The feature of scanning to shared folders is also called "Scan to SMB" because the feature uses Server Message Block

(SMB), a Windows-specic technology. SMB is a protocol for sharing resources, such as les and printers, with more

than one device in a network ( Conguring SMB(P. 61) ). To congure the machine for saving your scanned

documents into a shared folder in the network via SMB, specify the location of the shared folder from a computer in

advance. This section describes how to specify the save location by using the Send Function Setting Tool.

●You can also use the Remote UI to specify the location of the shared folder as save destination by registering

the folder to the Address Book. Registering Destinations in the Address Book from Remote UI.

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

1Start the Send Function Setting Tool.

Using a Web browser

Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/sendsupport_login.html" in the address eld of a Web browser,

and press the [ENTER] key.

Using the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM

1Insert the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM into the drive on the computer.

●Select a language and click [OK] if you are prompted to do so.

2Click [Start Software Programs].

●If the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen is not displayed, see Displaying the [Software

Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 558) .

●If [AutoPlay] is displayed, click [Run MInst.exe].

3Click [Start] for [Send Function Setting Tool].

4Click [Next].

●If you want to view "Send Setting Guide," click [How to Set].

●If the screen that cancels the Windows rewall is displayed, click [Yes].

5Select the machine from [Device List] and click [Next].

Setting Up

If the machine is not displayed in [Device List]

●Click [Search Again]. If the problem persists, click [Search by IP Address], enter the IP address of the

machine, and then click [OK].

6Conrm the settings and click [OK].

2Click [Start].

●If the login screen is displayed, enter the appropriate PIN in the corresponding text boxes, and then click

[Logon].

3Click [Store to Shared Folder Settings].

●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the PIN for the Address Book,

and click [OK]. Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

4Specify the required settings.

[Registration]

[One-touch Speed Dial Number]

Setting Up

With the Send Function Setting Tool, you can register a shared folder for saving scanned documents

into <One-Touch> in the Address Book. Select a number from the drop-down list.

[Name for One-touch Speed Dial Number]

Enter the name for identifying the destination to be registered. Set a name that will be easy for you to

nd later in the Address Book.

[Store Destination Settings]

[Protocol]

The protocol that is used for sending scanned documents to a shared folder is displayed.

[Computer Name of Store Destination]

Enter the name or the IP address of the computer where the shared folder is located.

[Shared Folder Name on Store Destination Computer]

Enter the name of (or path to) the shared folder. For example, if the shared folder is a subfolder named

"share" and is contained in the [Public] folder in drive C (path: C:\users\public\share), enter

"users\public\share."

[Status of Settings for Shared Folder]

[Access Restriction to Shared Folder]

Click the [Not Set] or [Set] radio button to match the access restrictions set to the shared folder. When

[Set] is selected, enter the user name in the [Registered User Name] text box and password in the

[Password to Access] text box.

5Click [Next].

6Conrm the settings and click [Register].

7Restart the machine.

●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

LINKS

Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 85)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Setting Up

Basic Operations

Basic Operations ............................................................................................................................................... 91

Parts and Their Functions ................................................................................................................................... 94

Front Side ....................................................................................................................................................... 95

Back Side ........................................................................................................................................................ 97

Interior ........................................................................................................................................................... 98

Feeder ............................................................................................................................................................ 99

Multi-Purpose Tray ....................................................................................................................................... 100

Drawer ......................................................................................................................................................... 101

Operation Panel ........................................................................................................................................... 102

Turning ON the Machine ................................................................................................................................... 107

Turning OFF the Machine ............................................................................................................................. 108

Using the Operation Panel ............................................................................................................................... 109

Basic Screens ................................................................................................................................................ 110

Home Screen ......................................................................................................................................... 111

<Status Monitor> Screen ........................................................................................................................ 115

Message Display .................................................................................................................................... 117

Basic Operation ............................................................................................................................................ 118

Entering Text ................................................................................................................................................ 123

Placing Originals ............................................................................................................................................... 128

Loading Paper .................................................................................................................................................... 132

Loading Paper in the Drawer ........................................................................................................................ 134

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray ...................................................................................................... 138

Loading Envelopes ....................................................................................................................................... 141

Loading Preprinted Paper ............................................................................................................................ 143

Specifying Paper Size and Type .................................................................................................................... 145

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer ....................................................................................... 146

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray ..................................................................... 147

Registering a Custom Paper Size ........................................................................................................... 148

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed ........................................................................................................ 150

Customizing the Display ................................................................................................................................... 151

Customizing the Home Screen ..................................................................................................................... 152

Changing the Default Settings for Functions .................................................................................................. 154

Setting Sounds ................................................................................................................................................... 155

Entering Quiet Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 157

Basic Operations

Entering Sleep Mode ......................................................................................................................................... 159

Registering Destinations .................................................................................................................................. 161

Registering Destinations in the Address Book .............................................................................................. 163

Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial ................................................................................................ 165

Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group ........................................................................................ 167

Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book ...................................................................... 169

Basic Operations

2KUU-01U

This chapter describes basic operations, such as how to use the operation panel or how to load the paper, that are

frequently performed to use the functions of the machine.

◼Parts and Their Functions

This section describes the exterior and interior parts of the machine and their functions, as well as how to use the keys

on the operation panel and how to view the display. Parts and Their Functions(P. 94)

◼Turning ON the Machine

This section describes how to turn the machine ON and OFF. Turning ON the Machine(P. 107)

◼Using the Operation Panel

This section describes how to use the display for tasks such as selecting items and adjusting settings. Also, it describes

how to enter characters and numbers. Using the Operation Panel(P. 109)

◼Placing Originals

This section describes how to place originals on the platen glass and in the feeder. Placing Originals(P. 128)

Basic Operations

◼Loading Paper

This section describes how to load the paper into the drawer. Loading Paper(P. 132)

◼Customizing the Display

This section describes how to rearrange buttons or create shortcut buttons in order to make it easier to use screens

shown in the display. Customizing the Display(P. 151)

◼Entering Quiet Mode

This section describes how to place the machine in quiet mode to reduce operation sound. Entering Quiet

Mode(P. 157)

◼Entering Sleep Mode

This section describes how to set the sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 159)

Basic Operations

◼Registering Destinations

This section describes how to register destinations for sending faxes or scanned documents. Registering

Destinations(P. 161)

Basic Operations

Parts and Their Functions

2KUU-01W

This section describes the parts of the machine (exterior, front and back side, and interior) and how they function. In

addition to describing the parts of the machine used for such basic operations as loading paper and replacing the

toner cartridges, etc., this section also describes the keys on the operation panel and display. Read this section for tips

on how to use the machine properly.

Front Side(P. 95)

Back Side(P. 97)

Interior(P. 98)

Feeder(P. 99)

Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 100)

Drawer(P. 101)

Operation Panel(P. 102)

Basic Operations

Front Side

2KUU-01X

Feeder

Automatically feeds originals into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets of original are loaded

in the feeder, originals can be scanned continuously. Feeder(P. 99)

Operation panel

The operation panel consists of keys such as Stop key, a display, and status indicators. You can perform all

the operations and specify settings from the operation panel.

Operation Panel(P. 102)

Basic Screens(P. 110)

Output tray

Printed paper is output to the output tray.

Lift handles

Hold the lift handles when carrying the machine. Relocating the Machine(P. 452)

Power switch

Turns the power ON or OFF. To restart the machine, turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and

turn it back ON.

Paper stopper

Open the paper stopper when you want to prevent paper from falling out of the output tray.

Drawer

Load the type of paper you frequently use into the drawer. Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134)

Basic Operations

Front cover

Open the front cover when replacing toner cartridge or drum cartridge. Procedure for Replacing the

Toner Cartridge(P. 444)

Platen glass

When scanning books, originals of heavy or thin paper and other originals that cannot be scanned using the

feeder, place them on the platen glass. Placing Originals(P. 128)

Ventilation slots

Air inside the machine is vented out to cool down the inside of the machine. Note that placing objects in front

of the ventilation slots prevents ventilation.

Basic Operations

Back Side

2KUU-01Y

Back cover

Open the back cover when clearing paper jams. Clearing Paper Jams(P. 510)

Rating label

The label shows the serial number, which is needed when making inquiries about the machine. When a

Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 518)

USB port

Connect a USB cable when connecting the machine and a computer.

LAN port

Connect a LAN cable when connecting the machine to a wired LAN router, etc. Connecting to a Wired

LAN(P. 17)

Power socket

Connect the power cord.

External telephone jack

Connect your telephone or answering machine. Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 74)

Telephone line jack

Connect a telephone cable when connecting the machine to a telephone line. Connecting the Telephone

Line(P. 74)

Basic Operations

Interior

2KUU-020

Operation panel

Lift this panel to replace the toner cartridge, etc., or clear paper jams.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 514)

Toner cover

Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge, etc., or clear paper jams.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 514)

Paper exit guide

Open this guide to clear paper jams. Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 514)

LINKS

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Basic Operations

Feeder

2KUU-021

Slide guides

Adjust these guides to match the width of original.

Feeder cover

Open when clearing paper jams. Paper Jams in the Feeder(P. 511)

Original supply tray

Automatically feeds originals into the machine for scanning. When two or more sheets of original are loaded

in the feeder, originals can be scanned continuously. Placing Originals(P. 128)

Original output tray

Scanned originals are output here.

Original scanning area

Originals loaded in the feeder are automatically fed to the original scanning area to be scanned.

●Do not place any objects in the original output area. Doing so may cause damage to the originals.

●Regularly clean the feeder and platen glass in order to obtain proper print results. Regular

Cleaning(P. 432)

Basic Operations

Multi-Purpose Tray

2KUU-022

Multi-Purpose Tray

Lower the multi-purpose tray when loading paper.

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the width of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 138)

Basic Operations

100

Drawer

2KUU-023

Paper guides

Adjust the paper guides to exactly the size of the loaded paper to ensure that paper is fed straight into the

machine.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134)

Basic Operations

101

Operation Panel

2KUU-024

Operation Panel of Touch Panel Model(P. 102)

Operation Panel of 5 Lines LCD Model(P. 104)

Operation Panel of Touch Panel Model

[Home] key

Press to display the Home screen, which provides access to the setting menu and functions such as copy and

scan.

Home Screen(P. 111)

Customizing the Home Screen(P. 152)

Display

You can view the progress of the machine and error statuses. The display is also a touch panel, so you can

specify settings by touching the screen directly.

Basic Screens(P. 110)

Basic Operation(P. 118)

Basic Operations

102

[Reset] key

Press to cancel the settings and restore the previously specied settings.

[Clear] key

Press to delete the entered numbers and text.

[Back] key

Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the

settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.

[Status Monitor] key

Press to check the status of printing or faxing, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such

as the IP address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the paper size and

the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, etc., or whether any errors occurred. <Status Monitor>

Screen(P. 115)

Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)

Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text(P. 123)

[Stop] key

Press to cancel printing and other operations.

[Energy Saver] key

Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press

the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 159)

[Quiet Mode] key

Press to put the machine into quiet mode. While in quiet mode this key is lit in green. Press the key again to

exit quiet mode. Entering Quiet Mode(P. 157)

[Error] indicator

Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.

[Processing/Data] indicator

Blinks while operations such as sending or printing are being performed. Lights up when there

are documents waiting to be processed.

[Start] key

Press to scan or copy originals.

[#] key

Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".

Basic Operations

103

[*] key

Press to switch the type of text that is entered.

Operation Panel of 5 Lines LCD Model

[Menu] key

Press to start specifying many of the settings for the machine, such as <Timer Settings> or <Preferences>.

Setting Menu List(P. 361)

[COPY/SCAN] key

Press to switch the mode to copy or scan.

[ID Card Copy] key

Press to enter a mode for copying the front and back sides of a driver's license or other ID card onto the

same side of a page at actual size. Making ID Card Copies(P. 189)

Basic Operations

104

Display

You can view the operation and error statuses of this machine, the amount remaining in the toner cartridge,

etc., and other conditions.

Basic Screens(P. 110)

Basic Operation(P. 118)

[Reset] key

Press to cancel the settings and restore the previously specied settings.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to return to the previous screen. When entering numbers, press to move the

cursor to the left.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately above the currently selected item. When

changing setting values, press to increase a value.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to proceed to the next screen. When entering numbers, press to move the

cursor to the right.

[ ] key

When specifying settings, press to select the item immediately below the currently selected item. When

changing setting values, press to decrease a value.

[Clear] key

Press to delete the entered numbers and text.

[Back] key

Press to return to the previous screen. If you press this key when specifying settings, for example, the

settings are not applied and the display returns to the previous screen.

[ ] key

Press to apply settings or specied details.

[Status Monitor] key

Press to check the printing status, to view the usage history, or to view the network settings such as the IP

address of the machine. You can also check the status of the machine, such as the paper size and the amount

remaining in the toner cartridge, etc., or whether any errors occurred. <Status Monitor> Screen(P. 115)

[Paper Setting] key

Press to select the paper you want to use, or to set the size and type of paper loaded in the paper source.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

Basic Operations

105

Numeric keys ([0]-[9] keys)

Press to enter numbers and text. Entering Text(P. 123)

[Stop] key

Press to cancel printing and other operations.

[Energy Saver] key

Press to put the machine into sleep mode. The key lights up green when the machine is in sleep mode. Press

the key again to exit sleep mode. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 159)

[Scan -> PC] key

Press to send the scanned documents to the registered computer. Scanning Using the Shortcut

Key(P. 236)

[Paper Save Copy] key

Press to put the machine into paper save copy mode for copying multiple document pages reduced on a

single sheet. Using <Paper Save Copy>(P. 187)

[Quiet Mode] key

Press to put the machine into quiet mode. While in quiet mode this key is lit in green. Press the key again to

exit quiet mode. Entering Quiet Mode(P. 157)

[Error] indicator

Blinks or lights up when an error such as a paper jam occurs.

[Processing/Data] indicator

Blinks while operations such as sending or printing are being performed. Lights up when there

are documents waiting to be processed.

[Start] key

Press to scan or copy originals.

[#] key

Press to enter symbols such as "@" or "/".

[*] key

Press to switch the type of text that is entered.

LINKS

Basic Operation(P. 118)

Basic Operations

106

Turning ON the Machine

2KUU-025

This section describes how to turn ON the machine.

1Make sure that the power plug is rmly inserted into a power outlet.

2Press the power switch.

➠The Start screen appears. Operation Panel(P. 102)

●A blank sheet of paper may be output when you turn ON the power for the rst time after purchasing the

machine. This is not a malfunction.

●On the touch panel model, you can select the screen that is displayed rst after the machine is turned ON.

<Default Screen after Startup/Restoration>(P. 377)

LINKS

Turning OFF the Machine(P. 108)

Basic Operations

107

Turning OFF the Machine

2KUU-026

This section describes how to turn OFF the machine.

1Press the power switch.

●Make sure that the power indicator has gone out.

●It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down. Do not unplug the power cord until the

display turns off.

●To restart the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds after the machine is turned OFF.

●Even when the power is turned OFF, the machine continues to consume a small amount of power. To reduce

power consumption to zero, unplug the power plug from the AC power outlet.

Basic Operations

108

Using the Operation Panel

2KUU-027

You can use the display and keys of the operation panel to congure machine settings or operate functions. This

section describes basic usage of the display and keys.

Basic Screens(P. 110)

Basic Operation(P. 118)

Entering Text(P. 123)

●If you want to invert the light and dark parts of the display: <Invert Screen Colors>(P. 377)

●If you want to adjust the contrast of the display: <Contrast>(P. 377)

LINKS

Operation Panel(P. 102)

Basic Operations

109

Basic Screens

2KUU-028

The Home screen or settings screen appears on the display, allowing you to initiate functions such as copy and scan.

You can also use the display to check information such as error messages and the machine's operation status. The

screen is also a touch panel, so you can perform operations by touching the screen directly.

Home Screen(P. 111)

<Status Monitor> Screen(P. 115)

Message Display(P. 117)

For the Touch Panel Model

●You can customize the Home screen by rearranging frequently used buttons for easier access to the

respective functions. Customizing the Home Screen(P. 152)

Basic Operations

110

Home Screen

2KUU-029

Home Screen (Touch Panel Model)(P. 111)

Main Screen (5 Lines LCD Model)(P. 113)

Home Screen (Touch Panel Model)

The Home screen is displayed when the power is turned ON or by pressing on the operation panel. Use this

screen to specify settings for and register functions.

<Menu>

<Timer Settings>, <Preferences>, and many other machine settings

start from this button. Setting Menu List(P. 361)

Change page

Use this to view another page in the Home screen.

Wi-Fi icon

Displayed when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.

<Copy>

Use this button to start copying. Copying(P. 171)

<Fax>

Use this button to send a fax from the machine. Faxing(P. 193)

<Scan>

Scans an original and converts it into an electronic le. You can save

scanned les on your computer or send them via e-mail.

Scanning(P. 231)

<Addr. Book>

Use this to register or edit the destinations for e-mails and faxes. You

can also display a registered destination when sending an e-mail or

fax. Registering Destinations(P. 161)

Basic Operations

111

This button is used for specifying the size and type of paper loaded in

the drawer and multi-purpose tray. Specifying Paper Size and

Type(P. 145)

Allows you to change the order that Home screen buttons are

displayed in. Customizing the Home Screen(P. 152)

Settings are preregistered for economically copying 2 pages (or 4

pages) reduced on a single sheet. Using <Paper Save

Copy>(P. 187)

By registering scan settings beforehand, you can simply select this

button to start a scan. Scanning Using the Shortcut Key(P. 236)

Use this function to copy the front and back sides of a driver's license

or other card onto the same side of one sheet of paper. Making ID

Card Copies(P. 189)

Use this function to copy passports for several individuals laid out on

a single sheet of paper. Making Passport Copy(P. 190)

Use this to establish a connection to a mobile device. Connecting

with Mobile Devices(P. 267)

<One-Touch 1> to <One-Touch 4>

If you register destinations beforehand as One-Touch Dial numbers,

they can be quickly displayed. Registering Multiple Destinations

as a Group(P. 167)

Basic Operations

112

If you register destinations beforehand as coded dial numbers, they

can be quickly displayed by simply entering a three-digit number.

Registering Destinations in the Address Book(P. 163)

Main Screen (5 Lines LCD Model)

The main screen shows the screens for copying, scanning, and other functions, as well as the screens for specifying

settings for these functions.

Copy Main Screen / Scan Main Screen

When you press (COPY/SCAN) the main screen for the selected function is displayed. The copy main

screen is shown below as an example.

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

<Paper Settings> Screen

When you press (Paper Setting) to select the paper to copy or print on, the <Paper Settings> screen is

displayed. Select the paper on the screen. Also, for example, you can press this key to change the paper settings

when you load a paper size that is different from the previously loaded paper size. Note that the paper setting

must be correctly specied so that the paper is fed properly.

Selecting Paper Tray

Use to select the paper for each tray. Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

You can set the machine to display only frequently used paper sizes in the selection screen.

<Menu> Screen

When you press , the <Menu> screen is displayed. On this screen, you can start specifying general machine

settings such as <Preferences> or <Timer Settings>, as well as many of the settings for each function, such as

copy and scan.

Basic Operations

113

Setting Menu List(P. 361)

LINKS

Customizing the Home Screen(P. 152)

Basic Operations

114

<Status Monitor> Screen

2KUU-02A

When you press , a screen appears in which you can check the progress of document processing as well as the

status of the machine (the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges, etc.) and network settings such as the

machine's IP address.

Displays the details of any errors that occurred. Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 491)

Displays the status of the machine, such as the paper size or the amount of toner remaining in the toner

cartridges.

Displays whether paper is loaded in each paper source.

Displays the amount of toner remaining in the toner cartridges. Other internal parts may reach the end of

their lifetime before the toner runs out.

Displays the totals for printouts. Printing Reports and Lists(P. 455)

Displays rmware version information.

Displays the serial number of the machine.

Basic Operations

115

Status and logs of copied, printed, and sent/received documents

Displays the current status of the selected item. You can check <TX Job>,<RX Job>, and <Fax Forwarding

Errors> statuses only on a touch panel model. The <Copy/Print Job> screen is shown below as an example.

Displays the network settings such as the IP address of the machine and status such as the condition of

wireless LAN communications. Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

Basic Operations

116

Message Display

2KUU-02C

Messages are displayed on the screen in situations such as when paper runs out or when the expiration of the toner

cartridge lifetime is reached. Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 491)

When <You have notications.> or <Tap the [i] icon.> is displayed (Touch Panel Model)

●Tap to view the notication.

When an Error Occurs

In some cases when an error occurs, instructions on how to respond to the error are displayed. Follow the on-

screen instructions to solve the problem. The screen displayed when a paper jam occurs is shown below as an

example.

Touch Panel Model

5 Lines LCD Model

Basic Operations

117

Basic Operation

2KUU-02E

Basic Operation of Touch Panel Model(P. 118)

Basic Operation of 5 Lines LCD Model(P. 120)

Basic Operation of Touch Panel Model

The display is a touch panel, allowing you to operate directly on the screen.

Avoid the following actions.

●The display may malfunction or be damaged.

-Pressing forcefully

- Pressing with pointed objects (ngernails, ballpoint pen, pencil, etc.)

- Operating with wet/soiled hands

- Operating the display while an object is placed on it

●Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective lm from the display.

Tap

Touch the screen lightly and quickly. Use for selecting or nalizing items.

Long Touch

Keep nger held on the screen. When text cannot be completely displayed on one line ("..." appears), touch and

hold the line to scroll all of the text. Also continuously increases/decreases the copy magnication.

Basic Operations

118

◼Selecting Items

Tap an item name or button to make a selection.

If an item is mistakenly touched

●Slide your nger away then release it from the screen to cancel the selection.

To return to the previous screen

●Press to return to the previous screen.

◼Scrolling the Screen

The scroll bar appears on the screen when there is still information that is undisplayed. If the scroll bar is displayed,

tap < > or < > to scroll the screen. The screen changes page by page, and the page number is displayed in the

scroll bar.

Basic Operations

119

◼Changing Value and Setting

Changing value

Tap < > or < > to enter values. If an icon such as below is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you

can enter values directly using the numeric keys.

To move the cursor

●When < > or < > is displayed, tap to move the cursor.

Changing setting value

Tap <+> or <-> to adjust the setting on the scale.

●You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the display language: <Display

Settings>(P. 377)

●You can change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specied

length of time: <Function After Auto Reset>(P. 383)

●You can change various settings about the operability such as screen brightness: <Display

Settings>(P. 377)

Basic Operation of 5 Lines LCD Model

Use the keys shown below to specify settings and adjust values.

Basic Operations

120

Using /

Scrolling the screen

The scroll bar is displayed on the right side of the screen when not all of the information ts on one screen. If

the scroll bar is displayed, use / to scroll up or down. The text and background colors of an item are

inverted when it is selected.

Changing a setting value

Use / to enter values. If an icon such as below is displayed at the upper left of the screen, you can

enter values directly using the numeric keys. Entering Text(P. 123)

Values in ( ) displayed below the entry box are the enterable value range.

Using /

Proceeding to next screen/Returning to previous screen

Press to proceed to the next screen. Press to return to the previous screen.

You can also proceed to the next screen by pressing , and return to the previous screen by pressing

Basic Operations

121

Changing Setting Values

Use / to adjust the slider scale.

Moving the Cursor

Use / to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 123)

Using

Press to apply a setting.

Using the Numeric Keys

Use the numeric keys to enter text and values. Entering Text(P. 123)

●You can change a variety of display-related settings, such as the scrolling speed or display language:

<Display Settings>(P. 377)

●To change the screen that is automatically displayed when the machine remains idle for a specied length of

time: <Function After Auto Reset>(P. 383)

●You can change various settings about the operability such as screen brightness: <Display

Settings>(P. 377)

Basic Operations

122

Entering Text

2KUU-02F

Entering Text on the Touch Panel Model(P. 123)

Entering Text on the 5 Lines LCD Model(P. 125)

Entering Text on the Touch Panel Model

Use the display and numeric keys to enter text and values.

Switching the Type of Character

Tap <A/a/12> to switch the type of character that is entered. The currently selected type of character is indicated

by the "A", "a", or "12" displayed above and to the right of the text input eld.

●You can also press to switch the type of character.

Types of Character That Can Be Entered

Enter character with the numeric keys and the display. Character that can be entered is listed below.

Key A a 12

@ . - _ / 1

ABC abc 2

Basic Operations

123

DEF def 3

GHI ghi 4

JKL jkl 5

MNO mno 6

PQRS pqrs 7

TUV tuv 8

WXYZ wxyz 9

(Not available) 0

(space) - . * # ! " , ; : ^ ` _ = / | ' ? $ @ % & + \ ~ ( ) [ ] { } < > (Not available)

●When the type of text that is entered is <A> or <a>, press or tap <#> to display enterable symbols

in the screen. Tap symbols to enter.

Example of Entering Text and Numbers

Example: "Canon-1"

1Press <A/a/12> (or press ) repeatedly until <A> is selected.

2Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.

3Press <A/a/12> (or press ) repeatedly until <a> is selected.

4Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.

5Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.

6Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.

7Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.

8Press repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.

9Press <A/a/12> (or press ) repeatedly until <12> is selected.

Basic Operations

124

10 Press .

11 Tap <Apply>.

Deleting Text

One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.

Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)

Tap < > or < > to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and tap <

Entering Text on the 5 Lines LCD Model

Use the numeric keys to enter text and values.

Switching the Type of Character

Press to switch the type of character that is entered. The currently selected type of character is indicated by

the "A", "a", or "12" of <Entry Mode>.

●You can also select <Entry Mode> and press to switch the type of character.

Types of Character That Can Be Entered

Character that can be entered using the numeric keys and are listed below.

Key A a 12

@ . - _ / 1

Basic Operations

125

ABC abc 2

DEF def 3

GHI ghi 4

JKL jkl 5

MNO mno 6

PQRS pqrs 7

TUV tuv 8

WXYZ wxyz 9

(Not available) 0

(space) - . * # ! " , ; : ^ ` _ = / | ' ? $ @ % & + \ ~ ( ) [ ] { } < > (Not available)

●Press or select <Symbol> and press when the type of character that is entered is <A> or

<a> to display a screen for selecting symbols. Use the / / / keys to select the symbol to

enter, and press .

Deleting Text

One character is deleted each time is pressed. Press and hold to delete all of the entered text.

Moving the Cursor (Entering a Space)

Press / to move the cursor. To enter a space, move the cursor to the end of the text, and press .

Example of Entering Text and Numbers

Example: "Canon-1"

1Press repeatedly until <A> is selected.

2Press repeatedly until the letter "C" is selected.

3Press repeatedly until <a> is selected.

Basic Operations

126

4Press repeatedly until the letter "a" is selected.

5Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.

6Press repeatedly until the letter "o" is selected.

7Press repeatedly until the letter "n" is selected.

8Press repeatedly until the symbol "-" is selected.

9Press repeatedly until <12> is selected.

10 Press .

11 Select <Apply>, and press .

Basic Operations

127

Placing Originals

2KUU-02H

Place originals on the platen glass or in the feeder. Use the platen glass when scanning thick or bound documents

such as books. You can load two or more sheets of originals in the feeder so that they can be scanned continuously.

For information on loadable sizes, etc., see Main Unit(P. 533) or Feeder(P. 536) .

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass(P. 129)

Placing Originals in the Feeder(P. 129)

Use originals that are completely dry

●When placing originals, make sure that any glue, ink, or correction uid on the originals has completely

dried.

To avoid paper jams

●Do not place the following types of originals in the feeder as this may cause paper jams:

- Wrinkled or creased paper

-Carbon paper

- Curled or rolled paper

- Coated paper

- Torn paper

- Onion skin or thin paper

- Stapled or clipped originals

- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

- Transparencies

To scan originals more accurately

●Originals placed in the feeder are scanned while being fed into the machine. On the other hand, originals

placed on the platen glass remain in a xed position while they are scanned. To ensure more accurate

scanning results, placing originals on the platen glass is recommended.

To scan tracing paper or transparencies

●To scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), place them on the platen glass.

Basic Operations

128

Placing Originals on the Platen Glass

1Open the feeder.

2Place the original face down on the platen glass.

●Align the corner of the original with the top-left corner of the platen glass.

●To scan transparent originals (for example, tracing paper or transparencies), cover them with plain white

paper.

3Gently close the feeder.

➠The machine is ready to scan the original.

When scanning is complete

●Remove the original from the platen glass.

Placing Originals in the Feeder

1Open the original supply tray.

Basic Operations

129

2Spread the slide guides apart.

●Slide the slide guides outward until they are slightly farther apart than the actual original width.

3Fan the original stack and align the edges.

●Fan the original stack in small batches, and align the edges by lightly tapping the stack on a at surface a few

times.

4Place the original(s) face up in the feeder.

●Make sure that the original stack does not exceed the load limit line ( ).

●Do not load originals of various sizes at the same time.

●If originals are loaded so that they exceed the load limit line, scanning may stop or a paper jam may occur.

Basic Operations

130

5Align the slide guides against the edges of the original.

●Slide the slide guides inward until they are aligned securely against the edges of the original.

➠The machine is ready to scan the original.

Align the slide guides securely against the edges of the original

●Slide guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jam.

While originals are being scanned

●Do not add or remove originals.

When scanning is complete

●Remove the scanned originals from beneath the feeder to prevent paper jams.

Basic Operations

131

Loading Paper

2KUU-02J

You can load the paper into the drawer. See Available Paper(P. 538) for available paper sizes and types.

About Paper

Precautions for Paper(P. 132)

Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine(P. 133)

How to Load Paper

Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134)

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 138)

Loading Envelopes(P. 141)

Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 143)

Conguring the Settings for the Loaded Paper

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

Precautions for Paper

Do not use the following types of paper:

●A paper jam or printing error may occur.

- Wrinkled or creased paper

- Curled or rolled paper

- Torn paper

- Damp paper

- Very thin paper

- Thin coarse paper

- Paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

- Back side of paper printed by a thermal transfer printer

- Highly textured paper

- Glossy paper

Notes on use of paper

●Only use paper that has fully acclimatized to the environment in which the machine is installed. Using paper

that has been stored under different temperature or humidity conditions may cause paper jams or result in

poor print quality.

Basic Operations

132

Paper handling and storage

●It is recommended that you use paper as soon as possible after unwrapping. Paper remaining unused

should be covered with the original wrapping paper and stored on a at surface.

●Keep the paper wrapped in its original package to protect the paper from moisture or dryness.

●Do not store the paper in such a way that may cause it to curl or fold.

●Do not store the paper vertically or do not stack too much paper.

●Do not store the paper in direct sunlight, or in a place subject to high humidity, dryness, or drastic changes

in temperature or humidity.

When printing on paper that has absorbed moisture

●Steam may emit from the paper output area, or water droplets may form around the paper output area.

There is nothing unusual about any of these occurrences, which occur when the heat generated from xing

toner on the paper causes moisture in the paper to evaporate (most likely to occur at low room

temperatures).

Storing the Paper Printed with the Machine

When handling/storing the paper printed with the machine, take the following precautions.

◼How to Store the Printed Paper

●Store on a at surface.

●Do not store together with articles made of PVC (polyvinyl chloride) such as clear folders. Toner may melt, resulting

in the paper's sticking to PVC articles.

●Take care that the paper does not get folded or creased. Toner may peel off.

●To store over a long period of time (two years or longer), store in binders or equivalent.

●When the paper is stored over a long period of time, it may become discolored and thus the print may seem to have

undergone a change of color.

●Do not store in a place where the temperature is high.

◼Precautions When Applying Adhesive

●Always use insoluble adhesive.

●Before applying adhesive, perform a test using a printout no longer required.

●When putting adhesive-applied paper sheets one over another, make sure that the adhesive is completely dried out.

LINKS

Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 148)

Basic Operations

133

Loading Paper in the Drawer

2KUU-02K

Load the paper that you usually use in the drawer. When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the drawer,

load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 138)

When loading A5 size paper

●When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation. When loading paper in landscape

orientation, you must congure this setting in the printer driver. For more information, refer to the printer

driver Help.

Landscape orientation Portrait orientation

1Open the front cover.

2Spread the paper guides apart.

●Slide the paper guides outward.

Basic Operations

134

3Load the paper and slide it all the way in, until it touches the back side.

●Load the paper in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the machine) and the print side face up.

Paper cannot be loaded in landscape orientation.

●Before loading it, fan the paper stack well, and tap it on a at surface to align the edges.

●When you insert the paper with <Notify to Check Paper Settings> set to <On>, a conrmation screen is

displayed. <Notify to Check Paper Settings>(P. 378)

Keep the paper stack within the load limit guides

Make sure that the paper stack does not exceed the load limit guides ( ). Loading too much paper may

cause paper jams.

When loading envelopes or preprinted paper, see Loading Envelopes(P. 141) or Loading Preprinted

Paper(P. 143) .

4Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

●Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper.

Basic Operations

135

Align the paper guides securely against the paper

Paper guides that are too loose or too tight may cause misfeeds or paper jams.

5Close the front cover.

●When performing printing, open the paper stopper in advance so that the output paper does not fall out of

the output tray.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 146)

When changing the paper size or type

●The factory default settings for paper size and type are <LTR> and <Plain>, respectively. If you load a

different size or type of paper into the machine, make sure to change the settings. If you do not change

the settings, the machine cannot print properly.

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

Basic Operations

136

●You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

drawer or multi-purpose tray ( Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 138) ), with the side to print

face up (previously printed side face down).

- When using the multi-purpose tray, load one sheet of paper each time you print.

- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

LINKS

Available Paper(P. 538)

Basic Operations

137

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray

2KUU-02L

When you want to print on paper that is not loaded in the drawer, load the paper in the multi-purpose tray. Load the

paper that you usually use in the drawer. Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134)

Load only one sheet of paper at a time

●Only one sheet of paper can be loaded each time you print.

When loading A5 size paper

●When setting the paper size, make sure the current paper orientation. When loading paper in landscape

orientation, you must congure this setting in the printer driver. For more information, refer to the printer

driver Help.

Landscape orientation Portrait orientation

1Open the front cover.

2Lower the multi-purpose tray.

Basic Operations

138

3Spread the paper guides apart.

●Slide the paper guides outward.

4Insert the paper slowly into the multi-purpose tray until it reaches the back of the

tray.

●Load the paper with the print side face up.

●When loading envelopes or paper with a logo, see Loading Envelopes(P. 141) or Loading Preprinted

Paper(P. 143) .

5Align the paper guides against the edges of the paper.

Align the paper guides securely against the edges of the paper

●Paper guides that are too loose or too tight can cause misfeeds or paper jams.

Basic Operations

139

6Close the front cover.

»Continue to Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)

Printing on the Back Side of Printed Paper (Manual 2-Sided Printing)

●You can print on the back side of printed paper. Flatten any curls on the printed paper and insert it into the

drawer ( Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134) ) or multi-purpose tray, with the side to print face up

(previously printed side face down).

- You can use only the paper printed with this machine.

- You cannot print on the side that has previously been printed on.

- If you are using A5 size paper, the reverse side may not be printed correctly.

LINKS

Available Paper(P. 538)

Basic Operations

140

Loading Envelopes

2KUU-02R

Make sure to atten any curls on envelopes before loading them. Also pay attention to the orientation of envelopes

and which side is face up.

Before Loading Envelopes(P. 141)

Loading Envelopes in the Drawer(P. 142)

Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 142)

●This section describes how to load envelopes in the orientation you want, as well as procedures that you

need to complete before loading envelopes. For a description of the general procedure for loading

envelopes in the drawer, see Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134) or Loading Paper in the Multi-

Purpose Tray(P. 138) .

Before Loading Envelopes

Follow the procedure below to prepare the envelopes before loading.

1Close the ap of each envelope.

2Flatten them to release any remaining air, and make sure that the edges are pressed

tightly.

3Loosen any stiff corners of the envelopes and atten any curls.

Basic Operations

141

4Align the edges of the envelopes on a at surface.

Loading Envelopes in the Drawer

Load the envelopes Monarch, No. 10 (COM10), DL, or C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the

machine), with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.

●Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.

Loading Envelopes in the Multi-Purpose Tray

Load the envelopes Monarch, No. 10 (COM10), DL, or C5 in portrait orientation (with the short edge toward the

machine), with the non-glued side (front side) face up. You cannot print on the reverse side of envelopes.

●Load the envelopes so that the edge with the ap is toward the left side as shown in the illustration.

Basic Operations

142

Loading Preprinted Paper

2KUU-02S

When you use paper that has been preprinted with a logo, pay attention to the orientation of the paper when loading.

Load the paper properly so that printing is performed on the correct side of the paper with a logo.

Making Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 143)

Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos(P. 143)

●This section mainly describes how to load preprinted paper with the proper facing and orientation. For a

description of the general procedure for loading paper in the drawer, see Loading Paper in the

Drawer(P. 134) or Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 138) .

Making Printouts on Paper with Logos

Load the paper with the logo side (the side to print the document) face up.

Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation

Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation

Making 2-Sided Printouts on Paper with Logos

Load the paper with the front logo side (the side to print the rst page of the document) face down.

Basic Operations

143

Printing on Paper with Logos in Portrait Orientation

Printing on Paper with Logos in Landscape Orientation

The <Switch Paper Feed Method> setting

●When you print on preprinted paper, you need to change the facing of the paper to load each time

you perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing. However, if <Switch Paper Feed Method> is set to <Speed

Priority>, the facing that you use for loading preprinted paper for 2-sided printing (logo side face

down) can also be used for 1-sided printing. This setting is especially useful if you frequently perform

both 1-sided and 2-sided printing. <Switch Paper Feed Method> (P. 385)

Basic Operations

144

Specifying Paper Size and Type

2KUU-02U

Set the paper size and paper type when printing from an application with which you cannot set the paper size and

paper type. Make sure to change the paper settings when you load the paper that is different from the previously

loaded paper.

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 146)

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)

Registering a Custom Paper Size(P. 148)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 150)

●If the setting does not match the size and type of loaded paper, a paper jam or printing error may occur.

Basic Operations

145

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer

2KUU-02W

1Display the <Paper Settings> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Paper Set.> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press (Paper Setting).

2Select <Drawer 1>.

3Select the paper size.

●If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

4Select the paper type.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 150)

Available Paper(P. 538)

Basic Operations

146

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose

Tray

2KUU-02X

1Display the <Paper Settings> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Paper Set.> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press (Paper Setting).

2Select <MP Tray>.

3Select the paper size.

●If the loaded paper size is not displayed, select <Other Sizes>.

4Select the paper type.

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 138)

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed(P. 150)

Available Paper(P. 538)

Basic Operations

147

Registering a Custom Paper Size

2KUU-02Y

You can register one frequently used custom paper size.

1Display the <Paper Settings> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Paper Set.> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press (Paper Setting).

2Select <MP Tray> or <Drawer 1> <Custom>.

3Specify the length of the <X> side and <Y> side.

●Execute the following steps in sequence: <X> enter the length of the <X> side using < > ( ) / < >

( ), with < > ( ) / < > ( ) to move the cursor between the digits for inputting whole numbers

and fractions <Apply> ( ) <Y> enter the length of the <Y> side <Apply> ( ) <Apply>

Touch Panel Model

5 Lines LCD Model

4Select <Apply>.

5Select the paper type.

Basic Operations

148

LINKS

Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134)

Loading Paper in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 138)

Basic Operations

149

Limiting the Paper Sizes Displayed

2KUU-030

You can ensure that only frequently used paper sizes are shown in the screen for selecting the paper size setting.

1Display the <Paper Settings> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Paper Set.> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press (Paper Setting).

2Select <Select Frequently Used Paper Sizes>.

3Select <Multi-Purpose Tray> or <Drawer 1>.

4Clear the check boxes for paper sizes you do not want displayed.

●Ensure that only the check boxes for frequently used paper sizes are selected.

●Paper sizes that are not selected can be viewed by selecting the <Other Sizes> in the paper size setting

selection screen.

5Select <Apply>.

LINKS

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 146)

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)

Basic Operations

150

Customizing the Display

2KUU-031

In order to make the Home screen easier to use, you can customize it.

Customizing the Home Screen

You can rearrange buttons that are displayed in the Home screen. Customizing the Home Screen(P. 152)

Basic Operations

151

Customizing the Home Screen

2KUU-032

You can change the item display order to make it easier to access the Home screen, and customize the Home screen.

◼Changing the Arrangement of Buttons

1Select <Home Set.> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and tap

<Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

2Select <Set Display Order>.

3Select the button to move.

4Select <Previous> or <Next> to move the button, and select <Apply>.

●The button moves as many times as you tapped.

●A long touch on <Previous> or <Next> moves the selected button continuously.

5Repeat steps 3 and 4 to move all buttons you want to move.

6Select <End>.

◼Inserting a Blank

1 Select <Home Set.> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the correct PIN using the numeric keys, and select

<Apply>. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

2Select <Insert and Delete Blank>.

Basic Operations

152

3Select the button where you want to insert a blank, and select <Insert>.

●To delete an inserted blank, select the blank, select <Delete>, and proceed to step 5.

4Select <Apply>.

5Select <End>.

LINKS

Basic Operation(P. 118)

Basic Operations

153

Changing the Default Settings for Functions

2KUU-0AE

The default settings are the settings that are displayed whenever you turn ON the machine, or when you press . If

you change these default settings to match the operations that you perform frequently, you can eliminate the need to

specify the same settings every time you perform an action.

◼Copy

For information about changeable setting items, see <Change Default Settings>(P. 387) .

<Menu> ( ) <Copy Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting Change the

default value of the selected item <Apply>

◼FAX

For information about changeable setting items, see <Fax Settings>(P. 389) .

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the

setting Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>

◼E-Mail

For information about changeable setting items, see <E-Mail Settings>(P. 400) .

<Menu> <Scan Settings> <E-Mail Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting

Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>

◼Shared Folder

For information about changeable setting items, see <File Settings>(P. 401) .

<Menu> <Scan Settings> <File Settings> <Change Default Settings> Select the setting

Change the default value of the selected item <Apply>

●If you select <Initialize Default Settings> on each setting screen, you can restore the default settings.

Basic Operations

154

Setting Sounds

2KUU-034

The machine produces sounds in a variety of situations, such as when fax sending is complete or when a paper jam or

error occurs. You can set the volume of each of these sounds individually.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <Preferences> <Volume Settings>.

3Select a setting.

Setting Description Action

<Fax Tone> Sound produced during a fax transmission Go to step 4.

<Ring Tone> Sound produced when an incoming fax is

received

<TX Done Tone> Sound produced when fax sending is

complete

<RX Done Tone> Sound produced when fax receiving is

complete

<Scanning Done Tone> Sound produced when fax original scanning

is complete

<Entry Tone> Conrmation sound each time a key on the

operation panel or button on the display is

pressed

Select <On> (produce a tone) or

<Off> (not produce a tone).

<Invalid Entry Tone> Sound produced when an invalid key

operation is performed, such as when you

enter a number outside the valid setting

range

<Warning Tone> Sound produced when a paper jam or other

error occurs

<Job Done Tone> Sound produced when an operation such as

copying or scanning is complete

<Energy Saver Alert> Sound produced when the machine enters or

exits sleep mode

<Original in Feeder Detection Tone> Sound produced when an original is loaded

in the feeder

4Adjust the volume, and select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

155

●To mute the sound, move the cursor all the way to the left.

End sound only for error

Select <When Error>, select <On>, and select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

156

Entering Quiet Mode

2KUU-033

The quiet mode function reduces the operation sound of the machine. For example, when using the machine at night,

press on the operation panel. With only this operation, you can easily minimize operation sound. You can also

specify a time for the machine to automatically enter quiet mode.

When in quiet mode

●When the machine enters quiet mode, lights up green.

When quiet mode is enabled

●The operation of functions becomes slower.

●On the touch panel model, the volume of notications such as <Entry Tone> and <Job Done Tone> is not

lower. To adjust volume or mute sounds, see Setting Sounds(P. 155) .

When the machine cannot enter quiet mode

●The machine is in Special Printing Mode

●A particular paper size or paper type is specied

Specifying a time for the machine to enter quiet mode

You can specify a time for the machine to enter or exit quiet mode automatically. For example, this is useful

when wanting to reduce operation noise only for late-night operation.

<Menu> ( ) <Timer Settings> <Quiet Mode Time> Specify each setting <Apply>

Basic Operations

157

Specify a time for entering quiet mode. To set, select <On> then specify the time.

Specify a time for exiting quiet mode. To set, select <On> then specify the time.

Exiting Quiet Mode

Press to exit quiet mode.

Basic Operations

158

Entering Sleep Mode

2KUU-035

The sleep mode function reduces the amount of power consumed by the machine by disabling power ow to the

operation panel. If no operations will be performed on the machine for a while, such as during a lunch break, you can

save power simply by pressing on the operation panel.

When in sleep mode

●When the machine enters sleep mode, lights up green.

Situations in which the machine does not enter sleep mode

●When the machine is in operation

●When the [Processing/Data] indicator is lit up or blinking

●When originals are placed in the feeder

●When the machine is performing an operation such as adjustment or cleaning

●When the machine is removing condensation

●When a paper jam occurs

●When the receiver of the external telephone is off the hook

●When the machine is set such that the fax incoming ring will not sound

●When the menu screen is displayed

●When an error message is displayed on the screen (There are some exceptions. The machine sometimes

enters sleep mode when an error message is displayed.)

●When the machine is waiting for a wireless LAN connection or Direct Connection

Changing the Auto Sleep Time Value

Auto Sleep Time is a function that automatically puts the machine into the sleep mode if it remains idle for a

specied length of time. We recommend using the factory default settings ( <Timer Settings>(P. 381) ) to

reduce power usage. If you want to change the amount of time that elapses before the machine enters the auto

sleep mode, perform the procedure below.

Basic Operations

159

<Menu> ( ) <Timer Settings> <Auto Sleep Time> Set the amount of time that elapses

before the machine automatically enters sleep mode <Apply> ( )

Exiting Sleep Mode

You can press or any other key on the operation panel to exit the sleep mode.

●On the touch panel model, you can also tap the display to exit sleep mode.

●If an external telephone is connected, the machine exits sleep mode when you take the receiver off

the hook.

Basic Operations

160

Registering Destinations

2KUU-036

You can register frequently used fax/scan destinations in the Address Book and

easily select them when needed ( Registering Destinations in the Address

Book(P. 163) ). Destinations can be searched alphabetically, from lists in the Address

Book, or by entering three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers). You can also specify

destinations more quickly by using the following features.

◼One-Touch Dial

Registering a lot of addresses in the Address Book makes it dicult to nd the destination you need. To avoid this

situation, register frequently used destinations as One-Touch Dial numbers. This allows them to be displayed by the

One-Touch buttons in the Home screen. You can register up to 4 destinations for One-Touch Dial. Registering

Destinations for One-Touch Dial(P. 165)

◼Group Dial

You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. You can

send faxes or e-mails to multiple destinations at the same time. Groups can also be registered in One-Touch Dial.

Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group(P. 167)

◼Index

The registered destinations are classied into indexes depending on the initial character or the type of address.

Changing indexes allows you to perform a destination search quickly. Tap < > or < > the target index sideways

to change the display.

<All>

Displays all the destinations registered in the Address Book.

<A-Z>, <0-9> or <ABC> to <YZ>

Displays destinations with recipient names whose rst characters correspond to the characters of the selected

index.

< >

Displays destinations for faxes.

< >

Displays destinations for e-mails.

< >

Displays destinations for shared folders. Registration of destinations is performed from the computer.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 86)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

Basic Operations

161

< >

Displays a list of destinations registered in Group Dial.

Only destinations for one-touch dialing are displayed.

●Use the computer to register a shared folder as the destination for scans.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 86)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

●You can save the Address Book as a le on your computer (although you cannot use the computer to edit

the Address Book). You can also import a saved Address Book from the computer to the machine. Saving/

Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 351)

●You can print a list of destinations registered in the Address Book. Address Book List (Touch Panel

Model)(P. 457)

Basic Operations

162

Registering Destinations in the Address Book

2KUU-037

This section describes how to register destinations from the operation panel. You can also use the Remote UI to

1Select <Addr. Book> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <Regist Dest.>.

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

3Select <Coded Dial> Select the type of address to register.

●According to the address being registered, select <Fax> or <E-Mail>.

4Select <Name>.

●Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.

5Enter the name, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

6Select <Fax Number> or <E-Mail Address>.

7Enter the destination, and select <Apply>.

Making detailed settings (only when registered for fax)

After selecting <Details>, a screen similar to the following is displayed.

Basic Operations

163

If an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper

image from being sent when setting <On>.

If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the

transmission start speed downward.

Specify <International (1)> to <International (3)> according to the transmission conditions when registering

overseas fax numbers.

●You can make detailed settings for destinations <Menu> <Fax Settings>. However, settings made

from <Addr. Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations registered in the Address

Book.

8Select <Apply>.

●A three-digit number is automatically set to destinations. The number can be edited after it has been

registered.

●You can make a group of destinations already registered in the Address Book and register it as one

destination. For more information, see Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group(P. 167) .

●When you want to change or delete items of information about destinations registered in the Address Book,

see Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address Book(P. 169) .

Basic Operations

164

Registering Destinations for One-Touch Dial

2KUU-0A7

You can conveniently register frequently used destinations for One-Touch Dial. Destinations can be quickly displayed

by selecting One-Touch buttons in the Home Screen. You can edit or delete destinations that you have registered. You

can register up to 4 destinations for One-Touch Dial.

1Select <Addr. Book> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <Regist Dest.>.

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

3Select <One-Touch> Select the type of address to register.

●According to the address being registered, select <Fax> or <E-Mail>.

4Select the number to register.

●You can change this number to another number later.

5Select <Name>.

●Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.

6Enter the name, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

7Select <Fax Number> or <E-Mail Address>.

8Enter the destination, and select <Apply>.

Making detailed settings (only when registered for fax)

After selecting <Details>, a screen similar to the following is displayed.

Basic Operations

165

If an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper

image from being sent when setting <On>.

If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust the

transmission start speed downward.

Specify <International (1)> to <International (3)> according to the transmission conditions when registering

overseas fax numbers.

You can make detailed settings for destinations <Menu> <Fax Settings>. However, settings made from

<Addr. Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of destinations registered in the Address Book.

9Select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

166

Registering Multiple Destinations as a Group

2KUU-038

You can select multiple destinations that have already been registered and register them together as a group. This

section describes how to register a group from the operation panel. You can also use the Remote UI to register a

group. Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

●Only destinations of the same type of address can be registered in the same group.

●Shared folders cannot be registered in a group as destinations.

1Select <Addr. Book> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <Regist Dest.>.

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

3Select <Coded Dial> <Group>.

●Groups can also be registered in One-Touch Dial. Select <One-Touch> to register the group as a One-Touch

Dial number.

4Select <Name>.

●Registering <Name> is optional. If you register <Name>, the destination can be searched alphabetically.

5Enter the name, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

6Select <Number of Destinations>.

7Select <Add>.

8Select the index containing the destination you want to register. Index(P. 161)

Basic Operations

167

9Select the destination.

10 Repeat steps 7 to 9 until you have registered all of the destinations that you want to

To view information about the destination

●Select the target destination.

To remove a destination from the group

●Select the destination that you want to remove from the group, and select <Remove> <Yes>.

11 Select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

168

Editing the Registered Destinations in the Address

Book

2KUU-039

You can change your settings, such as changing a registered fax number or name, changing the type of destination

registered as a fax number to an e-mail destination, changing a coded dial number, and adding or deleting group

destinations. You can also delete destinations or groups.

1Select <Addr. Book> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <Details/Edit>.

3Select the index containing the destination you want to edit. Index(P. 161)

4Select the destination, and select <Edit>.

●To delete the destination, select <Delete> <Yes>.

●If a screen appears prompting you to enter a PIN, enter the PIN for the Address Book and select <Apply>.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

5After editing the necessary items, select <Apply>.

Basic Operations

169

Copying

Copying ................................................................................................................................................................ 171

Basic Copy Operations ...................................................................................................................................... 173

Canceling Copies .......................................................................................................................................... 177

Checking the Copying Status and Log .......................................................................................................... 179

Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality ............................................................................................................ 180

Selecting the Type of Original for Copying ................................................................................................... 181

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness) .............................................................................................. 182

Useful Copy Functions ....................................................................................................................................... 184

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1) ................................................................................. 185

Using <Paper Save Copy> ............................................................................................................................. 187

Collating Copies by Page .............................................................................................................................. 188

Making ID Card Copies ................................................................................................................................. 189

Making Passport Copy .................................................................................................................................. 190

Copying

170

Copying

2KUU-03A

This chapter describes basic copy operations and various other useful functions, such as 2-sided copying and ID card

copy.

◼Using Basic Operations

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Canceling Copies(P. 177)

Checking the Copying Status and Log(P. 179)

◼Enhancing Quality Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality(P. 180)

Selecting the Type of Original for

Copying(P. 181)

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying

(Sharpness)(P. 182)

◼Using Useful Copy Functions Useful Copy Functions(P. 184)

Copying Multiple Documents onto

One Sheet (N on 1)(P. 185)

Using <Paper Save Copy>(P. 187) Collating Copies by Page(P. 188)

Copying

171

Making ID Card Copies(P. 189) Making Passport Copy(P. 190)

Copying

172

Basic Copy Operations

2KUU-03E

This section describes the basic operation procedure used to copy an original.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

2Display the <Copy> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Copy> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press (COPY/SCAN).

3Enter the number of copies using the numeric keys.

●If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

4Specify the copy settings as necessary.

Adjusting Density

2-Sided Copying

Enlarging or Reducing

Adjusting Density

Adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in an original are excessively light

or dark. You can also automatically set an optimal density for an original.

<Density> Adjust the density <Apply> ( )

Copying

173

Manual Density

Adjust the density manually.

An optimal density for the original is automatically set. <Original Type> is automatically set to <Text>.

Selecting the Type of Original for Copying(P. 181)

2-Sided Copying

You can copy two pages of an original on both sides of the paper. You can also copy

a 2-sided original on both sides of the paper, or on two sheets of paper.

●<2-Sided> may not be available with some sizes and types of paper. Available Paper(P. 538)

●<2-Sided> is not available when using <Paper Save>/<Paper Save Copy>, <ID Card Cpy>/<ID Card

Copy>, or <Passprt Cpy>/<Passport Copy>.

<2-Sided> Select the type of 2-sided copying

Types of 2-sided copying

The illustration below shows the types of 2-sided copying.

<1->2-Sided> <2->2-Sided> <2->1-Sided>

Specify the original orientation, opening type, and nishing type.

Copying

174

Enlarging or Reducing

You can enlarge or reduce copies by using a preset copy ratio such as <129% STMT-

>LTR>, or by setting a custom copy ratio in increments of 1 %.

●If you make a setting for <N on 1> after setting the copy ratio, the setting of reduction ratio in <N on

1> takes priority.

<Copy Ratio> Select the copy ratio

You can set any copy ratio from 25 to 400% in 1% increments.

Preset copy ratio

Select a copy ratio.

●For information about other copy settings, see Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality(P. 180) or

Useful Copy Functions(P. 184) .

5Press .

➠Copying starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Copies(P. 177)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

The original is automatically scanned.

Copying

175

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

If you have set 2-sided copying, N on 1 copying, or collating, a screen prompting you to load the next original is

displayed.

1Select the document size.

●Only displayed when 2-sided copying is set.

2Place the next original on the platen glass, and press .

●You can also specify <Density> and <Original Type> separately for each original.

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning the entire original.

3Select <Start Copy>/<Start Copying>.

●When the <Size/Settings Mismatch> or <The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to

print?>/<The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Print?> message is shown in the display.

Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 491)

When copying originals with text or images that extend to the edges of the page

●The edges of the original might not be copied. For more information about the scan margins, see Main

Unit(P. 533) .

●If you always want to make copies with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for

Functions(P. 154)

LINKS

Checking the Copying Status and Log(P. 179)

Copying

176

Canceling Copies

2KUU-03F

If you want to cancel copying immediately after pressing , select <Cancel> on the screen or press on the

operation panel. You can also cancel copying after checking the copy status.

◼Select <Cancel> on the Screen That is Displayed While Copying

◼Press to Cancel

If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed

Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be printed. Select a copy document to be canceled, and select

<Yes>.

◼Check the copy job status before canceling

<Copy/Print Job> <Job Status> Select the copy document in the <Copy/Print Job Status>

screen <Cancel> <Yes>

Copying

177

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Copying

178

Checking the Copying Status and Log

2KUU-03H

You can check the current copy statuses and the logs for copied documents.

●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the copy job log. <Display Job Log>(P. 425)

Useful in the Following Cases

●When some long time has already passed after scanning of your original to be copied but printing of the

document has not started yet, you may want to see the waiting list of the documents waiting to be printed.

●When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been copied, you may want to see whether an

error has occurred.

1Press .

2Select <Copy/Print Job>.

3Select <Job Status> and select the document whose status you want to check.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Canceling Copies(P. 177)

Copying

179

Enhancing and Adjusting Copy Quality

2KUU-03J

You can improve the copy quality by specifying more detailed settings, such as adjusting the brightness, erasing

unnecessary shadows, etc.

Selecting the Type of Original for

Copying(P. 181)

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying

(Sharpness)(P. 182)

Copying

180

Selecting the Type of Original for Copying

2KUU-03K

You can select the optical image quality for the copy depending on the original type,

such as text-only documents, documents with charts and graphs, or magazine

photos.

Touch Panel Model

<Copy> <Original Type> Select the original type

5 Lines LCD Model

(COPY/SCAN) <Original Type> Select the original type

<Text> Suitable when copying originals that only contain text.

<Text/Photo (High Speed)> Suitable when copying originals that contain both text and photos. Priority is given to speed

over image quality.

<Text/Photo> Suitable when copying originals that contain both text and photos.

<Photo> Suitable when copying originals that contain printed photos, such as magazines or

pamphlets.

●If <Text/Photo (High Speed)>, <Text/Photo>, or <Photo> is selected while <Density> is set to <Auto Density>,

density setting changes to Manual Density.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Copying

181

Adjusting Sharpness for Copying (Sharpness)

2KUU-03L

You can adjust sharpness of the copied image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen

blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of

magazine photos.

Touch Panel Model

<Copy> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>

5 Lines LCD Model

(COPY/SCAN) <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness

Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil

Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos

Copying

182

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Copying

183

Useful Copy Functions

2KUU-03R

You can copy multiple sheets onto one page, or copy by grouping sheets into complete sets in sequential page order.

Also, there is a function to copy both sides of a card, etc. onto one page.

Copying Multiple Documents onto

One Sheet (N on 1)(P. 185)

Using <Paper Save Copy>(P. 187) Collating Copies by Page(P. 188)

Making ID Card Copies(P. 189) Making Passport Copy(P. 190)

Copying

184

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N on 1)

2KUU-03S

You can copy two or four documents onto a single sheet at a reduced size. This

decreases the number of pages, enabling you to save paper.

●Using <N on 1> reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). You can

increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing , but the edges of the original might not be

copied if you increase it.

●<N on 1> is not available when using <Paper Save> ( ), <ID Card Cpy>/<ID Card Copy>, or <Passprt

Cpy>/<Passport Copy>.

●When you copy multiple originals onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.

●Using the <Paper Save> ( ) enables you to combine 2-sided copying and <N on 1>: Using <Paper

Save Copy>(P. 187)

Touch Panel Model

<Copy> <N on 1> Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> Select the original size on the <Scan Size>

screen

5 Lines LCD Model

(COPY/SCAN) <N on 1> Select <2 on 1> or <4 on 1> Select the original size on the

<Scan Size> screen

Number of pages to be combined

Select the number of pages to be combined on one side of paper. For example, <4 on 1> means that "a four-

page original can be combined on a single sheet."

Copying

185

Specify how to arrange the originals on the page.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Using <Paper Save Copy>(P. 187)

Copying

186

Using <Paper Save Copy>

2KUU-0A8

You can use <Paper Save> ( ) to perform N on 1 copying and also copying

onto both sides of a page at the same time with a single operation, allowing you to

save paper. It also saves you from having to set each function separately.

●Using <Paper Save> ( ) reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the

screen). You can increase or further reduce the copy ratio before pressing , but the edges of the

document might not be copied if you increase it.

●<Paper Save> ( ) is not available when using <2-Sided>, <N on 1>, <ID Card Cpy>/<ID Card Copy>

or <Passprt Cpy>/<Passport Copy>.

●When you copy multiple documents onto one page, margins may be created in the copied image.

<Paper Save> ( ) Select the paper save copy setting Select the document size on the

<Scan Size> screen

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Copying

187

Collating Copies by Page

2KUU-03U

When preparing multiple copies of multi-page originals, set <Collate> to <On> to collate

copies in sequential page order. This function is useful when preparing handouts for

meetings or presentations.

Touch Panel Model

5 Lines LCD Model

(COPY/SCAN) <Collate> <On>

<Off>

The copies are grouped by page and not collated. For example, if you are making three copies of a ve-page

original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5.

<On>

The copies are grouped into complete sets in sequential page order. For example, if you are making three

copies of a ve-page original, the printouts will be arranged in the following page order: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5,

1, 2, 3, 4, 5.

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Copying

188

Making ID Card Copies

2KUU-03W

You can use <ID Card Cpy>/<ID Card Copy> to copy the front and back sides of a card onto

the same side of a page. This function is useful when copying a driver's license or ID card.

●<ID Card Cpy>/<ID Card Copy> is not available when using <Paper Save>/<Paper Save Copy>, <2-Sided>, <N

on 1>, <Copy Ratio>, or <Passprt Cpy>/<Passport Copy>.

Touch Panel Model

Place the card on the platen glass <ID Card Cpy> Turn the card over

5 Lines LCD Model

Place the card on the platen glass (ID Card Copy) Turn the card over

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Copying

189

Making Passport Copy

2KUU-03X

Copy passports for several individuals laid out on a single sheet of paper. This is convenient

such as when copying passports as a receptionist duty.

●Using Passport Copy reduces the copy ratio automatically (the copy ratio is displayed on the screen). If the

copying process has not started, you can further reduce the image size by lowering the numeric value that is

automatically displayed. The value can also be increased, but the edges of the original might not be copied.

●Scan size is xed at 5 1/8" (130 mm) x 7 1/8" (180 mm).

●The order of layout cannot be set.

●<Passprt Cpy>/<Passport Copy> is not available when using <Paper Save>/<Paper Save Copy>, <N on 1>, or

<ID Card Cpy>/<ID Card Copy>.

●The 2-sided copying setting cannot be changed.

Touch Panel Model

Place one of the passports on the platen glass <Passprt Cpy> Specify the layout Place

the next passport, Repeat until all passport originals have been scanned <Start Copy>

5 Lines LCD Model

Place one of the passports on the platen glass (COPY/SCAN) <Passport Copy> Specify

the layout Place the next passport, Repeat until all passport originals have been

scanned <Start Copying>

Copying

190

LINKS

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Copying

191

Faxing

Faxing ................................................................................................................................................................... 193

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes ................................................................................................................. 195

Canceling Sending Faxes .............................................................................................................................. 202

Receiving Faxes ................................................................................................................................................. 203

Useful Functions When Sending ....................................................................................................................... 207

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings) .................................................................. 208

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending) ...................................................................................... 210

Various Receiving Methods .............................................................................................................................. 212

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception) ............................................................. 213

Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically ...................................................................................... 215

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents ......................................................................... 217

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax) .................................................................................................. 219

Sending PC Faxes ......................................................................................................................................... 220

Faxing

192

Faxing

2KUU-03Y

This chapter describes fax settings, basic fax operations and various other useful functions to suit your needs, such as

PC Fax to send documents directly from computers, Address Book to specify destinations easily, and Forwarding to

receive faxes even when you are out of the oce.

●You need to complete some procedures before using fax functions. Conguring Initial Settings for Fax

Functions(P. 70)

●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering

Destinations(P. 161)

◼Using Basic Operations

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 202)

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 217)

◼Using Useful Functions When Sending Useful Functions When Sending(P. 207)

Recalling Previously Used Settings

for Sending (Recall Settings)(P. 208)

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call

(Manual Sending)(P. 210)

◼Receiving According to Your Purposes Various Receiving Methods(P. 212)

Faxing

193

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 213)

◼Forwarding All the Received Documents

Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically(P. 215)

◼Sending Faxes Directly from Your Computer

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 219)

Faxing

194

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes

2KUU-041

This section describes the basic operation procedure used to fax an original.

●You need to complete some procedures before using fax functions. Conguring Initial Settings for Fax

Functions(P. 70)

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

2Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

3Press .

●If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset

the settings before sending.

4Specify the destination.

Specifying from Address Book

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Specifying from One-Touch

Entering Destinations Directly

Specifying from Address Book

The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of

registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient

names.

●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering

Destinations(P. 161)

1Select <Destination> <Specify from Address Book>.

2Select an index. Index(P. 161)

Faxing

195

3Select a destination.

●If a destination is selected from <Addr. Book> in the Home screen, the Fax Basic Features screen can be

displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address

Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.

●To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.

Registering Destinations(P. 161)

1Select <Destination> <Specify from Coded Dial>.

2Enter a three-digit number.

●If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

If a conrmation screen appears

●When <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the

destination and the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the group name and the number of

destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different

destination, select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Displaying

Destinations in Address Book(P. 327)

Faxing

196

●If a coded dial number is selected from <Coded Dial> in the Home screen, the Fax Basic Features screen can

be displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.

Specifying from One-Touch

Specify a destination by selecting from a list registered to the one-touch buttons.

●You need to register destinations before using one-touch dialing. Registering Destinations in the

Address Book(P. 163)

1Select <Destination> <Specify from One-Touch>.

2Select a destination.

If a conrmation screen appears

●When <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the

destination and destination name registered to the one-touch button. (For Group Dial, the group name

and the number of destinations are shown). Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>.

To specify a different destination, select <Cancel> and then select the one-touch buttons again.

●If you select any of <One-Touch 1> to <One-Touch 4> in the Home screen, the Fax Basic Features screen can

be displayed while the selected destination remains being specied.

Entering Destinations Directly

For a destination that is not registered in the Address Book, specify it by entering a fax number.

1Select <Destination> <Specify Using Numeric Keys>.

2Enter the fax number.

●If you have entered an incorrect value, press to clear it.

Faxing

197

If a conrmation screen appears

●When <Conrm Entered Fax Number> is set to <On>, the input screen reappears so that you can

conrm the destination ( Conrming the Entered Fax Number(P. 329) ). Enter the destination

again.

Sending a fax abroad

●Enter the international access code, the country code, and the fax number to specify the destination.

If you are not able to successfully connect to a recipient, select <Pause> and insert a pause between

numbers.

Adding a destination

●To send a fax to multiple destinations at a time (sequential broadcast), repeat the appropriate steps to

enter all destinations.

●You can also recall previously used destinations. Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending

(Recall Settings)(P. 208)

To delete destinations

If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.

2Select a destination you want to delete.

●If you specied Group Dial, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Selecting <Number of Destinations>

displays destinations registered in the group.

3Select <Remove> <Yes>.

3Specify the scanning settings as necessary.

Adjusting Image Quality

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

Adjusting Image Quality

You can select the resolution suitable for your original type. The higher the

resolution is, the clearer the image becomes, but the longer it takes to send.

Selecting Resolution(P. 199)

You can adjust the density of the fax if the text or images in an original are too light

or dark. Adjusting Density(P. 199)

Faxing

198

You can adjust the sharpness of the image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen

blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of

magazine photos. Adjusting Sharpness(P. 199)

◼Selecting Resolution

<Resolution> Select the resolution

◼Adjusting Density

<Density> Adjust the density <Apply>

◼Adjusting Sharpness

<Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness <Apply>

Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil

Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos

Faxing

199

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the

feeder.

●The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals are placed on the platen

glass or when the machine is set to Manual Sending.

<2-Sided Original> Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

4Press .

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 202)

Faxing

200

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the faxes are sent.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below.

1Select the original size.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.

2Place the next original on the platen glass, and press .

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

3Select <Start TX>.

➠The faxes are sent.

●If you always want to send faxes with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for

Functions(P. 154)

●If you want to sound an alarm when the handset is off the hook: <Off-Hook Alarm>(P. 389)

LINKS

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 202)

Useful Functions When Sending(P. 207)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 217)

Faxing

201

Canceling Sending Faxes

2KUU-042

If you want to cancel sending faxes immediately after pressing , select <Cancel> on the display or press on

the operation panel. You can also cancel sending faxes after checking the fax status.

◼Select <Cancel> on the screen during fax transmission

◼Press to cancel

If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed

Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel, and select <Yes>.

◼Check the transmission status before canceling

<TX Job> <Job Status> Select the document <Cancel> <Yes>

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 217)

Faxing

202

Receiving Faxes

2KUU-043

This section describes the methods for receiving faxes and how to set up the machine to receive faxes. You need to

complete some procedures for using fax functions before specifying the receiving settings. Conguring Initial

Settings for Fax Functions(P. 70)

●The machine can print received fax documents on A4 or Letter size paper. If received fax documents are

printed on other paper sizes, a portion of the page may not be printed or a page may be printed on two

separate sheets of paper.

◼Methods for Receiving Faxes

The machine provides the following receiving methods. Select the method that best suits your needs and then set it up

by following the procedure in Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes(P. 204) .

<Auto>

Dedicated to receiving faxes

The machine receives faxes automatically. Even if someone makes a call to you, you cannot

talk to the caller.

<Fax/Tel (Auto

Switch)>

When the call is a fax

The machine receives the fax automatically.

When the call is a telephone call

An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset to answer the call.

●You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.

When the call is a fax

An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset. If you hear a beep, select <Fax> <Start

Receiving> to receive faxes.

When the call is a telephone call

An incoming call rings. Pick up the handset and start your conversation.

●You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.

Faxing

203

●You can set the machine to automatically receive faxes when an incoming call rings within a

specied timeframe. <Switch to Auto RX>(P. 396)

<Answering

Machine>

When the call is a fax

After an incoming call rings, the machine receives the fax automatically.

When the call is a telephone call

The answering machine activates, enabling the caller to leave a message. If you pick up the

handset before the answering machine starts recording a message, you can talk with the

caller.

●You need to connect your answering machine to the machine beforehand.

●Set the answering machine to answer after a few rings.

●We recommend that you add approximately 4 seconds of silence at the beginning of the

message or set the maximum recording time to 20 seconds.

<DRPD: Select Fax>

If you have subscribed to a Distinctive Ring Pattern Detection (DRPD) service provided by your

telephone company, this receiving mode is available. This service assigns two or more

telephone numbers with distinctive ring patterns to a single telephone line. You can use one of

these numbers for faxes and one for telephone calls.

When the machine receives a call, it automatically recognizes the ring pattern and your

telephone rings differently depending on whether the call is a fax or telephone call. If the ring

pattern is for a fax, the machine automatically receives the fax.

●For more information about this service, contact your telephone company.

●You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.

●Depending on the type of telephone connected to it, the machine may not be able to send or receive faxes

properly.

●If you are connecting an external telephone with fax functions, set the telephone to not receive faxes

automatically.

●If you pick up the telephone handset and hear a beep, the call is a fax. You can receive the fax just by using

the telephone to enter a specic ID number. Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)

(P. 205)

◼Setting Up the Machine to Receive Faxes

1Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <RX Mode>.

3Select the receiving method.

Faxing

204

When selecting <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>

Specify the following three settings as necessary. When the setting is complete, select <Apply>.

Enables you to specify the duration during which the machine determines whether an incoming call is a fax or a

telephone call.

Enables you to specify the duration during which an incoming call rings for a telephone call.

Enables you to specify how the machine operates if you do not pick up the handset while an incoming call is

ringing. Select <End> to disconnect the call or <Receive> to receive an incoming fax.

When selecting <DRPD: Select Fax>

Select the ring pattern that your telephone company assigned to your fax number.

●If you want to print received documents on both sides of paper: <Print on Both Sides>(P. 397)

●If you want to print information, such as reception date and time, at the bottom of received documents:

<RX Page Footer>(P. 397)

●If you want to continue printing even when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low: <Continue

Print. When Near Cart. Life End>(P. 398)

◼Using a Telephone to Receive Faxes (Remote Reception)

When you pick up the telephone and get a fax signal, you do not need to go to the machine to receive the fax. Just

enter a specic ID number with the telephone, and you can start receiving the fax.

●When the telephone is not directly connected with the machine, the remote reception function is not

available.

1When an incoming call rings, pick up the telephone handset.

2If you hear a beep, enter the ID number for Remote Reception with the telephone.

●For more information about setting the ID number, see <Remote RX>(P. 395) .

3Hang up the handset.

Faxing

205

LINKS

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 217)

Various Receiving Methods(P. 212)

Faxing

206

Useful Functions When Sending

2KUU-044

This section describes how to forward a fax again to a previously specied destination, how to send a fax after a phone

call, and how to save a copy of a fax document.

Recalling Previously Used Settings

for Sending (Recall Settings)(P. 208)

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call

(Manual Sending)(P. 210)

Faxing

207

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall

Settings)

2KUU-045

You can recall the destinations specied in the past. When you specify a previously

used destination, the machine also sets the same fax settings such as density you

used the last time you sent documents to that destination.

●When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of

Previously Used Destinations(P. 327)

●Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and

disables this feature. Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P. 327)

●The destinations in Manual Sending are not available for this feature. Sending a Fax after a Phone Call

(Manual Sending)(P. 210)

●When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specied are

deleted.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

2Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

3Press .

●If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset

the settings before sending.

4Select <Destination> <Recall Set.>.

5Select the destination.

●When you transmit to multiple destinations, only the address specied for the rst transmission is displayed

in the log, but all the destinations are specied.

Faxing

208

➠The selected destination and the fax settings used at the time are specied. You can also change the

settings before sending.

To delete destinations

When you transmitted to multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.

2Select a destination you want to delete.

●If you specied Group Dial, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Selecting <Number of Destinations>

displays destinations registered in the group.

3Select <Remove> <Yes>.

6Specify the scanning settings as necessary. Basic Operations for Sending

Faxes(P. 195)

7Press .

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 202)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the faxes are sent.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below.

1Select the original size.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to step 3.

2Place the next original on the platen glass, and press .

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

3Select <Start TX>.

➠The faxes are sent.

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

Faxing

209

Sending a Fax after a Phone Call (Manual Sending)

2KUU-046

You can send faxes manually at the end of a phone conversation. When you hear a

beep over the phone, it means the recipient is trying to receive your faxes. Press

to send your faxes.

●You need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

●The machine cannot automatically scan both sides of the originals in Manual Sending.

2Select <Fax> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

3Press .

●If the destinations set by the previous user are still selected, this can cause transmission errors. Always reset

the settings before sending.

4Specify the scanning settings as necessary. Basic Operations for Sending

Faxes(P. 195)

5Dial the recipient's fax number.

6Ask the recipient to set their fax machine to receive your faxes.

●If you hear a beep, proceed to step 7.

7Press .

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 202)

8Hang up the handset.

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

Faxing

210

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 202)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 217)

Faxing

211

Various Receiving Methods

2KUU-047

You can store received faxes in the machine's memory without printing them. You can reduce fax paper waste by

checking the detailed information of fax documents and only printing necessary documents.

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 213)

Faxing

212

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory

Reception)

2KUU-0A6

You can store received faxes into memory of the machine, and then print them later.

This feature can prevent unauthorized persons from seeing condential documents

unintentionally.

Storing Documents into Memory(P. 213)

Printing Documents in Memory(P. 213)

Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 214)

Storing Documents into Memory

To store received documents into memory, set <Memory Lock Settings> to <On>. You can also specify optional settings

such as a time setting that species a period of time during the day in which received documents are stored in

memory.

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Memory Lock Settings> <On> Specify

each setting <Apply>

Enables you to print RX Result reports every time documents are stored into memory. To print reports, select

<On>. You also need to set <RX Result Report> to <On>. RX Result Report (Touch Panel Model)(P. 456)

Specify a period of time during the day in which received documents are stored in memory. If you do not set a

period of time, the machine stores every document into memory when Memory Reception is turned on.

Printing Documents in Memory

To print received documents in memory, set <Memory Lock Settings> to <Off>. All the documents in memory are

printed.

●You cannot select a specic document for printing.

●If a time for the feature to deactivate has been specied, the documents are automatically printed at the

specied time.

Faxing

213

Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory

You can check an outline of each document stored in memory, including sender fax numbers and number of pages

sent. You can also select and forward a document stored in memory, and delete an unnecessary document, if any.

1Press .

2Select <RX Job>.

3Select <Job Status> and select the document whose status you want to check.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●To forward the document, select <Forward>, and specify the appropriate destination.

●To delete the document, select <Delete> <Yes>.

●You can preview received documents using the Remote UI. Checking the Status and Logs(P. 338)

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 217)

Faxing

214

Forwarding the Received Documents Automatically

2KUU-049

The machine can forward all the received documents to specied destinations. Even if you are out of the oce, you

can receive fax information anytime, anywhere.

Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically(P. 215)

Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 215)

Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 215)

Specifying Settings for Documents to be Forwarded Automatically

While the Forwarding feature is activated, all the documents to be received are automatically forwarded.

Select the forwarding destination from the Address Book

Printing Documents to be Forwarded

If you want to check the documents to be forwarded for yourself, you can set the machine to print the documents

whenever they are forwarded, or to print only the documents that failed to be forwarded.

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Print Images> Select <On> or <Only

When Error Occurs>

Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded

You can store documents that failed to be forwarded in memory, and print, resend, or delete them later.

◼Storing Documents that Failed to be Forwarded in Memory

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Forwarding Settings> <Store Images in Memory> <Only When

Error Occurs>

◼Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents Stored in Memory

1Press .

Faxing

215

2Select <Fax Forwarding Errors>.

3Select the document you want to print/resend/delete.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●To print the document, select <Print/Fwd> <Print> <Yes>.

●To resend the document, select <Print/Fwd> <Forward>, and specify the appropriate destination.

●To delete the document, select <Delete> <Yes>.

LINKS

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received Documents(P. 217)

Faxing

216

Checking Status and Log for Sent and Received

Documents

2KUU-04A

The statuses and communication logs for sent and received fax documents can be checked separately for sending and

receiving.

●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the communication logs. <Display Job

Log>(P. 425)

●The destinations in Manual Sending cannot be checked because they are not displayed.

1Press .

2Select <TX Job> or <RX Job>.

3Check the statuses and communication logs for sent and received documents.

To check the statuses for sent and received documents

1Select <Job Status> and select the document whose status you want to check.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●If you specied multiple destinations, the number of specied destinations is displayed on the

screen. To check the details of specied multiple destinations, select <Number of Destinations>.

To check the communication logs for sent and received documents

1Select <Job Log> and select the document whose status you want to check.

●<OK> is displayed when a document was sent or received successfully, and <Error> is displayed when

a document failed to be sent or received because it was canceled or there was some error.

Faxing

217

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

If the <Result> column shows a three-digit number

●This number represents an error code. Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 504)

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

Canceling Sending Faxes(P. 202)

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 455)

Faxing

218

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)

2KUU-04C

You can send fax documents created on your computer application directly from your computer. This feature

eliminates the need to print documents for faxing and saves paper. You need to specify the basic fax settings (

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 70) ) and install the fax driver on your computer. For more

information about how to install the fax driver, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the online manual website.

Sending PC Faxes(P. 220)

●Depending on the operating system and the version of the fax driver you are using, the fax driver screens in

this manual may differ from your screens.

About the Fax Driver Help

●Clicking [Help] on the fax driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen you can see information that

is not in the User's Guide, including information about driver features such as registering frequently used

settings and how to set up those features.

Faxing

219

Sending PC Faxes

2KUU-04E

●When <Allow Fax Driver TX> is set to <Off> on the machine, you cannot send faxes from computers.

Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 329)

1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual for the application you are using.

2Select the fax driver for this machine, and click [Print].

3Specify the destination.

To specify only one destination

1Click the [Enter Destination] tab.

2Set the communication mode and fax number (or URI).

To specify multiple destinations at once

1Click the [Select Destination] tab.

2Click [Add Destination].

3Set the communication mode and fax number (or URI), and click [OK].

Faxing

220

4Repeat steps 2 and 3 to add concurrent destinations.

●You can also add a destination by clicking [Add Next Destination] in step 3.

●If you need to specify a number to dial an outside line, select [Detailed Settings] [Add Outside Dialing

Prex to G3/IP Fax Number] and enter the number as an external line connection number. The specied

number is added to the beginning of the fax number when the machine dials.

●To make it easier to specify destinations using the Address Book.

●Selecting [Store Sent Fax Information and Image] enables you to store the logs for sending documents and

check detailed information of a sent document along with its image, including destinations and number of

pages. For more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.

●When the [Conrm Fax Number] or [Conrm URI] eld is active, also enter the appropriate number in the

eld. The setting of whether to conrm entered numbers can be changed in the fax driver screen. For

more information, click [Help] on the fax driver screen.

4Click [Send] to send the document.

Faxing

221

Printing

Printing ................................................................................................................................................................ 223

Printing from a Computer ................................................................................................................................ 224

Canceling Prints ........................................................................................................................................... 226

Checking the Printing Status and Log ........................................................................................................... 228

Printing

222

Printing

2KUU-04F

You can print documents on your computer by using the printer driver.

◼Printing from a Computer

You can print a document made on your computer by using the printer driver.

Printing from a Computer(P. 224)

Printing from Mobile Devices

●Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to

print photos and web pages. The machine also supports Google Cloud Print™.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 266)

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

Printing silently

If you mind the printing noise, you can reduce the noise by specifying the quiet mode. Note that If you print in

the quiet mode, printing becomes slower.

Printing

223

Printing from a Computer

2KUU-04H

You can print a document made with an application on your computer by using the printer driver. There are useful

settings on the printer driver, such as enlarging/reducing and 2-sided printing, that enable you to print your

documents in various ways. Before you can use this function, you need to complete some procedures, such as

installing the printer driver on your computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers on the

online manual website.

About the Printer Driver Help(P. 224)

Basic Printing Operations(P. 224)

About the Printer Driver Help

Clicking [Help] on the printer driver screen displays the Help screen. On this screen, you can see the detailed

descriptions that are not in the User's Guide.

Basic Printing Operations

This section describes how to print a document on your computer by using the printer driver.

Paper settings on the machine

●Normally, it is necessary to specify the paper size and type for the paper loaded in each paper source before

proceeding to printing.

1Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

2Select the printer driver for this machine, and click [Preferences] or [Properties].

3Specify the print settings as necessary, and click [OK].

●Switch the tab according to the settings.

Printing

224

4Click [Print] or [OK].

➠Printing starts.

●If you want to cancel printing, see Canceling Prints(P. 226) .

LINKS

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 228)

Printing

225

Canceling Prints

2KUU-04J

You can cancel printing from your computer or on the operation panel of the machine.

From a Computer(P. 226)

From the Operation Panel(P. 227)

From a Computer

You can cancel printing from the printer icon displayed on the system tray on the desktop.

1Double-click the printer icon.

When the printer icon is not displayed

●Open the printer folder ( Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 556) ), right-click the printer driver icon for

this machine, and click [See what's printing] (or double-click the icon of the printer driver for this machine).

2Select the document you want to cancel, and click [Document] [Cancel].

3Click [Yes].

➠Printing of the selected document is canceled.

●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

Canceling from the Remote UI

●You can cancel printing from the [Job Status] page on the Remote UI: Checking Current Status of Print

Documents(P. 338)

Canceling from an application

●On some applications, a screen like shown below appears. You can cancel printing by clicking [Cancel].

Printing

226

From the Operation Panel

Cancel printing using or .

◼Press to Cancel

If the Screen Displays a List of Documents When is Pressed

Select the document you want to cancel, and select <Yes>.

◼Check the Print Job Status Before Canceling

<Copy/Print Job> <Job Status> Select the document in the <Copy/Print Job Status>

screen <Cancel> <Yes>

●Several pages may be output after you cancel printing.

LINKS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 224)

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 228)

Printing

227

Checking the Printing Status and Log

2KUU-04K

You can check the current print statuses and the logs for printed documents.

●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the print logs. <Display Job Log>(P. 425)

Useful in the Following Cases

●When your documents are not printed for a long time, you may want to see the waiting list of the

documents waiting to be printed.

●When you cannot nd your printouts that you thought had been printed, you may want to see whether an

error has occurred.

1Press .

2Select <Copy/Print Job>.

3Check the print statuses and logs.

To check the print statuses

1Select <Job Status> and select the document whose status you want to check.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

To check the print logs

1Select <Print Job Log> and select the document whose log you want to check.

●<OK> is displayed when a document was printed successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a

document failed to be printed because it was canceled or there was some error.

Printing

228

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●The displayed document name or user name may not reect the actual document or user name.

When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>

●This number represents an error code. Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 504)

LINKS

Basic Printing Operations(P. 224)

Canceling Prints(P. 226)

Printing

229

Scanning

Scanning .............................................................................................................................................................. 231

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals ......................................................................................................... 233

Scanning and Saving to a Computer ............................................................................................................. 234

Scanning Using the Shortcut Key .................................................................................................................. 236

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder ............................................................................... 239

Canceling Sending Documents ..................................................................................................................... 247

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals ........................................................................................... 249

Scanning Clearly ................................................................................................................................................ 251

Adjusting Image Quality ............................................................................................................................... 252

Adjusting Density ......................................................................................................................................... 253

Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness) ........................................................................................ 254

Useful Scanning Functions ............................................................................................................................... 255

Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality ............................................................................... 256

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings) ....................................................... 257

Specifying E-Mail Settings ............................................................................................................................. 259

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan) .................................................................................................. 261

Scanning Documents from an Application .................................................................................................... 262

Using ScanGear MF ...................................................................................................................................... 264

Scanning

230

Scanning

2KUU-04L

You can scan original documents by using the operation panel of the machine or an application on a computer.

Whichever way you use, the scanned originals are converted into electronic le formats such as PDFs. Use the scan

function to convert large-volume paper documents into les so that you can organize them easily.

●To use this machine as a scanner, you must complete preparations in advance, including installation of

software to a computer. For more information, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the

online manual website. To connect the machine to your computer via a network, you must register the

machine to the installed software. Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 77)

●Depending on the operating system and the version of the scanner driver or applications you are using, the

screens in this manual may differ from your screens.

◼Using Basic Operations

You can scan and save originals to your computer by using the operation panel of the machine. You can also send

originals as e-mail attachments.

Basic Operations for Scanning

Originals(P. 233)

Canceling Sending Documents(P. 247)

Checking Status and Log for Scanned

Originals(P. 249)

◼Enhancing Quality

You can nd instructions on how to resolve problems such as "blurry photos" or "text unreadable due to too deep

color of the paper."

Scanning Clearly(P. 251)

◼Eciently, Reliably

You can nd instructions on how to enhance eciency when sending data and descriptions of useful settings.

Scanning

231

Useful Scanning Functions(P. 255)

◼Scanning from a Computer

You can scan originals placed on the machine from a computer. The scanned originals are saved to the computer. You

can scan using MF Scan Utility (included with the machine), or with other applications such as an image-processing or

word-processing application.

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)(P. 261)

Scanning from Mobile Devices

●Linking mobile devices such as smartphones or tablets to this machine provides a quick and easy way to

scan originals set on this machine. Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 266)

Scanning

232

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals

2KUU-04S

This section describes the basic procedures for scanning originals.

◼Scanning

Scanning and Saving to a

Computer(P. 234)

Scanning Using the Shortcut

Key(P. 236)

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving

Data to a Shared Folder(P. 239)

◼Operating Jobs

Canceling Sending Documents(P. 247)

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 249)

Scanning

233

Scanning and Saving to a Computer

2KUU-04U

The sequence of "scanning an original and saving it to a computer" can only be done when scanning from the

machine. Scan while specifying what computer originals will be saved to; whether to scan originals in color or black

and white; whether to save originals as PDFs or JPEGs; and other settings. Incidentally, if you want to specify a

computer connected to the network as the destination, you must register the machine with the computer in advance

( Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 77) ).

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

2Display the <Scan> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Scan> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press (COPY/SCAN).

3Select <Computer>.

●If only a computer connected to the machine via USB is used, proceed to step 5.

4Select the destination computer.

5Select the scan type.

●The scan types and settings that are displayed can be conrmed and changed by using MF Scan Utility. For

more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

●If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual

website.

6Press ( ).

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 247)

●You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close

the screen before scanning.

Scanning

234

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when the le format is PDF).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

press .

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Finish Scan>/<Finish Scanning>.

➠The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

About the save destination folder

●By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning

date is created, and the data is saved to that folder.

●You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on

MF Scan Utility.

Scan from the machine more easily

●If you have regularly used preferences, such as scanning in color or black and white, or a pre-determined

computer where scanned originals will be saved, specifying these settings each time you scan can be

troublesome. Register these settings in the shortcut key so that you can scan with one press of a key.

Scanning Using the Shortcut Key(P. 236)

Scanning

235

Scanning Using the Shortcut Key

2KUU-04W

After placing an original on the machine, use the short cut key and scanning starts. The type of scan (color or black

and white), the save destination for the original, and other settings can be registered to the menu items, and originals

can be scanned using those settings. This section describes how to register settings in the menu item and scan with it.

Registering Your Settings in the Shortcut Key(P. 236)

Using the Shortcut Key(P. 237)

Registering Your Settings in the Shortcut Key

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Scan Settings>.

3Select <Shortcut Key Settings> <Register>.

4Select the shortcut key to which you want to register settings.

5Select the type of connection that is used between the machine and computer.

<Off>

Select this setting to erase registered settings.

Select this setting if the machine and computer are connected via USB.

Select this setting if the machine and computer are connected via a network.

6Select the destination computer.

Scanning

236

●If you selected <USB Connection> in step 5, proceed to step 7.

7Select the scan type.

●The scan types and settings that are displayed can be conrmed and changed by using MF Scan Utility. For

more information, click [Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

●If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual

website.

◼Checking the Registered Settings

<Menu> ( ) <Scan Settings> <Shortcut Key Settings> <Conrm Destination> Select

shortcut key

Using the Shortcut Key

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

2Select the shortcut key.

Touch Panel Model

Select <Scan -> PC1> or <Scan -> PC2> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

●To check the settings registered in the key, see Checking the Registered Settings(P. 237) .

●Scanning starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 247)

You cannot scan while the ScanGear MF is displayed. Close the

screen before scanning.

Scanning

237

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (when the le format is PDF).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

press .

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Finish Scan>/<Finish Scanning>.

➠The save destination folder is displayed on the computer.

About the save destination folder

●By default, the scanned data is saved to the [My Documents] folder. A subfolder named with the scanning

date is created, and the data is saved to that folder.

●You can change the save destination from the MF Scan Utility. For more information, click [Instructions] on

MF Scan Utility.

Scanning

238

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder

2KUU-04X

This section describes the procedures for scanning originals and sending the scanned data directly from the machine

by attaching it to an e-mail or saving it to a shared folder.

●Before you can send the data directly by e-mail, you need to complete certain procedures, such as specifying

the e-mail server settings. Procedure for Setting to Send E-Mail(P. 78)

●Before you can save the data to a shared folder, you need to complete certain procedures, such as

specifying the location to save the scanned originals to. Procedure for Setting a Shared Folder as a Save

Location(P. 85)

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

3Select <E-Mail> or <File>.

4Specify the destination.

●If you selected <File> in step 3, the Address Book screen is displayed. You can also specify the destination

from coded dial numbers or one-touch dial numbers.

Specifying from Address Book

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Specifying from One-Touch

Entering Destinations Directly (E-Mail Sending)

Specifying from Address Book

The Address Book enables you to specify a destination by selecting from a list of

registered destinations or by searching by name for destinations with recipient

names.

●You need to register destinations in the Address Book before using this feature. Registering

Destinations(P. 161)

●Register the shared folder address from a computer.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 86)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

Scanning

239

1Select <Destination> <Specify from Address Book>.

●If the <Type> screen appears, select <To>, <Cc>, or <Bcc> as a destination type.

2Select an index. Index(P. 161)

3Select a destination.

If you want to specify multiple destinations (e-mail)

●Repeat steps 1 to 3.

●If a destination is selected from <Addr. Book> in the Home screen, settings for e-mail sending or le saving

can be made while the selected destination remains specied.

Specifying from Coded Dial Numbers

Three-digit numbers (coded dial numbers) are assigned to addresses in the Address

Book. You can specify an address simply by entering its coded dial number.

●To use coded dial numbers, the destination must be registered in the Address Book beforehand.

Registering Destinations(P. 161)

●Register the shared folder address from a computer.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 86)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

1Select <Destination> <Specify from Coded Dial>.

●If the <Type> screen appears, select <To>, <Cc>, or <Bcc> as a destination type.

2Enter a three-digit number.

Scanning

240

●If you have entered an incorrect value, use to clear it.

If a conrmation screen appears

●When <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the

destination and the name for the number. (For Group Dial, the destination name and the number of

destinations are shown.) Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>. To specify a different

destination, select <Cancel> and then re-enter the three-digit coded dial number. Displaying

Destinations in Address Book(P. 327)

If you want to specify multiple destinations (e-mail)

●Repeat steps 1 to 2.

Specifying from One-Touch

Specify a destination by selecting from a list registered to the one-touch buttons.

●You need to register destinations before using one-touch dialing. Registering Destinations in the

Address Book(P. 163)

1Select <Destination> <Specify from One-Touch>.

2Select a destination.

If a conrmation screen appears

●When <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation> is set to <On>, a screen is displayed that shows the

destination and destination name registered to the one-touch button. (For Group Dial, the group name

and the number of destinations are shown). Check the contents and if everything is correct, select <OK>.

To specify a different destination, select <Cancel> and then select the one-touch buttons again.

Scanning

241

●If a destination is selected from any of <One-Touch 1> to <One-Touch 4> in the Home screen, settings for

sending e-mail or saving les can be made while the selected destination remains specied.

Entering Destinations Directly (E-Mail Sending)

For a destination that is not registered in the Address Book, specify it by entering an e-mail address.

1Select <Destination> <Specify Using Numeric Keys>.

2Enter the e-mail address, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

Specifying destinations from the transmission records

●You can also recall previously used destinations. Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/

Saving (Recall Settings)(P. 257)

Saving the data to a shared folder

●Only one destination can be specied.

5When sending an e-mail, specify multiple destinations, including Cc/Bcc destinations,

as necessary.

●Select <Destination>, and select the method for specifying destinations.

●<Cc> and <Bcc> addresses can only be selected using <Specify from Address Book>, <Specify from Coded

Dial> or <Specify from One-Touch>.

To delete destinations

If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.

2Select a destination you want to delete.

●If you specied Group Dial, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Selecting <Number of Destinations>

displays destinations registered in the group.

3Select <Remove> <Yes>.

6Specify the scanning settings as necessary.

Scanning

242

Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original

Specifying the Color Mode

Selecting a File Format

Specifying Orientation of Your Original

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

Specifying the Scanning Size of the Original

You can specify the scanning size of your original.

<Scan Size> Select the original size

Specifying the Color Mode

You can specify whether to scan documents in color or black and white.

<Color Mode> Select the color mode

Selecting a File Format

You can select the le format to which originals are scanned from PDF/JPEG/TIFF. For

PDF, you can select Compact PDF that reduces the data size.

<File Format> Select a le format

Scanning

243

●If you select JPEG in <File Format> and try to scan an original from the platen glass, you can only scan

one page. To scan a multiple-page original all at once, use the feeder. Each page of the original is

saved as a separate le. If you select TIFF or PDF, you can scan multiple-page originals either from the

platen glass or from the feeder.

●<PDF (Compact)> compress photos and illustrations on originals more than <PDF>. The le will be

smaller, but the image quality of some originals or the number of originals that can be scanned at

once may be lower.

Specifying Orientation of Your Original

You can specify portrait or landscape orientation.

<Original Orientation> Select the original orientation

Scanning 2-Sided Originals

The machine can automatically scan the front and back sides of originals in the

feeder.

●The machine cannot scan both sides of originals automatically when the originals are placed on the platen

glass.

<2-Sided Original> Select <Book Type> or <Calendar Type>

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face the same direction.

Scanning

244

Select for originals whose images on the front and back sides face in opposite directions.

●For information about other scan settings, see Scanning Clearly(P. 251) or Adjusting Balance

between File Size and Image Quality(P. 256) .

●For e-mail, you can specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority as necessary. Specifying

E-Mail Settings(P. 259)

7Press .

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 247)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the sending/saving process starts.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

press .

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Start TX>.

➠The sending/saving process starts.

File name of the sent document

●The le name of a sent document is automatically assigned based on the following format: communication

management number (four digits)_sent date and time_document number (three digits).le extension

name.

If an E-Mail Send Error Occurs

Error notications are sometimes sent to the e-mail address set to the machine. If you leave it as-is, it may

result in an insucient remaining capacity of mailbox depending on your mail server. It is recommended that

you clear the mailbox periodically.

To clear the mailbox

●When the mailbox is cleared, all e-mail in the server mailbox is deleted. When you specify the e-mail

account that you use usually, you should rst check whether any e-mail in the mailbox needs to be kept.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [E-Mail Settings].

Scanning

245

4Click [Clear] in [Clear Mail Box].

5Read the message that is displayed, and click [OK].

➠E-mail is deleted from the mailbox.

●If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 154)

Scanning

246

Canceling Sending Documents

2KUU-04Y

If you want to cancel sending documents immediately after pressing , select <Cancel> on the display or press

. You can also cancel sending documents after checking the sending status.

◼Select <Cancel> to cancel

◼Press to cancel

If the screen displays a list of documents when is pressed

Originals have been scanned and are waiting to be processed. Select the document to cancel, and select <Yes>.

Scanning

247

◼Check the transmission status before canceling

<TX Job> <Job Status> Select the document <Cancel> <Yes>

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 249)

Scanning

248

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals

2KUU-050

You can check the status and log for scanned originals sent directly from the machine.

●When <Display Job Log> is set to <Off>, you cannot check the logs for sent documents. <Display Job

Log>(P. 425)

1Press .

2Select <TX Job>.

3Check the statuses and logs for sent documents.

To check the statuses for sent documents

1Select <Job Status> and select the document whose status you want to check.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

●If you specied multiple destinations, the number of specied destinations is displayed on the

screen. To check the details of specied multiple destinations, select <Destination>.

To check the logs for sent documents

1Select <Job Log> and select the document whose log you want to check.

●<OK> is displayed when a document was sent successfully, and <Error> is displayed when a document

failed to be sent because it was canceled or there was some error.

➠Displays detailed information about the document.

When a three-digit number is shown in the case of <Error>

Scanning

249

●This number represents an error code. Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 504)

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Canceling Sending Documents(P. 247)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 455)

Scanning

250

Scanning Clearly

2KUU-051

When creating les for brochures that contain many pictures or reports written in pencil, you can adjust density and

brightness to achieve clearer image quality.

Adjusting Image Quality(P. 252) Adjusting Density(P. 253) Adjusting Sharpness When

Scanning (Sharpness)(P. 254)

Scanning

251

Adjusting Image Quality

2KUU-052

You can select the image quality for the scan depending on the original type, such as

text-only originals, originals with charts and graphs, or magazine photos.

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail> or <File> <Original Type> Select the original type

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Scanning

252

Adjusting Density

2KUU-053

You can adjust the density of the scan if the text or images in a original are too light

or dark.

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail> or <File> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness)(P. 254)

Scanning

253

Adjusting Sharpness When Scanning (Sharpness)

2KUU-054

You can adjust the sharpness of the image. Increase the sharpness to sharpen

blurred text and lines, or decrease the sharpness to improve the appearance of

magazine photos.

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail> or <File> <Sharpness> Adjust the sharpness

<Apply>

Example: If you want to sharpen text and lines written in pencil

Example: If you want to improve the appearance of magazine photos

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Adjusting Density(P. 253)

Scanning

254

Useful Scanning Functions

2KUU-055

The machine is equipped with useful functions such as those that can create secure PDF les to prevent them from

being tampered with, and that can send data again to previously specied destinations.

Adjusting Balance between File

Size and Image Quality(P. 256)

Recalling Previously Used

Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall

Settings)(P. 257)

Specifying E-Mail

Settings(P. 259)

Scanning

255

Adjusting Balance between File Size and Image Quality

2KUU-056

You can specify the le compression ratio when converting scanned originals into

the JPEG format. <Small: Memory Priority> makes the compression ratio higher than

normal to create smaller les with lower image quality. On the other hand, <Large:

Image Quality Priority> makes the compression ratio lower than normal larger les

with higher image quality.

<Scan> Specify destinations in <E-Mail> or <File> <Data Size> Specify the setting

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Scanning

256

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving

(Recall Settings)

2KUU-057

You can select a destination from among the past destinations. When you specify a

previously used destination, the machine also sets the same scan settings such as

density you used the last time you sent documents to that destination.

●When <Restrict Resending from Log> is set to <On>, you cannot use this feature. Disabling Use of

Previously Used Destinations(P. 327)

●Turning OFF the machine or setting <Restrict New Destinations> to <On> deletes the past destinations, and

disables this feature. Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P. 327)

●When you specify a destination using this feature, any destinations that you have already specied are

deleted.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

3Select <E-Mail> or <File>.

4Select <Destination> <Recall Set.>.

5Select the destination.

●When you transmit to multiple destinations, only the address specied for the rst transmission is displayed

in the log, but all the destinations are specied.

➠The selected destination and its scan settings are specied. You can also change the settings before

sending.

Scanning

257

To delete destinations (e-mail)

If you specied multiple destinations, you can delete destinations as necessary.

1Select <Destination> <Conrm/Edit>.

2Select a destination you want to delete.

●If you specied Group Dial, "XX destination(s)" is displayed. Selecting <Number of Destinations>

displays destinations registered in the group.

3Select <Remove> <Yes>.

6Press .

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 247)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the sending/saving process starts.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

press .

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Start TX>.

➠The sending/saving process starts.

LINKS

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Scanning

258

Specifying E-Mail Settings

2KUU-058

When attaching a scanned originals to an e-mail, you can specify the subject,

message, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail before sending it.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

2Select <Scan> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

3Select <E-Mail>.

4Specify the destination, and congure the scan settings as necessary. Basic

Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

5Specify the subject, message, reply-to address, and priority for the e-mail.

To specify subject/message

1Select <Subject/Message>.

2Select <Subject>.

3Enter the subject, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

4Select <Message>.

5Enter the message, and select <Apply>.

6Select <Apply>.

To specify reply-to address

Specify the reply-to address when you want to notify the recipient of an e-mail address different from that of

the machine as the reply-to address. Select the target reply-to address from the destinations registered in the

Address Book, and specify it. If the destination has not been registered in the Address Book, see

Registering Destinations(P. 161) .

Scanning

259

1Select <Reply To>.

2Select <Specify from Address Book>.

3Select a reply-to address.

To specify priority

1Select <Priority>.

2Select a priority level.

6Press .

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●If you want to cancel, select <Cancel> <Yes>. Canceling Sending Documents(P. 247)

When placing originals in the feeder in step 1

When scanning is complete, the e-mails are sent.

When placing originals on the platen glass in step 1

When scanning is complete, follow the procedure below (except if you selected JPEG as a le format).

1If there are additional pages of originals to be scanned, place the next original on the platen glass, and

press .

●Repeat this step until you nish scanning all of the pages.

●When there is only one page to be scanned, proceed to the next step.

2Select <Start TX>.

➠The e-mails are sent.

●If you always want to scan with the same settings: Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 154)

●If you want to specify the e-mail sender name: <Register Unit Name (E-Mail)>(P. 402)

LINKS

Checking Status and Log for Scanned Originals(P. 249)

Scanning

260

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)

2KUU-059

To scan from a computer, you can use MF Scan Utility or an application such as an image processing or word

processing application. If you use ScanGear MF supplied with the machine, you can congure advanced scan settings

( Using ScanGear MF(P. 264) ).

●When using the machine with a USB connection, exit sleep mode before scanning. Entering Sleep

Mode(P. 159)

Scanning Using MF Scan Utility

MF Scan Utility is an application included with the machine that enables you to scan

documents or images to a computer. You can forward the scanned data to a specied

application, or attach it to an e-mail message. For more information, click [Instructions]

on MF Scan Utility.

●If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual

website.

Scanning Using an Application

You can scan images by using an application such as a word-processing or

image-processing application, and load the images directly into the application.

You do not need to start another application to scan. Scanning Documents

from an Application(P. 262)

Scanning

261

Scanning Documents from an Application

2KUU-05A

You can scan originals from applications such as image-processing or word-

processing software. The scanned image is directly loaded in the application,

allowing you to edit or process the image immediately. The following procedure

varies depending on the application.

●The application must be compatible with TWAIN or WIA*. For more information, see the instruction manual

for your application.

*TWAIN is a standard for connecting image input devices, such as scanners, with computers. WIA is a function that is an

integrated standard in Windows.

1Place the original(s). Placing Originals(P. 128)

●The second or subsequent originals may not be scanned, or an error message may be displayed

depending on the application. In such a case, place and scan one original at a time.

●When <Auto Online for Remote Scan> is set to <Off>, you must press <Scan> ( (COPY/SCAN))

<Remote Scanner> to bring the machine online. <Auto Online for Remote Scan>(P. 424)

2From the application, select the start scan command.

●The procedure for selecting the start scan command varies depending on the application. For more

information, see the instruction manual for your application.

3Select the scanner driver for this machine.

●Select ScanGear MF or WIA. If you select ScanGear MF, you can congure advanced scan settings.

4Specify the scanning settings as necessary.

5Click [Scan].

➠Scanning of the original starts.

●When scanning is complete, the scanned image is forwarded to an application.

How to use ScanGear MF

●Click on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.

Scanning

262

LINKS

Using ScanGear MF(P. 264)

Scanning

263

Using ScanGear MF

2KUU-05C

ScanGear MF is a scanner driver included with the machine. You can use ScanGear

MF to congure advanced scan settings when you scan. The way of

starting ScanGear MF differs depending of the way of scanning from the computer.

Starting from MF Scan Utility

When scanning from MF Scan Utility, click [ScanGear] to start ScanGear MF. For more information, click

[Instructions] on MF Scan Utility.

●If you are a macOS user, see the manuals for the relevant drivers or software on the online manual

website.

Starting from an application

To scan from applications such as image-processing or word-processing software, select ScanGear MF as

scanner driver. Scanning Documents from an Application(P. 262)

Functions of ScanGear MF

●Previewing the image before scanning

●Specifying the original scanning area

●Adjusting the detailed image quality

How to use ScanGear MF

●Click on the ScanGear MF screen, and see the Help.

Scanning

264

Linking with Mobile Devices

Linking with Mobile Devices .................................................................................................................... 266

Connecting with Mobile Devices ...................................................................................................................... 267

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection) .............................................................................. 268

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode) ...................................................................................................... 269

Utilizing the Machine through Applications .................................................................................................... 272

Using AirPrint .................................................................................................................................................... 273

Printing with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................... 278

Scanning with AirPrint .................................................................................................................................. 281

Faxing with AirPrint ...................................................................................................................................... 283

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used ............................................................................................................................ 285

Using Google Cloud Print .................................................................................................................................. 286

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control .............................................................................................. 288

Linking with Mobile Devices

265

Linking with Mobile Devices

2KUU-05E

Linking the machine with mobile devices such as smart phones and tablets enables you to use an appropriate

application to perform printing, or other operation with ease. In addition, you can operate the machine from mobile

devices via remote control to conrm printing status and change the settings of the machine.

Connecting with Mobile Devices(P. 267)

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

Utilizing the Machine through Applications(P. 272)

Using AirPrint(P. 273)

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control(P. 288)

●Depending on your mobile device, the machine may not operate correctly.

Linking with Mobile Devices

266

Connecting with Mobile Devices

2KUU-05F

There are two methods used to connect a mobile device with the machine: connecting via a wireless LAN router, and

communicating wirelessly and directly with the machine. Select a connection method in accordance with the

communication environment and the device you are using.

◼Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router

Just as connecting a computer to the machine, connect a mobile device to the machine via a wireless LAN router.

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)(P. 268)

◼Connecting Directly

Directly connect a mobile device to the machine wirelessly without using wireless LAN. It is possible to immediately

connect to the machine wirelessly even outside of a wireless LAN environment. Connecting Directly (Access Point

Mode)(P. 269)

Linking with Mobile Devices

267

Connecting via a Wireless LAN Router (LAN Connection)

2KUU-05H

If a wireless LAN router is connected to the network connected to the machine, you can establish a communication

with a mobile device via the wireless LAN router in the same way for a computer. For information about how to

connect a mobile device to your wireless LAN router, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or

contact your manufacturer. Connect the machine to a router via the wired or wireless LAN. Setting Up the Network

Environment(P. 14)

●If your mobile devices do not support IPv6, use the IPv4 address. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)

1Press .

2Select <Network Information>.

3Display the IP address of the machine.

IPv4

●Select <IPv4> <IP Address>.

IPv6

●Select <IPv6> <Link-Local Address> <IP Address>.

4Connect from the mobile device to the IP address that appears on the screen.

Linking with Mobile Devices

268

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)

2KUU-05J

Even in an environment without a wireless LAN router, using "Access Point Mode," which can directly connect a mobile

device to the machine wirelessly, enables you to connect the mobile device on hand to the machine without dicult

settings.

Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

Connecting Directly (Touch Panel Model)(P. 270)

Connecting Directly (5 Lines LCD Model)(P. 270)

Preparing for Direct Connection (Access Point Mode)

Establish a connection by using Access Point Mode in the following order (only for IPv4 environment).

Preparing the mobile device

●Congure settings to connect the mobile device to Wi-Fi.

Put the machine into the connection standby status.

●<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> set <Use

Direct Connection> to <On>.

Specifying the value for time until auto termination

●You can specify the time to automatically establish a disconnection when the direct connection is enabled.

<Time Until Direct Connection Termination>(P. 365)

Connecting multiple mobile devices at the same time

●Congure the machine's SSID and network key arbitrarily. The network key can be left blank. <Access

Point Mode Settings>(P. 365)

Changing the IP address for direct connection

●The IP address for direct connection is set automatically. You can also set any IP address. <IP Address

Settings for Direct Conn.>(P. 365)

Linking with Mobile Devices

269

Connecting Directly (Touch Panel Model)

●It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.

1Select <Direct Conn> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

●If a message appears, continue by following the instructions on the screen.

2Congure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key

information that appear on the display.

3When the target operation is completed, select <Disconnect> <Yes>.

Connecting Directly (5 Lines LCD Model)

●It may take time until a connection of the machine and the mobile device is established.

1Press , and select <Direct Connection>.

●If a message appears, continue by following the instructions on the screen.

2Select <Display SSID/Network Key>.

3Congure the Wi-Fi settings from the mobile device using the SSID and network key

information that appear on the display.

4When the target operation is completed, press , then select <Disconnect>

<Yes>.

●Select <Conn. Info>/<Connection Information> on the screen under the direct connection to check the

connected mobile device.

Linking with Mobile Devices

270

●While connecting via direct connection, you may not be able to connect to the Internet depending on the

mobile device you are using.

●If a wireless connection from the mobile device is not performed within 5 minutes while the SSID and

network key are displayed, the connection waiting state terminates.

●If the status without data transmission between the mobile device and the machine continues during

communication by direct connection, the communication may end.

●Power saving performance of sleep mode degrades while connecting via direct connection.

●If the machine is used with a wireless LAN, you need to keep the machine connected to the wireless LAN

when using direct connection. When the machine is not connected to a wireless LAN or the connection

process is not complete yet, the direct connection process cannot begin. If the connection between the

machine and the wireless LAN is lost during communication through direct connection, the communication

may end.

●When you nish the desired operation, be sure to terminate the connection between the machine and the

mobile device. If they remain connected, power saving performance of sleep mode degrades.

●If you use the direct connection, do not set the IP address manually on the mobile device. Doing so may

prevent proper communication after using the direct connection.

Linking with Mobile Devices

271

Utilizing the Machine through Applications

2KUU-05K

Perform printing and other operations from the mobile device connected to the machine using applications. Various

applications including those exclusive to Canon are supported. Use properly in accordance with your device, the

application, and the situation.

◼Using Canon PRINT Business

This application is used to perform printing and other operations from mobile devices that support iOS/Android. When

printing, it is not necessary to perform operations on the machine. For more information on supported operating

systems, detailed setting methods, and operations, see the application's Help or the Canon website (https://

global.canon/gomp/).

●You can download Canon PRINT Business for free, but you will be charged the Internet connection fee.

◼Printing with Canon Print Service

You can easily print from the menu of applications that support the Android print subsystem. For more information on

supported operating systems and detailed settings and procedures, see the Canon website (https://global.canon).

◼Printing by Mopria®

The machine also supports Mopria®. Using Mopria® enables you to print from mobile devices that support Android

using common operations and settings, even if manufacturers and models differ. For example, if you are using

printers supporting Mopria® made by multiple manufacturers or a printer supporting Mopria® that is located in a

place you are visiting, you can print without installing an application exclusive for each manufacturer or model. For

more information on supporting models or operation environments, see http://www.mopria.org.

◼Printing with Google Cloud Print

You can use applications and services which support Google Cloud Print to print from a computer or mobile device

without using a printer driver. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

Linking with Mobile Devices

272

Using AirPrint

2KUU-0A9

This section describes the settings required to use AirPrint and the procedures to be performed using Apple devices.

AirPrint Settings

Conguring AirPrint Settings(P. 273)

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 276)

Functions of the AirPrint

Printing with AirPrint(P. 278)

Scanning with AirPrint(P. 281)

Faxing with AirPrint(P. 283)

Troubleshooting

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used(P. 285)

Conguring AirPrint Settings

You can register information, including the name of the machine and installation location, that is used for identifying

the machine. You can also disable the AirPrint function of the machine. Use the Remote UI to change these settings.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

●If you are using a mobile device, such as an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch, read "click" as "tap" in this section.

3Select [Network Settings] [AirPrint Settings].

4Click [Edit].

Linking with Mobile Devices

273

5Specify the required settings.

[Use AirPrint]

Select the check box to enable AirPrint. To disable AirPrint, clear the check box.

[Printer Name]

Enter the name of the machine. If an mDNS name has already been registered in [mDNS Settings] (

Conguring DNS(P. 57) ), the registered name is displayed.

[Location]

Enter the location of the machine. If a location has already been registered in [Device Information] ([System

Management] in [System Management Settings] (Settings/Registration)), the registered name is displayed.

[Latitude]

Enter the latitude of the location where the machine is installed.

[Longitude]

Enter the longitude of the location where the machine is installed.

6Click [OK].

If you select [Use AirPrint], the following settings are set to on.

●<Use HTTP>

●[IPP Print Settings]

●<mDNS Settings> (IPv4 Settings)

●<mDNS Settings> (IPv6 Settings)

●<Network Link Scan Settings>

●If you change [Printer Name] that you have once specied, you may be unable to print any more from the

Mac that has been able to be used for printing so far. This phenomenon occurs because [mDNS Name] (

Conguring DNS(P. 57) ) of IPv4 is also changed automatically. In this case, add the machine to the Mac

again.

●Entering the printer name makes it easier to identify multiple printers that support AirPrint.

Linking with Mobile Devices

274

◼Changing the Setting of Functions Available with AirPrint

If you want to disable functions that you are not going to use with AirPrint or encrypt communications, congure the

necessary setting using the operation panel or Remote UI.

Changing Print and Fax Settings

To perform printing or fax sending with AirPrint, IPP protocol is used.

Turning the Function On/Off

You can specify whether to perform printing or fax sending with AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].

[Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings]

Clear or select the [Use IPP Printing] check box [OK]

Changing the TLS Setting

You can specify whether to encrypt communications using TLS when performing printing or fax sending with

AirPrint. The factory default setting is [On].

[Settings/Registration] [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings] [Edit] in [IPP Print Settings]

Clear or select the [Use TLS] check box [OK]

Changing the Scan Setting

Congure the scan setting using AirPrint.

Set the Function to Enable or Disable

You can turn on/off the scan function available with AirPrint. The factory default setting is <On>.

Set <Use Network Link Scan> to <Off> or <On>

Change TLS Settings

You can specify whether or not to encrypt TLS communications when scanning data using AirPrint. The factory

default setting is <On>.

Linking with Mobile Devices

275

Set <Use TLS> to <Off> or <On>

Displaying the Screen for AirPrint

You can display the screen for AirPrint, on which you can not only access the AirPrint Settings but also view

information about consumables, such as paper and toner cartridge, etc. Further, you can congure security function

settings.

1Select [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners], then add the machine to the Mac

you are using.

●If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

2Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].

3Click [Options & Supplies].

4Click [Show Printer Webpage].

5Log in to the Remote UI.

●To change the AirPrint settings, it is necessary to log in as an administrator.

◼AirPrint-Dedicated Page

When you log in with administrator privileges, the AirPrint-dedicated page is displayed as shown below.

Linking with Mobile Devices

276

[AirPrint Settings]

Enables you to check the values entered in the AirPrint settings, such as the name and location of the

machine. You can click [Edit] to change the settings.

[Other Settings]

[Print Security Settings]

Congure the print security settings using TLS or authentication.

[Scan Security Settings]

Congure the scan security settings using TLS.

[TLS Settings]

Enables you to change the key and certicate used for TLS. Conguring the Key and Certicate for

TLS(P. 308)

[Key and Certicate Settings]

Enables you to generate and install a key and certicate, or request a certicate to be issued.

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308)

[Consumables Information]

Enables you to check the information of a paper source and consumables of the machine and the device

version.

Trademarks

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the

U.S. and other countries. AirPrint and the AirPrint logo are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Linking with Mobile Devices

277

Printing with AirPrint

2KUU-05R

You can print from an iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, or Mac without using a printer driver.

Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch(P. 278)

Printing from a Mac(P. 279)

System Requirements

One of the following Apple devices is required to print with AirPrint.

●iPad (all models)

●iPhone (3GS or later)

●iPod touch (3rd generation or later)

●Mac (Mac OS X 10.7 or later)*

*OS X v10.9 or later when using a USB connection

Network Environment

One of the following environments is required.

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected directly

●An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

●For printing, it is required to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On]. Changing the Setting of Functions Available

with AirPrint(P. 275)

Printing from an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Apple device.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14) .

●For information on the Direct Connection, see Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269) .

2From the application on your Apple device, tap to display the menu options.

Linking with Mobile Devices

278

3Tap [Print].

4Select this machine from [Printer].

●The printers connected to the network are displayed here. Select this machine in this step.

●The screen for selecting this machine in [Printer] is not displayed on applications that do not support

AirPrint. You cannot print by using those applications.

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

6Tap [Print].

➠Printing starts.

Checking the print status

●During printing, press the Home button of the Apple device twice tap [Print].

Printing from a Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14) .

2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

●If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual or Help for the application you are using.

4Select the machine in the print dialog box.

●The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select this machine in this step.

5Specify the print settings as necessary.

Linking with Mobile Devices

279

●The available settings and paper sizes differ depending on the application you are using.

6Click [Print].

➠Printing starts.

Linking with Mobile Devices

280

Scanning with AirPrint

2KUU-05S

You can use AirPrint to transfer the data scanned by the machine directly to a Mac.

System Requirements

To scan with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed. To scan using TLS, you need a Mac with

OS X 10.11 or later installed.

Network Environment

One of the following environments is required.

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN

●An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

●For scanning, it is required to set <Use Network Link Scan> to <On>. Changing the Setting of Functions

Available with AirPrint(P. 275)

●Before scanning, it is required to put the machine into online state. When the auto online function (<Auto

Online for Remote Scan>) is set to <Off>, rst put the machine into online state by selecting <Scan>

<Remote Scanner>, then start the procedure for scanning.

●You cannot scan while settings for operations are being made, or while the machine is performing any

operation whatsoever.

Scanning from a Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14) .

2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

●If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

3Select this machine from the list of printers in [Printers & Scanners].

4Click [Scan].

Linking with Mobile Devices

281

5Click [Open Scanner].

➠The [Scanner] screen is displayed.

6Congure the scan settings as necessary.

7Click [Scan].

➠The original is scanned, and the image is displayed.

Linking with Mobile Devices

282

Faxing with AirPrint

2KUU-05U

You can send faxes from a Mac in almost the same way as when you print from a Mac.

System Requirements

To send faxes with AirPrint, you need a Mac with OS X 10.9 or later installed.

Network Environment

One of the following environments is required.

●An environment where an Apple device and the machine are connected to the same LAN

●An environment where a Mac is connected to the machine via USB

●For faxing, it is required to set [Use IPP Printing] to [On]. Changing the Setting of Functions

Available with AirPrint(P. 275)

Faxing from a Mac

1Make sure that the machine is turned ON and connected to the Mac.

●For how to make sure of this, see Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14) .

2Add the machine to the Mac from [System Preferences] [Printers & Scanners].

●If the machine has already been added, this operation is not required.

3Open a document in an application and display the print dialog box.

●How to display the print dialog box differs for each application. For more information, see the instruction

manual for the application you are using.

4Select this machine in the print dialog box.

➠The printers connected to the Mac are displayed. Select the fax driver of this machine in this step.

5Specify the destination.

Linking with Mobile Devices

283

6Click [Fax].

➠Fax sending starts.

Linking with Mobile Devices

284

If AirPrint Cannot Be Used

2KUU-05W

If AirPrint cannot be used, try taking the following solutions.

●Make sure that the machine is turned ON. If the machine is turned ON, rst turn it OFF, then wait for at least 10

seconds and then turn it back ON to check if the problem is solved.

●Make sure that no error messages are displayed on the machine.

●Make sure that Apple devices and the machine are connected to the same LAN. If the machine is turned ON, it may

take several minutes before the machine is ready for communication.

●Make sure that Bonjour on your Apple device is enabled.

●For printing, make sure that the paper is loaded in the machine and that the machine contains a sucient amount

remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge. Displaying the Screen for AirPrint(P. 276)

●For scanning, make sure that the machine's setting for Network Link Scan is <On>. Changing the Setting of

Functions Available with AirPrint(P. 275)

Linking with Mobile Devices

285

Using Google Cloud Print

2KUU-05X

Google Cloud Print is a service that enables a user with a Google account to print from a smartphone, tablet, or

computer connected to the Internet using applications compatible with Google Cloud Print. Unlike conventional

printing from a computer, it does not require a printer driver.

Checking the Settings of the Machine(P. 286)

Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

●An environment in which you can connect to the internet is required when registering the machine and

when printing using Google Cloud Print. In addition, the customer is responsible for any fees regarding

internet connection.

●Google Cloud Print may not be available, depending on your country or region.

●A Google account is required to use Google Cloud Print. If you do not have a Google account, create one on

the Google website.

Checking the Settings of the Machine

Check the following before conguring cloud printing.

Make sure that the IPv4 address or IPv6 address is specied for the machine, and that the machine is able to

communicate with computers on a network.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

●Check whether the date and time of the machine are specied correctly. Setting the Date/Time(P. 11)

Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print

Registering the machine with Google Cloud Print enables you to print from anywhere using the service.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

Linking with Mobile Devices

286

1Start the Remote UI and log in as an administrator. Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [Google Cloud Print Settings].

4Click [Edit] for [Basic Settings].

5Select the [Use Google Cloud Print] check box [OK].

6Click [Register] in [Registration Status].

Re-Registering the Machine

●To re-register the machine, delete its registration before registering it again.

7Click the URL link displayed for [URL for Registration].

8Follow the instructions on the screen to register the machine.

➠Printing can now be performed from applications that support Google Cloud Print, such as Google

Chrome™.

●For information on the latest applications that support Google Cloud Print, check the Google Cloud

Print home page.

Conguring Settings on the Operation Panel

●You can also enable or disable the Cloud Print function from the <Menu> screen. <Google Cloud Print

Settings>(P. 426)

Registering from a Mobile Device or Google Chrome

●You can register the machine from a mobile device or Google Chrome. The machine's display shows the

conrmation screen before completion of the registration. Select <Yes> to complete the registration.

●For information on registration methods, see the manual of your device or the Google Cloud Print website.

Linking with Mobile Devices

287

Managing the Machine by the Remote Control

2KUU-05Y

You can use the Remote UI from a smart phone or tablet Web browser. You can conrm the machine status or

perform various settings from a mobile device.

Supported Web Browsers

Web browsers supporting the Remote UI for mobile devices are the following.

Android OS

●Chrome

iOS

●Safari

Starting the Remote UI from Mobile Devices

Enter the IP address of the machine on the Web browser to start the Remote UI. Prior to operation, conrm the IP

address set for the machine ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 38) ). If it is unknown, ask your network administrator.

1Start the Web browser of the mobile device.

2Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address entry column.

●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets.

Example: http://[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/

●For a "Smartphone Version" of the Remote UI, a portion of items displayed are omitted. If you want to

conrm all of the items, see the "PC Version."

LINKS

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 334)

Linking with Mobile Devices

288

Managing the Machine

Managing the Machine ............................................................................................................................... 290

Setting Access Privileges .................................................................................................................................. 292

Setting the System Manager PIN .................................................................................................................. 293

Setting a Remote UI PIN ............................................................................................................................... 295

Conguring the Network Security Settings .................................................................................................... 297

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls ............................................................................................. 299

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings ......................................................................................... 300

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings ..................................................................................... 303

Changing Port Numbers ............................................................................................................................... 305

Setting a Proxy ............................................................................................................................................. 306

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS .................................................................................................. 308

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 310

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR) ........................................................................ 313

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication .......................................................... 316

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings ......................................................................................... 318

Restricting the Machine's Functions ................................................................................................................ 322

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions ......................................................................... 324

Restricting Use of the Address Book ...................................................................................................... 325

Limiting Available Destinations .............................................................................................................. 327

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions ................................................................................................... 329

Restricting USB Functions ............................................................................................................................. 331

Disabling HTTP Communication ................................................................................................................... 332

Disabling Remote UI ..................................................................................................................................... 333

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI) ................................................................................... 334

Starting Remote UI ....................................................................................................................................... 335

Checking the Status and Logs ....................................................................................................................... 338

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI ................................................................................................... 344

Registering Destinations from Remote UI ....................................................................................................... 347

Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI .............................................................................................. 351

Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software .......................................................... 353

Updating the Firmware ..................................................................................................................................... 355

Initializing Settings ........................................................................................................................................... 358

Managing the Machine

289

Managing the Machine

2KUU-060

To reduce the various risks associated with the use of this machine, such as leaks of personal information or

unauthorized use by third parties, constant and effective security measures are required. An administrator should

manage important settings, such as access privileges and security settings, to ensure that the machine is used safely.

◼Conguring the Basic Management System

Setting Access Privileges(P. 292) Conguring the Network Security Settings(P. 297)

◼Preparing for Risks from Negligence or Misuse

Restricting the Machine's Functions(P. 322)

◼Ensuring Effective Management

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 334)

Managing the Machine

290

◼Managing the System Conguration and Settings

Updating the Firmware(P. 355) Initializing Settings(P. 358)

Managing the Machine

291

Setting Access Privileges

2KUU-061

Protect the machine from unauthorized access by only allowing users with access privileges to use the machine. When

privileges are set, the user must enter a PIN to change settings or access the Remote UI.

Access privileges are divided into two types: System Manager Mode and General User Mode. System Manager Mode

has full access privileges, and a System Manager PIN can be set to restrict login in this mode. And by setting a Remote

UI Access PIN, you can restrict use of the Remote UI in General User Mode and in System Manager Mode without a

System Manager PIN set.

System Manager PIN

System Manager PIN is intended exclusively for Administrators having full access privileges. If you specify this

PIN, you need to log in to the machine using this PIN in order to access <Network Settings> or <System

Management Settings>, etc. Set the System Manager PIN when you need different access privilege levels for

administrators and general users. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

Remote UI PIN (Remote UI Access PIN)

This is a PIN for using the Remote UI. Only users who know the PIN can access the Remote UI. Setting a

Remote UI PIN(P. 295)

Managing the Machine

292

Setting the System Manager PIN

2KUU-062

Set a System Manager PIN that is intended exclusively for Administrators. You can access <Network Settings>, <System

Management Settings>, etc. only when the PIN has been entered correctly. It is recommended that only

Administrators know the PIN.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <System Management Settings>.

3Select <System Manager Information Settings> <System Manager PIN>.

4Specify the System Manager PIN.

●Enter numbers for each item, and press <Apply> ( ).

●When <PIN (Conrm)> is displayed, enter the PIN once again to conrm.

●You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000."

●To cancel the System Manager PIN settings, clear the information you entered by pressing and press

<Apply> ( ) with the elds blank.

Setting the System Manager Name

1Select <System Manager Name>.

2Enter the System Manager Name, and select <Apply>.

●On how to enter text, see Entering Text(P. 123) .

Managing the Machine

293

●Do not forget your PIN. If you forget your PIN, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help

line.

Conguring settings via the Remote UI

●Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Click [Settings/Registration] [System

Management] [Edit] and specify the necessary settings on the displayed screen.

●By using the Remote UI, you can register a variety of information, including contact information,

Administrator comments, the installation location of the machine, as well as the settings that you can

page of the Remote UI. Checking System Manager Information(P. 341)

If a System Manager PIN is Set

●If you try to access <Network Settings> or <System Management

Settings>, etc., the following screen is displayed. Enter the set PIN.

●Entering a PIN is also required when logging in in System Manager

Mode in the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 292)

Managing the Machine

294

Setting a Remote UI PIN

2KUU-063

You can set a PIN for access to the Remote UI. All users use a common PIN.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use Remote UI Access PIN] check box and set the PIN.

[Use Remote UI Access PIN]

If you select the check box, you must enter a PIN to access the Remote UI.

[Set/Change PIN]

To set or change a PIN, select the check box and enter the same number both in the [PIN] and [Conrm] text

boxes.

6Click [OK].

Using the operation panel

●Remote UI Access PIN settings can also be accessed from the <Menu> screen. <Remote UI

Settings>(P. 423)

Managing the Machine

295

If <System Management Settings> are initialized

●The Remote UI Access PIN is also initialized. After an initialization, reset the PIN. <Initialize

Menu>(P. 428)

LINKS

Setting Access Privileges(P. 292)

Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

Managing the Machine

296

Conguring the Network Security Settings

2KUU-064

Authorized users may incur unanticipated losses from attacks by malicious third parties, such as sning, spoong,

and tampering of data as it ows over a network. To protect your important and valuable information from these

attacks, the machine supports the following features to enhance security and secrecy.

Firewall Settings

Unauthorized access by third parties, as well as network attacks and intrusions, can be blocked by limiting

communication only to devices that have a specic IP address or MAC address. Restricting Communication

by Using Firewalls(P. 299)

Changing Port Numbers

A protocol that is used to exchange information with other devices is assigned port numbers that are

predetermined according to the type of protocol. The port number must be the same for all communication

devices; therefore, changing it to an arbitrary number is important to prevent hacking from outside.

Changing Port Numbers(P. 305)

Proxy Settings

When the client devices are connected to an external network, communication is established through the proxy

server. When the proxy server is used, websites can be browsed more safely, therefore, security can be

expected to be enhanced. Setting a Proxy(P. 306)

TLS Encrypted Communication

TLS is a protocol for encryption for data sent over a network and is often used for communication via a Web

browser or an e-mail application. TLS enables secure network communication when you access the machine

from a computer via the Remote UI. Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308)

Managing the Machine

297

IEEE 802.1X Authentication

IEEE 802.1X is a standard and mechanism for blocking unauthorized access to the network by collectively

managing user authentication information. If a device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must

go through user authentication in order to prove that the connection is made by an authorized user.

Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server, which permits or rejects communication

to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails, a LAN switch (or an access point)

blocks access from the outside of the network. The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client

device. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 318)

Managing the Machine

298

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls

2KUU-065

Without proper security, unauthorized third parties can access computers and other communication devices that are

connected to a network. To prevent this unauthorized access, specify the settings for packet lter, a feature that

restricts communication to devices with specied IP addresses or MAC addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 300)

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 303)

Managing the Machine

299

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings

2KUU-066

You can either limit communication to only devices with specied IP addresses, or block devices with specied IP

addresses but permit other communications. You can specify a single IP address or a range of IP addresses.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Security Settings] [IP Address Filter].

4Click [Edit] to specify a lter type.

[IPv4 Address: Inbound Filter]

Restrict data received by the machine from a computer by specifying an IPv4 address.

[IPv6 Address: Inbound Filter]

Restrict data received by the machine from a computer by specifying an IPv6 address.

5Specify the settings for packet ltering.

Managing the Machine

300

[Blocked Addresses]

[Allowed Addresses]

1Select the [Use Filter] check box.

●Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

2Specify the address.

●Enter the IP address (or the range of IP addresses) in the [Address to Register] text box and click

[Add].

Registered address Result

[Blocked Addresses]

Restricts communication (received) with devices having IP addresses entered for

[Address to Register]. Communication is allowed with devices with any other IP

addresses.

[Allowed Addresses]

Allows communication (received) only with devices having IP addresses entered for

[Address to Register], and restricts communication with devices with any other IP

addresses.

Registered in both

Allows communication (received) only with devices having IP addresses registered in

[Allowed Addresses], and restricts communication with devices with any other IP

addresses. However, communication is restricted for IP addresses also registered in

[Blocked Addresses].

Check for entry errors

●If IP addresses are incorrectly entered, you may be unable to access the machine from the Remote UI,

in which case you need to set <IPv4 Address Filter> or <IPv6 Address Filter> to <Off>.

<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 422)

Managing the Machine

301

<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 422)

Entry form for IP addresses

Description Example

Entering a single address

IPv4:

Delimit numbers with periods. 192.168.0.10

IPv6:

Delimit alphanumeric characters with

colons.

fe80::10

Specifying a range of addresses Insert a hyphen between the

addresses. 192.168.0.10-192.168.0.20

Specifying a range of addresses with a prex

(IPv6 only)

Enter the address, followed by a slash

and a number indicating the prex

length.

fe80::1234/64

Deleting an IP address from exceptions

●Select an IP address and click [Delete].

3Click [OK].

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IP address ltering from the <Menu> screen.

<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 422)

<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 422)

LINKS

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 303)

Managing the Machine

302

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings

2KUU-067

You can limit communication to only devices with specied MAC addresses.

This function is unavailable when the machine is connected to a wireless LAN.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Security Settings] [MAC Address Filter].

4Click [Edit] .

5Specify the settings for packet ltering.

●Specify MAC addresses for exceptions.

1Select the [Use Filter] check box.

●Select the check box to restrict communication. Clear the check box to disable the restriction.

2Specify address exceptions.

Managing the Machine

303

●Enter the MAC address in the [Address to Register] text box and click [Add].

●You do not need to delimit the address with hyphens or colons.

Check for entry errors

●If MAC addresses are incorrectly entered, you may become unable to access the machine from the

Remote UI, in which case you need to set <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>. <MAC Address

Filter>(P. 423)

Deleting a MAC address from exceptions

●Select a MAC address and click [Delete].

3Click [OK].

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable MAC address ltering from the <Menu> screen. <MAC Address

Filter>(P. 423)

LINKS

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 300)

Managing the Machine

304

Changing Port Numbers

2KUU-068

Ports serve as endpoints for communicating with other devices. Typically, conventional port numbers are used for

major protocols, but devices that use these port numbers are vulnerable to attacks because these port numbers are

well-known. To enhance security, your Network Administrator may change the port numbers. When a port number has

been changed, the new number must be shared with the communicating devices, such as computers and servers.

Specify the port number settings depending on the network environment.

●To change the port number for proxy server, see Setting a Proxy(P. 306) .

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Network Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <TCP/IP Settings> <Port Number Settings>.

4Selecting the protocol of which you want to change the port number.

Learning more about the protocols

●<LPD>, <RAW> or <WSD Multicast Discovery> Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD

Functions(P. 42)

●<HTTP> Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 332)

●<POP3> or <SMTP> Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82)

●<SNMP> Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 63)

5Enter the port number, and press <Apply> ( ).

LINKS

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

Managing the Machine

305

Setting a Proxy

2KUU-069

A proxy (or HTTP proxy server) refers to a computer or software that carries out HTTP communication for other

devices, especially when communicating with resources outside the network, such as when browsing Web sites. The

client devices connect to the outside network through the proxy server, and do not communicate directly to the

resources outside. Setting a proxy not only facilitates management of trac between in-house and outside networks

but also blocks unauthorized access and consolidates anti-virus protection for enhanced security. When you use

Google Cloud Print to print over the Internet, you can enhance security by setting a proxy. When setting a proxy, make

sure that you have the necessary proxy information, including the IP address, port number, and a user name and

password for authentication.

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Click [Edit] in [Proxy Settings].

5Select the [Use Proxy] check box and specify the required settings.

[Use Proxy]

Select the check box to use the specied proxy server when communicating with an HTTP server.

[HTTP Proxy Server Address]

Enter the address of the proxy server. Specify the IP address or host name depending on the environment.

[HTTP Proxy Server Port Number]

Change the port number as necessary.

Managing the Machine

306

[Use Proxy within Same Domain]

Select the check box to also use the specied proxy server for communication with devices in the same

domain.

[Use Proxy Authentication]

To enable authentication by the proxy server, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the

user name in the [User Name] text box.

[Set/Change Password]

To set or change the password for the proxy authentication, when it is enabled, select the check box and

enter alphanumeric characters for the new password in the [Password] text box.

6Click [OK].

LINKS

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

Managing the Machine

307

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS

2KUU-06A

You can encrypt communication between the machine and a Web browser on the computer by using Transport Layer

Security (TLS). TLS is a mechanism for encrypting data sent or received over the network. TLS must be enabled when

the Remote UI is used for specifying settings such as SNMPv3. To use TLS encrypted communication for the Remote

UI, you need to specify a "key and certicate" (server certicate) you want to use before enabling TLS. Generate or

install the key and certicate for TLS before enabling TLS ( Management Functions(P. 545) ).

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [TCP/IP Settings].

4Click [Key and Certicate] in [TLS Settings].

5Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use.

Viewing details of a certicate

●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text link

under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.

6Enable TLS for the Remote UI.

1Click [Security Settings] [Remote UI Settings].

2Click [Edit].

3Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [OK].

Managing the Machine

308

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable TLS encrypted communication from the <Menu> screen. <Use TLS>(P. 422)

Starting the Remote UI with TLS

●If you try to start the Remote UI when TLS is enabled, a security alert may be displayed regarding the

security certicate. In this case, check that the correct URL is entered in the address eld, and then proceed

to display the Remote UI screen. Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

Enabling TLS for e-mailing

●If the SMTP server and the POP3 server support TLS, you can enable TLS for communication with these

servers ( Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82) ). For more information about the SMTP

server and the POP3 server, contact your Internet service provider or Network Administrator.

LINKS

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 63)

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 310)

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 313)

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 316)

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 318)

Managing the Machine

309

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

2KUU-06C

A key and certicate can be generated with the machine when it is required for encrypted communication via

Transport Layer Security (TLS). You can use TLS when accessing the machine via the Remote UI. Self-signed certicates

are used with the key and certicate generated in "Network Communication."

●If you want to use a server certicate that has a CA signature, you can generate a CSR together with a key

instead of a certicate. Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)(P. 313)

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

Deleting a registered key and certicate

●Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certicate you want to delete click [OK].

●A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is

displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the other key and certicate

before deleting it.

5Select [Network Communication] and click [OK].

6Specify settings for the key and certicate.

Managing the Machine

310

[Key Settings]

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a

list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Key Algorithm]

Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-

down list. In either case, the larger the number for the key length is, the higher the security level

becomes. However, the communication speed becomes slower.

●When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the

key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].

[Certicate Settings]

[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the validity start date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day.

[Validity End Date (YYYY/MM/DD)]

Enter the validity end date of the certicate, in the order of: year, month, day. A date earlier than

[Validity Start Date (YYYY/MM/DD)] cannot be set.

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.

You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"

for the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"

is often abbreviated as "CN."

7Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

311

●Generating a key and certicate may take some time.

●After the key and certicate is generated, it is automatically registered to the machine.

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308)

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 316)

Managing the Machine

312

Generating a Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)

2KUU-06E

Because certicates generated on the machine do not have a CA signature, a communication error may result

depending on devices it communicates with. To have the certicate authority issue the certicate with the CA

signature, you need to obtain data of CSR (Certicate Signing Request), which the administrator can generate from

Remote UI. When the certicate is issued, register it in the key with the CSR generated.

Generating a Key and CSR(P. 313)

Registering a Certicate to a Key(P. 315)

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

Generating a Key and CSR

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Generate Key].

Deleting a registered key and certicate

●Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certicate you want to delete click [OK].

●A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is

displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and certicate before

deleting it.

5Select [Key and Certicate Signing Request (CSR)] and click [OK].

6Specify settings for the key and CSR.

Managing the Machine

313

[Key Settings]

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for naming the key. Set a name that will be easy for you to nd later in a

list.

[Signature Algorithm]

Select the signature algorithm from the drop-down list.

[Key Algorithm]

Select the key generation algorithm from [RSA] or [ECDSA], then select the key length from the drop-

down list. In any case, the larger the number for the key length, the slower the communication.

However, the security is tighter.

●When [SHA384] or [SHA512] is selected in [Signature Algorithm], [512-bit] cannot be selected as the

key length when [RSA] is selected in [Key Algorithm].

[Certicate Signing Request (CSR) Settings]

[Country/Region]

Click the [Select Country/Region] radio button and select the country/region from the drop-down list.

You can also click the [Enter Internet Country Code] radio button and enter a country code, such as "US"

for the United States.

[State]/[City]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the location as necessary.

[Organization]/[Organization Unit]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the organization name as necessary.

[Common Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the common name of the certicate as necessary. "Common Name"

is often abbreviated as "CN."

7Click [OK].

●Generating a key and CSR may take some time.

8Click [Store in File].

●A dialog box for storing the le appears. Choose where to store the le and click [Save].

Managing the Machine

314

➠The CSR le is stored on the computer.

9Attach the stored le and submit the application to the certication authority.

Registering a Certicate to a Key

The key with the CSR generated cannot be used until the certicate issued from the certicate authority based on the

CSR is registered in the key. Once the certication authority has issued the certicate, register it using the procedure

below.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings].

4Click [Key Name] or [Certicate] required to register the certicate.

5Click [Register Certicate].

6Click [Browse], specify the le for the certicate signing request, and click [Register].

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308)

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 310)

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 316)

Managing the Machine

315

Registering the Key and Certicate for Network

Communication

2KUU-06F

You can obtain the key and certicate, and the CA certicate from a certication authority (CA) for use with the

machine. Install and register the obtained key and certicate le and CA certicate le in this machine using Remote

UI. Check the key and certicate, and CA certicate conditions that are required for the machine in advance (

Management Functions(P. 545) ).

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Security Settings] [Key and Certicate Settings] or [CA Certicate Settings].

●Click [Key and Certicate Settings] to install a key and certicate, or [CA Certicate Settings] to install a CA

certicate.

4Click [Register Key and Certicate] or [Register CA Certicate].

Deleting a registered key and certicate or CA certicate

●Click [Delete] on the right of the key and certicate or CA certicate you want to delete click [OK]. You

cannot delete the preinstalled CA certicates.

●A key and certicate cannot be deleted if it is currently used for some purpose, such as when "[TLS]" is

displayed under [Key Usage]. In this case, disable the function or replace the key and certicate before

deleting it.

Disabling or enabling the preinstalled CA certicates

●Click [Disable] on the right of the preinstalled CA certicate you want to disable. To enable the certicate

again, click [Enable] on the right of the certicate.

5Click [Install].

Managing the Machine

316

Deleting the key and certicate le or CA certicate le

●Click [Delete] on the right of the le you want to delete click [OK].

6Click [Browse], specify the le to install, and click [Start Installation].

➠The key and certicate le or the CA certicate le is installed on the machine from a computer.

7Register the key and certicate or CA certicate.

Registering a key and certicate

1Click [Register] on the right of the key and certicate le you want to register.

2Enter the name of the key and password.

[Key Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of the key to be registered.

[Password]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the password of the private key set for the le to be registered.

3Click [OK].

Registering a CA certicate

Click [Register] on the right of the CA certicate le you want to register.

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308)

Generating the Key and Certicate for Network Communication(P. 310)

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 318)

Managing the Machine

317

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings

2KUU-06H

The machine can connect to an 802.1X network as a client device. A typical 802.1X network consists of a RADIUS server

(authentication server), LAN switch (authenticator), and client devices with authentication software (supplicants). If a

device tries to connect to the 802.1X network, the device must go through user authentication in order to prove that

the connection is made by an authorized user. Authentication information is sent to and checked by a RADIUS server,

which permits or rejects communication to the network depending on the authentication result. If authentication fails,

a LAN switch (or an access point) blocks access from the outside of the network.

IEEE 802.1X Authentication Method

Select the authentication method from the options below. If necessary, install or register a key and certicate or

a CA certicate before conguring IEEE 802.1X authentication ( Registering the Key and Certicate for

Network Communication(P. 316) ).

TLS

The machine and the authentication server authenticate each other by mutually verifying their certicates. A

key and certicate issued by a certication authority (CA) is required for the client authentication (when

authenticating the machine). For the server authentication, a CA certicate installed via the Remote UI can be

used in addition to a CA certicate preinstalled in the machine.

TTLS

This authentication method uses a user name and password for the client authentication and a CA certicate

for the server authentication. MSCHAPv2 or PAP can be selected as the internal protocol. TTLS can be used

with PEAP at the same time. Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method (

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308) ).

PEAP

The required settings are almost the same as those of TTLS. MSCHAPv2 is used as the internal protocol.

Enable TLS for the Remote UI before conguring this authentication method ( Conguring the Key and

Certicate for TLS(P. 308) ).

●For more information about the basic operations to be performed when setting the machine from the

Remote UI, see Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344) .

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

Managing the Machine

318

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Select [Network Settings] [IEEE 802.1X Settings].

4Click [Edit].

5Select the [Use IEEE 802.1X] check box, and enter the login name in the [Login Name]

text box.

[Use IEEE 802.1X]

Select the check box to enable IEEE 802.1X authentication.

[Login Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for a name (EAP identity) that is used for identifying the user.

6Congure the required settings according to the specied authentication method.

Setting TLS

1Select the [Use TLS] check box and click [Key and Certicate].

●You cannot use TLS with TTLS or PEAP.

2Click [Register Default Key] on the right of the key and certicate you want to use for the client

authentication.

Managing the Machine

319

Viewing details of a certicate

●You can check the details of the certicate or verify the certicate by clicking the corresponding text

link under [Key Name], or the certicate icon.

Setting TTLS/PEAP

1Select the [Use TTLS] or [Use PEAP] check box.

Internal protocol for TTLS

●You can select MSCHAPv2 or PAP.

2Click [Change User Name/Password].

●To specify a user name other than the login name, clear the [Use Login Name as User Name] check

box. Select the check box if you want to use the login name as the user name.

3Set the user name/password.

[User Name]

Enter alphanumeric characters for the user name.

[Change Password]

To set or change the password, select the check box and enter alphanumeric characters for the new

password both in the [Password] and [Conrm] text boxes.

4Click [OK].

7Click [OK].

8Restart the machine.

●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

Managing the Machine

320

Using the operation panel

●You can also enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication from the <Menu> screen. <IEEE 802.1X

Settings>(P. 372)

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308)

Managing the Machine

321

Restricting the Machine's Functions

2KUU-06J

Some of the functions of the machine may rarely be used or provide opportunities for misuse. For security purposes,

the machine can be set to limit its capabilities by partially or completely disabling these functions.

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions

You can specify the PIN in the Address Book to disable a general user from modifying data or limit destinations

that can be specied for fax sending. You can also disable a user from collectively sending a fax to multiple

destinations (Sequential Broadcast). Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending Functions(P. 324)

Restricting USB Functions

The USB connection allows an easy connection with peripheral devices, but it may cause a security risk such as

an information leakage. You can restrict a USB connection with a computer. Restricting USB

Functions(P. 331)

Disabling HTTP Communication

When not performing operations via the network, for example, when using the machine via USB connection,

you can disable HTTP communication to prevent a hacking via the HTTP port. Disabling HTTP

Communication(P. 332)

Disabling Remote Management

When not using Remote UI, you can disable functions to prevent an unauthorized remote operation via Remote

UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 333)

Managing the Machine

322

Managing the Machine

323

Restricting Access to Address Book and Sending

Functions

2KUU-06K

Some cases of information leakage can be prevented by limiting the available fax and e-mail destinations to those

registered in the Address Book, or by setting a PIN for the Address Book so that unauthorized users cannot add or edit

Address Book entries. You can also avoid sending documents to unintended recipients if the machine is set to ask you

to enter the fax number twice for conrmation.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

Limiting Available Destinations(P. 327)

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions(P. 329)

Managing the Machine

324

Restricting Use of the Address Book

2KUU-06L

The Address Book can be set to require users to enter a PIN in order to add new

entries to the Address Book or edit existing entries. Setting a PIN to the Address

Book can reduce the risk of documents being sent to unintended recipients because

changes to the Address Book can only be made by users who know the PIN.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <System Management Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Restrict TX Function> <Address Book PIN>.

4Specify the PIN.

●Enter the number, and select <Apply>.

●The Conrm screen is displayed. Enter the PIN once again to conrm.

●You cannot set a PIN that consists only of zeros, such as "00" or "0000000".

●To cancel the PIN setting, clear the information you entered by pressing and select <Apply> with the

eld blank.

In addition to setting the Address Book PIN, you can further enhance security by performing the following

operations:

●Restricting the addition of new destinations, see Restricting New Destinations that Can Be

Specied(P. 327) .

●Disabling the PC fax function, see Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 329) .

LINKS

Registering Destinations(P. 161)

Managing the Machine

325

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 79)

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 86)

Managing the Machine

326

Limiting Available Destinations

2KUU-0AA

By limiting destinations that can be specied to those registered in the Address

Book, you can reduce the possibility of specifying unintended destinations and

prevent users from leaking information. You can congure the setting to display the

conrmation screen to prevent the user from misdialing when specifying a coded

dial number in the Address Book.

Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P. 327)

Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations(P. 327)

Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 327)

Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied

Restrict destinations that can be specied when sending faxes or scanned documents to "those already registered in

the Address Book," "those registered as One-Touch Dial," or "those previously used." When this function is enabled,

the machine prohibits users from entering destinations using the numeric keys, adding new entries to the Address

Book, and editing the existing Address Book entries.

<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Restrict TX Function> <Restrict New

Destinations> <On>

●This function does not limit the available destinations for PC faxing. Restricting Fax Sending from a

Computer(P. 329)

Disabling Use of Previously Used Destinations

Prohibits the specication of destinations from the transmission records. Using this restriction prevents destinations

being selected from the transmission records for "Send Fax," "Scan and Send as E-mail" and "Scan and Save to Shared

Folder."

<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Restrict TX Function> <Restrict Resending from

Log> <On>

Displaying Destinations in Address Book

When using One-Touch buttons or coded dial numbers to specify destinations, you need to precisely remember whose

destination (or what group) is registered in what coded dial number. If you do not remember all these numbers

accurately, you may send your documents to unintended destinations. You can avoid sending data to unintended

recipients by conguring the machine to display the details of the One-Touch buttons or coded dial number you

selected/entered as a sending destination on the screen before you send documents to that destination.

Managing the Machine

327

<Menu> <System Management Settings> <Restrict TX Function> <One-Touch/Coded Dial TX

Conrmation> <On>

LINKS

Sending Data by E-Mail/Saving Data to a Shared Folder(P. 239)

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending/Saving (Recall Settings)(P. 257)

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions(P. 329)

Managing the Machine

328

Restricting the Fax Sending Functions

2KUU-0AC

You can set various restrictions for sending faxes, which can prevent information leakage to third parties or sending

documents to unintended destinations.

Conrming the Entered Fax Number(P. 329)

Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 329)

Restricting Sequential Broadcasts(P. 329)

Conrming the Entered Fax Number

You can congure the setting to display the conrmation screen to prevent the user from misdialing when entering a

destination fax number using the numeric keys.

<On>

Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer

You can prohibit users from PC faxing (faxing from a computer).

Restricting Sequential Broadcasts

You can prohibit a function that collectively sends a fax to multiple destinations (Sequential Broadcast).

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Restrict Sequential Broadcast> <Reject

Sequential Broadcast>

Managing the Machine

329

<Off>

Enables sequential broadcasting.

<Conrm Sequential Broadcast>

Displays the conrmation screen when sending a fax via sequential broadcasting.

Disables sequential broadcasting.

LINKS

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

Recalling Previously Used Settings for Sending (Recall Settings)(P. 208)

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 219)

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

Limiting Available Destinations(P. 327)

Managing the Machine

330

Restricting USB Functions

2KUU-06Y

USB is a convenient way of connecting peripheral devices and storing or relocating data, but USB can also be a source

of information leakage if it is not properly managed. This section describes how to restrict connection via the USB port

of the machine.

Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer(P. 331)

Restricting the USB Connection with a Computer

You can disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. If this port is disabled, the

machine cannot communicate with a computer via USB.

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Use as USB Device> <Off> Restart the

machine

Managing the Machine

331

Disabling HTTP Communication

2KUU-070

HTTP is used for communications over the network, such as when you access the machine via the Remote UI. If you

are using a USB connection or are otherwise not using HTTP, you can disable HTTP to block malicious third-party

intrusions via the unused HTTP port.

●Disabling HTTP disables some of the network capabilities, such as the Remote UI, WSD printing, and printing

with Google Cloud Print.

LINKS

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

Changing Port Numbers(P. 305)

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 334)

Managing the Machine

332

Disabling Remote UI

2KUU-071

The Remote UI is useful because the machine settings can be specied by using a Web browser on a computer. To use

the Remote UI, the machine must be connected to a computer over the network. If the machine is connected to a

computer via USB, or if you do not need to use the Remote UI, you might want to disable the Remote UI to reduce the

risk of having your machine controlled remotely over the network by malicious third parties.

<Off>

LINKS

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 332)

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)(P. 334)

Managing the Machine

333

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

2KUU-072

Using a Web browser to operate the machine remotely, you can check the documents waiting to be printed or the

status of the machine. You can also make various settings. You can do this without leaving your desk, making system

management easier. For more information about the system requirements for the Remote UI, see System

Environment(P. 546) .

Functions of the Remote UI

Checking the Status and Logs(P. 338)

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 351)

Basics of the Remote UI

Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

Managing the Machine

334

Starting Remote UI

2KUU-073

To operate remotely, you need to input the IP address of the machine into a Web browser and start the Remote UI.

Check the IP address set to the machine in advance ( Viewing Network Settings(P. 38) ). If you have any questions,

ask your Network Administrator.

1Start the Web browser.

2Enter "http://<the IP address of the machine>/" in the address eld, and press the

[ENTER] key.

●If you want to use an IPv6 address, enclose the IPv6 address with brackets (example: http://

[fe80::2e9e:fcff:fe4e:dbce]/).

If a security alert is displayed

●A security alert may be displayed when the Remote UI communication is encrypted ( Conguring the

Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308) ). When certicate settings or TLS settings have no errors, continue

browsing the Web site.

3Log in to the Remote UI.

When a System Manager PIN is not set

Select [System Manager Mode] or [General User Mode].

[System Manager Mode]

You can perform all the Remote UI operations and settings.

[General User Mode]

You can check the status of documents or the machine, and you can also change some of the settings. When

you want to check if a specic document of yours is in the print queue or cancel the printing of a document

of yours in the print queue, enter the user name of the document in [User Name]. The user name is

automatically set to print documents based on information such as your computer name or computer login

name.

[Remote UI Access PIN]

If [Remote UI Access PIN] is set, enter the PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 295)

Managing the Machine

335

When a System Manager PIN is set

Enter the appropriate PIN in [System Manager PIN] to log in to System Manager Mode. Setting the

System Manager PIN(P. 293)

4Click [Log In].

➠The Portal page (main page) will be displayed. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

Remote UI Screen

When you log in to the Remote UI, the following Portal page appears. This section describes the items displayed on

the Portal page and the basic operations.

[Device Basic Information]

Displays the current status of the machine and error information. If an error has occurred, the link to the

Error Information page will be displayed.

[Consumables Information]

Displays information about consumables.

Managing the Machine

336

[Support Link]

Displays the support link specied in [Device Information] under [System Management].

Refresh Icon

Refreshes the currently displayed page.

[Log Out]

Logs off from the Remote UI. The Login page will be displayed.

[Mail to System Manager]

Displays a window for creating an e-mail to the system manager specied in [System Manager Information]

under [System Management].

[Status Monitor/Cancel]

Displays the [Status Monitor/Cancel] page. For any of the waiting documents, you can check the status/

history or cancel the processing.

[Settings/Registration]

Displays [Settings/Registration] page. When you have logged in to System Manager Mode, you can change

the settings items and save/load the registered data. Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI(P. 344)

[Address Book]

Displays the coded dial numbers and the One-Touch Dial list registered in the Address Book. You can also

Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

Managing the Machine

337

Checking the Status and Logs

2KUU-074

Checking Current Status of Print Documents(P. 338)

Checking the Status of Received Faxes(P. 339)

Checking History of Documents(P. 339)

Checking Error Information(P. 339)

Checking Consumables(P. 340)

Checking Maximum Print Speed(P. 340)

Checking System Manager Information(P. 341)

Checking Print Total Counter(P. 341)

Checking History of Cartridge(P. 342)

Checking Eco Information(P. 342)

●A le name of a document may not be displayed in full. The printed application name may be added to the

le name.

Checking Current Status of Print Documents

The list of the documents currently printing or waiting to be printed is displayed.

●You can delete a document job by clicking [Cancel].

●If you logged in to System Manager Mode, all the print documents currently printing and waiting to

be printed will be listed.

●If you entered your user name when you logged in to General User Mode, your user name will only be

displayed on the documents that you printed.

●Click [Job Number] on the paused documents to display detailed information. You can check the user

name and the page count of the printed document.

Managing the Machine

338

Checking the Status of Received Faxes

You can check the logs of received fax documents. You can also click [Delete] for a received fax document to delete it.

under [RX]

●To perform the following operations, you need to log in rst in System Manager Mode, click [Enable],

and set [Use Memory Lock] to [On].

- Click [Job Number] to display detailed information and preview of a document waiting to be printed.

Checking History of Documents

The history of print, sending faxes/e-mails (TX), or receiving faxes (RX) is displayed.

Checking Error Information

When an error occurs, this page will be displayed by clicking the message displayed under [Error Information] on the

Portal page (main page). Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

Managing the Machine

339

Information]

Checking Consumables

Paper size and paper type for the paper source, toner cartridge model number, etc. are displayed. You can also click

[Check Consumables Details] in the Portal page (main page) to display this page ( Remote UI Screen(P. 336) ).

[Consumables]

Checking Maximum Print Speed

The maximum print speed is displayed.

Features]

Managing the Machine

340

Checking System Manager Information

Information about the machine and the system manager is displayed. This information is set in [System Management]

on the [Settings/Registration] page.

Information]

Checking Print Total Counter

The total number of pages that have been printed by the copy, print, and fax functions is displayed.

Counter]

Managing the Machine

341

Checking History of Cartridge

You can check the usage logs of the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge. The display can be changed to either the

toner cartridge or the drum cartridge.

Log]

Checking Eco Information

You can check information such as the number of printouts per month and amount of consumed power.

Information]

Managing the Machine

342

LINKS

Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

Managing the Machine

343

Setting Up Menu Options from Remote UI

2KUU-075

You can change the various machine settings by using the Remote UI. Most of the settings can be set also on the

machine, but some settings can only be set using the Remote UI. This section describes the basic ow of changing the

settings of the machine using the Remote UI.

●Some settings can only be changed when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

●Some settings may require operations that differ from the procedure described here.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Click the setting you want to congure in the menu on the left side of the screen.

4Click the link to display the desired page as necessary.

Managing the Machine

344

5Click [Edit].

6Specify the required settings.

7Click [OK].

Managing the Machine

345

8Restart the machine as necessary.

●Turn OFF the machine, wait for at least 10 seconds, and turn it back ON.

●For information about whether you need to restart the machine, view the message on the edit screen.

Managing the Machine

346

Registering Destinations from Remote UI

2KUU-076

You can use the computer to register destinations in the Address Book of the machine and edit information of

registered destinations. Specify the shared folder destination here.

You can change the settings only when you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

1Start the Remote UI. Starting Remote UI(P. 335)

2Click [Address Book] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

If the enter PIN page is displayed

The Address Book is protected by a PIN. Enter the [PIN] and click [OK].

3Click [Coded Dial].

●You can also register destinations in One-Touch. In this case, click [One-Touch] instead of [Coded Dial].

One-Touch Dial(P. 161)

4Click the text link under [Number], [Type], or [Name] for an item named "Not

Registered."

●You can edit a registered item by clicking the corresponding text link under [Number], [Type] or [Name].

●You can delete a registered item by clicking the corresponding [Delete] button.

5Select [Destination Type to Register] and click [OK].

●To register the shared folder destination, select [File].

Managing the Machine

347

6Specify the destination.

To register the fax destination

[Name]

Enter the name of the destination.

[Fax Number]

Enter the fax number of the destination.

[ECM TX]

Select the check box to make the following possible: if an error occurs in an image that is being sent, the

error is checked and corrected to prevent an improper image from being sent.

[Speed]

If it takes time for transmissions to start, such as when there is a poor telephone connection, you can adjust

the transmission start speed downward.

[Long Distance]

Specify [International (1)] to [International (3)] according to the transmission conditions when registering

overseas fax numbers.

●You can also specify [ECM TX] and [Speed] from <Fax Settings> ( <Fax Settings>(P. 389) ) on the

operation panel. However, settings made from <Addr. Book> are enabled for the detailed settings of

destinations registered in the Address Book.

To register the e-mail destination

Managing the Machine

348

[Name]

Enter the name of the destination.

[E-Mail Address]

Enter the e-mail address of the destination.

To register the shared folder destination

[Name]

Enter the name for the destination.

[Host Name]

Enter the computer name or IP address. You can include a path to the shared folder with the computer name

or IP address (e.g. "\\swan\share" or "\\192.168.2.100\share").

Using a DNS server

●You can also enter the host name (or FQDN) instead of the computer name or IP address (e.g. for a shared

folder: "\\swan.organization.company.com\share").

[Folder Path]

Enter the location of the folder to which the data will be sent.

Use "\" as a separator. Specify the level that follows the path specied in [Host Name].

[User Name]

Enter the user name set for the shared folder.

[Set Password]

To set a password for the shared folder, select the check box and enter a [Password].

Ensure that the same display language is selected on both the computer and the

Remote UI.

●[Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly or may not be referenceable.

7Click [OK].

LINKS

Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

Managing the Machine

349

Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI(P. 351)

Address Book List (Touch Panel Model)(P. 457)

Managing the Machine

350

Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote UI

2KUU-077

Address Book data in the machine can be saved on your computer (export). Data that is saved on your computer

can also be registered in the machine (import). You can easily copy the destinations in the Address Book to

multiple machines.* To use these features, it is required that you have logged in to System Manager Mode.

* Depending on the model, you cannot import the Address Book data that exported from the machine.

Exporting Address Book Data(P. 351)

Loading Address Book Data(P. 352)

Do not turn OFF the machine until the import or export process is complete

It may take a few minutes to complete the process. If the machine is turned OFF during the process, it may

result in damage to data or the machine.

Do not operate the machine during the import or export process

Before importing or exporting, check that no operation such as printing documents is currently proceeding.

Exporting Address Book Data

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Click [Import/Export] [Export].

●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the [PIN] and click [OK].

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

4Click [Start Exporting].

5Follow the on-screen instructions to specify the location where the exported Address

Book is saved.

➠The Address Book will be saved.

Do not operate until the process is complete.

The screen remains the same during the export process. Do not operate the Remote UI until the message [The

(le name) download has completed.] is displayed at the bottom of the screen.

Managing the Machine

351

Loading Address Book Data

The Address Book data currently registered is overwritten when you load the Address Book data.

1Start the Remote UI and log in to System Manager Mode. Starting Remote

UI(P. 335)

2Click [Settings/Registration] on the Portal page. Remote UI Screen(P. 336)

3Click [Import/Export] [Import].

●If the screen prompting you to enter the Address Book PIN is displayed, enter the [PIN] and click [OK].

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

4Specify the Address Book le to be imported, and click [Start Importing].

●To specify the le to be imported, click [Browse] and select the le.

5Click [OK].

➠The specied Address Book data will be imported into the machine.

Managing the Machine

352

Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the

Supplied Software

2KUU-0AH

You can export Address Book data saved on the machine to a computer using the Address Book Import/Export Tool

contained on the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM. The data can be re-imported, providing a secure backup in case

Address Book data becomes erased due to repairs or maintenance.

●Use the Address Book Import/Export Tool with the machine and computer connected via a USB cable.

1Select <Menu> in the Home screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

2Select <System Management Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Import/Export Address Book>.

4Place the provided CD-ROM/DVD-ROM in the PC.

●When the screen appears, click [Exit].

5[Start] [Computer] Right-click the CD-ROM/DVD-ROM icon, and click [Open] in the

pop-up menu.

6Open the [AddressBookTool] folder, and double-click [AddressBookTool.exe].

7Follow the on-screen instructions.

●To import Address Book data, click the [Import] tab.

●To export Address Book data, click the [Export] tab.

Managing the Machine

353

Managing the Machine

354

Updating the Firmware

2KUU-078

For the rmware, select the method of update depending on the installation condition of the machine. There are two

methods of update: the one is to access the latest rmware version on the Internet from the machine and perform the

update if the version currently installed in the machine is not the latest, and the other is to access the latest rmware

version on the Internet from a computer and perform the update from the computer if the version currently installed

in the machine is not the latest. In an environment where connection to the Internet cannot be established via a

wireless LAN, establish connection via a wired LAN or USB and perform the update from the computer.

Installation Condition of the Machine How to Install the Update

Wireless LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 355)

Wired LAN connection Updating via the Internet(P. 355)

Updating from a Computer(P. 356)

USB connection Updating from a Computer(P. 356)

●If you are in an IPv6 environment, you cannot perform rmware update. Use USB to re-establish connection,

and perform the update from the computer.

Checking the rmware version

●You can check the rmware version from the operation panel of the machine. After completion of the

rmware update operation, make sure that the update was performed correctly. Checking the Firmware

Version(P. 356)

Updating via the Internet

You can access the Canon server from the machine to update the rmware to the latest version.

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <System Management Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

3Select <Update Firmware>.

Managing the Machine

355

4Select <Via Internet>.

➠A check for existence of the latest rmware is performed.

●If the <This is the latest rmware version.> message is displayed, there is no need to update the rmware.

5Check the message and select <Yes>.

6When a license screen appears, press <Accept> ( ).

7Select <OK>.

➠When the rmware update is complete, the machine restarts automatically.

●Do not turn OFF the machine while the restart is in progress.

Updating from a Computer

When you have downloaded the latest rmware version from the Canon website, use "User Support Tool" utility

software to update the rmware from a computer. For how to perform rmware update from a computer, see the

"User Support Tool Operation Guide" included with the rmware.

To Put the Machine into a Firmware Update Waiting State

Checking the Firmware Version

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <System Management Settings>.

●If the screen for entering a PIN appears, enter the correct PIN. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

Managing the Machine

356

3Select <Update Firmware>.

4Select <Version Information>.

➠The current rmware version is displayed.

Managing the Machine

357

Initializing Settings

2KUU-079

You can restore the following settings:

Initializing Eco Report Counter(P. 358)

Initializing Menu(P. 358)

Initializing Key and Certicate(P. 358)

Initializing Address Book(P. 359)

Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 359)

Initializing Eco Report Counter

You can restore the Eco Report Counter settings to the factory defaults.

Initializing Menu

You can restore the settings of the machine ( Setting Menu List(P. 361) ). Depending on the settings selected, you

may need to restart the machine after initialization.

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Initialize Menu> Select the item you want to

initialize <Yes> Restart the machine if necessary

●You can restore the settings only for <Network Settings>.

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <Initialize Network Settings> <Yes> Restart the machine

Initializing Key and Certicate

You can restore the settings of the key and certicate and the CA certicate. Note that all the keys and certicates and

CA certicates that you registered in the machine (except the preinstalled keys and CA certicates) will be deleted after

initializing.

Managing the Machine

358

●After initializing, functions that require a key and certicate such as TLS encrypted communication are not

available. To use these functions, congure the settings for the key and certicate and activate the functions

again.

Registration] [Initialize Setting Information] [Initialize Key and Certicate] [Initialize] [OK]

Initializing Address Book

You can restore the settings of the Address Book. Note that all the information registered in the Address Book will be

deleted after initializing.

Initializing All Data/Settings

This enables restoration of all data and machine settings, including logs, to the factory default values. This prevents

sensitive data from being leaked when replacing or disposing of the machine. When the initialization process nishes,

the machine automatically restarts.

●Before initializing, make sure that there are no documents being processed or waiting to be processed.

These documents will be deleted when initialization is performed.

●To use the machine after initializing it, you need to congure all settings from the beginning.

LINKS

Conguring the Key and Certicate for TLS(P. 308)

Registering Destinations(P. 161)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

Managing the Machine

359

Setting Menu List

Setting Menu List ........................................................................................................................................... 361

<Direct Connection> .......................................................................................................................................... 362

<Network Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 363

<Output Rprt.>/<Output Reports> ................................................................................................................... 374

<Preferences> .................................................................................................................................................... 375

<Timer Settings> ............................................................................................................................................... 381

<Common Settings> .......................................................................................................................................... 385

<Copy Settings> ................................................................................................................................................. 387

<Fax Settings> ................................................................................................................................................... 389

<Scan Settings> ................................................................................................................................................. 400

<Printer Settings> ............................................................................................................................................. 405

<Adjustment/Maintenance> ............................................................................................................................. 415

<System Management Settings> ...................................................................................................................... 421

Setting Menu List

360

Setting Menu List

2KUU-07A

You can customize the machine based on your environment and needs by conguring settings described in this

chapter. To start conguration, display the <Menu> screen. This section describes what each item in the setting menu

can congure.

●Refer to the PDF le included in the User's Guide that summarizes the setting menu. Menu Route

Map(P. 564)

●You can print the setting menu in list form to check the current settings: Printing Lists of

Settings(P. 457)

Setting Menu List

361

2KUU-07C

On the 5 Lines LCD Model, make a direct connection between a mobile device and the machine. Connecting

Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

Settings for Direct Connection can be specied from <Direct Connection Settings>(P. 364) .

Setting Menu List

362

2KUU-07E

All the settings related to the network are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Select Wired/Wireless LAN>(P. 363)

<Wireless LAN Settings>(P. 363)

<Direct Connection Settings>(P. 364)

<Easy Connection via PC>(P. 366)

<TCP/IP Settings>(P. 366)

<SNMP Settings>(P. 370)

<Dedicated Port Settings>(P. 372)

<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup>(P. 372)

<Ethernet Driver Settings>(P. 372)

<IEEE 802.1X Settings>(P. 372)

<Initialize Network Settings>(P. 373)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using or other

setting items.

When switching the machine from Wireless LAN to Wired LAN, you need to specify the setting. Conversely, when

switching the machine from Wired LAN to Wireless LAN, you do not need to specify this setting (You can switch using

the following <Wireless LAN Settings>). Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 16)

Specify settings for connecting the machine to a wireless LAN. You can also view the current settings or specify the

setting for saving power consumption.

Select to congure a wireless connection by specifying information including an SSID or a network key by

inputting manually from the operation panel.

Wireless LAN routers that can access the machine are automatically located, so you can select from the list.

You must manually enter a network key, such as a WEP key or a PSK. Setting Up Connection by Selecting

a Wireless Router(P. 24)

Select to congure a wireless connection by manually entering an SSID. By using this method, you can specify

authentication and encryption settings in detail. Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed

Settings(P. 27)

Setting Menu List

363

<None>

<WEP>

WEP Key 1 to 4

WEP Key 1 to 4

<Auto>

<AES-CCMP>

Select to automatically congure a wireless connection by using the button on a WPS wireless router. Setting

Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 20)

Select to congure a wireless connection by entering a PIN code for a WPS wireless router. Setting Up

Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 22)

Select whether or not the machine enters Power Save Mode based on signals emitted from the wireless router.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <Wireless LAN Settings> Read the displayed message

<OK> <Power Save Mode> Select <Off> or <On>

Select to view the current wireless LAN settings. Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

Congure settings for Direct Connection. After conguring settings, you can connect to the machine directly and

wirelessly from a mobile device even without an access point or wireless LAN router.

Select whether to use Direct Connection. Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

364

Specify the time to automatically disconnect after Direct Connection is established.

0 (Do not terminate session automatically)

1 to 10 to 60 (min.)

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Time Until Direct

Connection Termination> Enter the time <Apply> ( )

Congure the SSID/network key arbitrarily. If you want to connect multiple mobile devices to the machine at the

same time, you need to congure both SSID and network key arbitrarily.

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <Access Point Mode

Settings> <Use Custom SSID> or <Use Custom Network Key> <On> Enter the SSID/network

key <Apply>

Specify an IP address for using Direct Connection.

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <Direct Connection Settings> <IP Address Settings for

Direct Conn.> Enter the IP address <Apply> ( )

●Do not use the same number as the IP addresses for direct connection and for the machine's wired LAN/

wireless LAN connection. If you set the same number, then a direct connection cannot be initiated.

Setting Menu List

365

Start Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode). This allows you to use Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility on

your PC to congure network settings.

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <Easy Connection via PC> Start connecting

●"Canon Laser NW Device Setup Utility" is available on the Canon website (https://global.canon).

Specify settings for using the machine in a TCP/IP network, such as IP address settings.

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv4 network.

Congure the IP address, which is used for identifying devices, such as computers and printers, on a TCP/IP

network. Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)

<Off>

<DHCP>

<BOOTP>

<RARP>

<Off>

<On>

<IP Address>: 0.0.0.0

<Subnet Mask>: 0.0.0.0

<Gateway Address>: 0.0.0.0

<Auto Acquire>*

Select to check that the machine is connected to a computer over a network. Testing the Network

Connection(P. 33)

Setting Menu List

366

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.

Conguring DNS(P. 57)

<Primary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0

<Secondary DNS Server>: 0.0.0.0

<Off>

<On>

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.

<Off>

<On>

If DHCP is enabled, use these settings to select whether to use the DHCP optional functions to acquire the

host name and to use the dynamic update function. Conguring DNS(P. 57)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Acquire SMTP Server Address> *

<Off>

<On>

<Acquire POP Server Address> *

<Off>

<On>

Specify settings for using the machine in an IPv6 network. Setting IPv6 Addresses(P. 35)

Enable or disable IPv6 in the machine. You can also view the current settings.

Setting Menu List

367

<Off>

<On>

<Link-Local Address>

<Prex Length>

Enable or disable stateless addresses.

<Off>

<On>

<Prex Length>

Enable or disable the stateful address that is acquired via DHCPv6.

<Off>

<On>

<Prex Length>

Specify settings for Domain Name System (DNS), which provides a host name for IP address resolutions.

Conguring DNS(P. 57)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

Setting Menu List

368

<On>

0 to 24 to 48 (hr.)

Specify settings for using DNS functions without DNS servers.

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

Enable or disable LPD, a printing protocol that can be used on any hardware platform or operating system.

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

<Off>

<On>

Enable or disable RAW, a Windows specic printing protocol. Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD

Functions(P. 42)

<Off>

<On>

Enable or disable automatic browsing and acquiring information for the printer by using the WSD protocol.

Conguring Printing Protocols and WSD Functions(P. 42)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

Setting Menu List

369

<On>

Enable or disable HTTP, which is required for communications with a computer, such as when using the Remote

UI, WSD printing, or printing with Google Cloud Print. Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 332)

<Off>

<On>

Change port numbers for protocols according to the network environment. Changing Port Numbers(P. 305)

<LPD>

1 to 515 to 65535

<RAW>

1 to 9100 to 65535

1 to 3702 to 65535

<HTTP>

1 to 80 to 65535

<POP3> *

1 to 110 to 65535

<SMTP> *

1 to 25 to 65535

<SNMP>

1 to 161 to 65535

Select the maximum size of packets the machine receives. Changing the Maximum Transmission

Unit(P. 55)

<1300>

<1400>

<1500>

Specify the settings for monitoring and controlling the machine from a computer running SNMP-compatible software.

Monitoring and Controlling the Machine with SNMP(P. 63)

Enable or disable SNMPv1. When enabling SNMPv1, specify a community name and access privileges to

Management Information Base (MIB) objects.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

370

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv1 Settings> <SNMPv1

Settings> Select <Off> or <On> Specify settings if <On> is selected

Enable or disable SNMPv3. Use the Remote UI to specify detailed settings that are applied when SNMPv3 is

enabled.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <SNMPv3 Settings> Select <Off> or

<On>

Enable or disable the monitoring of printer management information from a networked computer running

SNMP-compatible software.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <SNMP Settings> <Acquire Printer Mngt. Info. from

Host> Select <Off> or <On>

Setting Menu List

371

Enable or disable the dedicated port. The dedicated port is used when printing from the computer and when browsing

or specifying the machine settings over the network.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Network Settings> <Dedicated Port Settings> Select <Off> or <On>

Specify a wait time for connecting to a network. Select the setting depending on the network environment. Setting a

Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

0 to 300 (sec.)

Select the communication mode of Ethernet (half-duplex/full-duplex) and the Ethernet type (10BASE-T/100BASE-TX).

You can also view the MAC address of the machine.

Select whether to automatically detect or manually select the communication mode and the Ethernet type.

Conguring Ethernet Settings(P. 53)

<Off>

<10BASE-T>

<100BASE-TX>

<On>

Check the MAC address of the machine, which is a number unique to each communication device. Viewing

the MAC Address for Wired LAN(P. 38)

Enable or disable IEEE 802.1X authentication. Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 318)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

372

Select to return the Network Settings to the factory defaults. <Initialize Menu>(P. 428)

Setting Menu List

373

2KUU-07F

You can print out and check the settings of machine setting options and other details as reports or lists. Printing

Reports and Lists(P. 455)

Setting Menu List

374

2KUU-07H

All the settings related to viewing of the display are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger

().

<Volume Settings>(P. 375)

<Display Settings>(P. 377)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, or other setting

items.

●Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

<Volume Settings> *1

Adjust volume at which the machine beeps when a key is pressed on the operation panel or when a paper jam occurs.

Setting Sounds(P. 155)

Select whether to make a dial tone while a fax is being sent. You can also adjust the volume.

5 levels

Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is received. You can also adjust the volume.

6 levels

Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is sent. You can also adjust the volume.

6 levels

<Off>

<On>

Select whether the machine beeps when a fax is received. You can also adjust the volume.

6 levels

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

375

Select whether the machine beeps when scanning fax documents is complete. You can also adjust the volume.

6 levels

<Off>

<On>

Select whether the machine beeps when a key is pressed on the operation panel.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether the machine beeps when an invalid settings value is entered, such as when a user is trying to

enter a number unavailable for a setting.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether the machine beeps when problem such as a paper jam or an operation mistake occurs.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether the machine beeps when copying or scanning is complete.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether the machine beeps when the machine enters or wakes from sleep mode.

<Off>

<On>

Select whether the machine beeps when an original is loaded in the feeder.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

376

<Default Screen after Startup/Restoration> *1

By default, the Home screen is displayed immediately after the machine is turned ON or when the Auto Reset

function is performed. Specify the setting to change the default screen and display the main screen of a

different function.

<Home>

<Copy>

<Fax>

<Scan>

Select a function to display the desired screen

<Home Screen Button Display Settings> *1

Change the order in which Home Screen buttons are displayed. Customizing the Home Screen(P. 152)

Adjust the contrast (the difference between the light and dark parts) of the display to suit the installation

location of the machine.

5 Levels

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Contrast> Adjust the contrast <Apply>

( )

Select <On> to invert the display colors. Select <On> if the display is hard to view even after the brightness was

adjusted in <Contrast>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Invert Screen Colors> Select <Off> or

<On>

Setting Menu List

377

<Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> *2

Select the unit of measurement.

<Inch>

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Millimeter/Inch Entry Switch> Select

<Gram/Pound Switch> *2

Select the unit of measurement for the basis weight. This setting is available when <Select Country/Region> is

set to <United States (US)>.

<Gram>

<Pound>

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Gram/Pound Switch> Select <Gram> or

<Pound>

Specify whether to display a message prompting you to check paper settings when loading paper into the

drawer or multi-purpose tray.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Notify to Check Paper Settings> Select

Specify whether to display a message when stains are detected in the original scanning area.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

378

Select <Off> or <On>

Specify the interval in seconds at which two different messages are alternately displayed.

1 to 2 to 5 (sec.)

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Message Display Time> Enter a

number for the interval <Apply> ( )

Adjust the scrolling speed of the screen by selecting from 3 levels.

<Slow>

<Fast>

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Scrolling Speed> Select the speed

Congure how the cursor moves after a character is entered on the screen. Select <Auto> to automatically move

the cursor to the right of the entered character. Select <Manual> to manually move the cursor to the right of the

entered character.

<Auto>

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Cursor Movement Type> Select <Auto>

or <Manual>

<Language> *2

Select the display language used for the display, reports, and lists.

Setting Menu List

379

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Language> Select a language

<Remote UI Language> *2

Select the display language used for the Remote UI screens.

<Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display Settings> <Remote UI Language> Select a

language

Setting Menu List

380

2KUU-07J

All the settings related to the timer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Quiet Mode Time>(P. 381)

<Date/Time Settings>(P. 381)

<Auto Sleep Time>(P. 383)

<Auto Reset Time>(P. 383)

<Function After Auto Reset>(P. 383)

<Auto Oine Time>(P. 384)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may have different defaults depending on your country or region.

You can reduce the operation sound of the machine when you want it to run more quietly (quiet mode). Set a time for

the machine to enter quiet mode automatically. You can also set the machine to always run in quiet mode. Entering

Quiet Mode(P. 157)

<Off>

<On>

Start time setting to enter quiet mode

<Off>

<On>

Stop time setting to exit quiet mode

Specify date and time settings, including the date format and the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.

<Date Format> *

Select the date format (order of year, month, and day).

<Menu> ( ) <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Date Format> Select the date

format

Setting Menu List

381

Select the 12- or 24-hour clock display setting.

<12 Hour (AM/PM)>

<24 Hour>

<Menu> ( ) <Timer Settings> <Date/Time Settings> <Time Format> Select the display

setting

Set the current date and time. Setting the Date/Time(P. 11)

●Set <Time Zone> before setting the current date and time. If the <Time Zone> setting is changed, the

current date and time are also changed accordingly.

●The current date and time cannot be changed for 1 hour after daylight saving time is in effect.

<Time Zone> *

Select the time zone. The default setting may vary depending on the setting selected at initial power-on. If the

time zone setting is changed, the values set in <Current Date/Time Settings> are also changed accordingly.

Setting the Date/Time(P. 11)

<(UTC-12:00) International Date Line West> to <(UTC+14:00) Kiritimati Island>

UTC

●Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) is the primary time standard by which the world regulates clocks

and time. The correct UTC time zone setting is required for Internet communications.

<Daylight Saving Time Settings> *

Enable or disable daylight saving time. If daylight saving time is enabled, specify the dates from which and to

which daylight saving time is in effect. Setting the Date/Time(P. 11)

<Off>

Setting Menu List

382

<On>

Start: Month, Week, Day

End: Month, Week, Day

If the machine has not been operated or has had no data to process for a specied period of time, the machine enters

sleep mode to save energy consumption (Auto Sleep). Specify the period of time after which auto sleep is performed.

Auto Sleep is not performed when the setting menu is displayed. We recommend using the factory default settings to

save the most power. Entering Sleep Mode(P. 159)

1 to 30 (min.)

If a key is not pressed for a specied period of time, the screen and the settings are initialized to display the

default screen (Auto Reset). Specify the interval at which the Auto Reset is performed. The Auto Reset is not

performed in the following cases:

●The setting menu is displayed.

●The machine is processing data, such as when printing documents.

●An error message is displayed and the Alarm indicator is blinking (However, Auto Reset is performed when the

error does not prevent the user from continuing to use a function.)

0 (Auto Reset is disabled.)

1 to 2 to 9 (min.)

<Menu> ( ) <Timer Settings> <Auto Reset Time> Specify the Auto Reset time <Apply>

( )

Select whether to return the display to the default screen after the Auto Reset is performed. On the touch panel

model, if <Default Function> is selected, the main screen of the function selected in <Default Screen after Startup/

Restoration> is displayed ( <Default Screen after Startup/Restoration>(P. 377) ). On the 5 Lines LCD model, if

<Default Function> is selected, the display returns to the main screen for copy mode. If <Selected Function> is

selected, the display returns to the main screen of the function that was selected.

<Menu> ( ) <Timer Settings> <Function After Auto Reset> Select <Default Function> or

Setting Menu List

383

If a key has not been pressed for a specied period of time after the screen below is displayed (the machine is set

online for scanning), the machine automatically becomes oine. Specify the time period at which the machine

becomes oine. You can also set the machine to remain online.

0 (Auto Oine is disabled.)

1 to 5 to 60 (min.)

<Menu> ( ) <Timer Settings> <Auto Oine Time> Set the time period <Apply> ( )

Setting Menu List

384

2KUU-07K

All the settings related to the paper feed method are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger ( ).

Specify this setting when you print a document on paper with logos. In general use, to print on paper with logos, you

need to change how the paper loaded in the paper source is facing depending on whether you are performing 1- or 2-

sided printing. However, if you change the setting to <Print Side Priority>, you can just load the paper with the logo

side facing down for 1-sided printing in the same way as for 2-sided printing. Loading Preprinted Paper(P. 143) .

<Multi-Purpose Tray>

<Menu> ( ) <Common Settings> <Switch Paper Feed Method> Select the paper source

Select <Speed Priority> or <Print Side Priority>

Paper Sources

Select the paper source that you want to change the setting for.

When using paper that has been preprinted with a logo, you need to change how it is facing when you

perform 1-sided and 2-sided printing.

We recommend selecting <Speed Priority> if you do not need to consider which side to print on.

To print on a specic side of paper, you do not need to ip over paper in the paper source whether 1- or 2-

sided printing is selected.

Setting Menu List

385

●If <Print Side Priority> is set for a paper source that is loaded with paper you cannot use for 2-sided

printing ( Available Paper(P. 538) ), <Speed Priority> is applied to the paper source instead. In this case,

you need to load the paper in the same way as when <Speed Priority> is selected ( Loading Preprinted

Paper(P. 143) ).

●1-sided printing speed may be slower when <Print Side Priority> is selected.

Setting Menu List

386

2KUU-07L

All the settings related to the copy are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Change Default Settings>(P. 387)

<Correct Density>(P. 388)

<Initialize Default Settings>(P. 388)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using.

You can change the default settings about copy. The selected settings are used as the default settings of the copy

function. Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 154)

1 to 999

9 Levels

<Text>

<Photo>

<2-Sided>

<Off>

<1->2-Sided>

<2->2-Sided>*

<2->1-Sided>*

<100% (Direct)>

<400% (Max)>

<200%>

<129% STMT->LTR>

<78% LGL->LTR>

<64% LTR->STMT>

<50%>

Setting Menu List

387

<25% (Min)>

<Off>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

<Off>

<2 on 1 (2-Sided)>

<4 on 1 (2-Sided)>

<2 on 1>

<4 on 1>

<Off>

<On>

7 Levels

Specify the initial copy density. You can also change the copy density temporarily. Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

9 Levels

<Menu> ( ) <Copy Settings> <Correct Density> Adjust the density <Apply> ( )

Select to restore the default copy settings.

Setting Menu List

388

2KUU-07R

All the settings about the fax are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Basic Settings>(P. 389)

<TX Function Settings>(P. 391)

<RX Function Settings>(P. 394)

<RX Print Settings>(P. 396)

<Forwarding Settings>(P. 398)

<Fax Setup Guide>(P. 399)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using.

●Settings marked with "*2" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

Specify the basic settings for using the machine as a fax device.

Select the telephone line type used for fax transmission. Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 74)

<Pulse>

<Tone>

When the fax receive mode is <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>, an external telephone may not ring or a call may not be

dialable. In this instance, specify <Adapter 1> or <Adapter 2>.

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Public Line Connection> Select connection type

<Off-Hook Alarm>

Select whether the machine makes an alert sound when the handset of a telephone connected to the machine

is not properly set on the cradle. You can also adjust the volume of the alert sound.

Setting Menu List

389

6 Levels

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Off-Hook Alarm> Select the volume of the alert

sound <Apply>

Adjust the communication start speed in descending order from "33600 bps." This adjustment should be made

when it takes a long time to start sending or receiving a fax due to a poor telephone line connection.

<33600 bps>

<14400 bps>

<9600 bps>

<7200 bps>

<4800 bps>

<2400 bps>

<33600 bps>

<14400 bps>

<9600 bps>

<7200 bps>

<4800 bps>

<2400 bps>

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Communication Management Settings> Select

<TX Start Speed> or <RX Start Speed> Select a communication start speed

Specify whether to reduce communication errors on a poor-quality line that experiences much packet loss.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <Basic Settings> <Auto Adjust VoIP Comm. Speed> Select <Off> or

<On>

Setting Menu List

390

●Setting <Auto Adjust VoIP Comm. Speed> to <On> causes the initial transmitting speed when sending

or receiving a fax to be slower.

Specify settings for sending faxes.

You can change the default settings used for sending faxes. The selected settings are used as the default

settings when scanning originals. Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 154)

<200 x 100 dpi (Normal)>

<200 x 200 dpi (Fine)>

<200 x 200 dpi (Photo)>

<200 x 400 dpi (Superne)>

9 Levels

<2-Sided Original> *1

<Off>

7 Levels

The registered name is sent as sender information to the destination. <TX Terminal ID>(P. 393)

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Register Unit Name> Enter the unit name

<Apply>

Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce

errors on received faxes, see <ECM RX>(P. 394) .

<Off>

<On>

●ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error checks are

performed on both the sending and receiving devices.

●Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.

Setting Menu List

391

●It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error checks

and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <ECM TX> Select <Off> or <On>

For example, when you make calls by dialing "0 - (pause) - (telephone number)", 0 is dialed rst and then a few

seconds later, the telephone number. When sending faxes overseas, you need to specify destinations by dialing

"(international access code) - (country code) - (area code) - (fax number)" but consecutive numbers that are

input without pauses may not be recognized correctly. In this case, try adding a pause after the international

access code or the fax number. If the code or the number is still not recognized correctly, change the duration

of the pause. For instructions on how to enter a pause, see step 4 on Basic Operations for Sending

Faxes(P. 195) .

1 to 2 to 15 (sec.)

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Set Pause Time> Specify the duration of

pause <Apply>

Specify settings for Auto Redial, a function that automatically redials the fax number after several minutes if the

rst attempt fails because the line is busy. You can specify how many times the machine redials and the interval

between redials.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 2 to 10 (times)

2 to 99 (min.)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Auto Redial> <On> Specify the settings

<Apply>

Setting Menu List

392

Species how many times the machine redials. Enter a number, and select <Apply>.

Species the interval between redials. Enter a number, and select <Apply>.

When set to <On>, species to redial when a transmission error occurs.

Specify settings for adding the sender information, including the fax number and the name of the machine, to

the fax header. The recipient can check who sent the fax by looking at the added information.

<Off>

<On>

<FAX>

<TEL>

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <TX Terminal ID> <On> Specify the

settings <Apply>

Species the position to print the terminal ID information in the sent fax. Select <Inside Image Area> to print

the information inside the image area, or <Outside Image Area> to print the information outside the image

area.

Adds the "FAX" or "TEL" mark in front of the fax number registered for the machine ( Registering the Fax

Number and Unit Name(P. 72) ). Select <TEL> to indicate that the notied number is a telephone number.

<Check Dial Tone Before Sending> *2

Select whether to check the dial tone before a fax number is dialed.

Setting Menu List

393

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <TX Function Settings> <Check Dial Tone Before Sending> Select

Enable or disable PC faxing (sending faxes from a computer). Restricting Fax Sending from a

Computer(P. 329)

<Off>

<On>

<Conrm Entered Fax Number>

Select whether to require users to enter the fax number twice when it is entered by using the numeric keys.

Conrming the Entered Fax Number(P. 329)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to prohibit sequential broadcasting, a feature that sends faxes to multiple destinations in

succession. Restricting Sequential Broadcasts(P. 329)

<Off>

<Conrm Sequential Broadcast>

Select this option to restore the default fax transmission settings.

Specify settings for receiving faxes.

Enable or disable error correction mode (ECM). ECM checks for fax data errors and corrects them. To reduce

errors on sent faxes, see <ECM TX>(P. 391) .

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

394

●ECM must be enabled on both the machine and the other fax device because error check is

performed on both the sending and receiving devices.

●Even when ECM is enabled, errors may occur due to telephone line conditions.

●It may take a longer time than usual to process data when ECM is enabled because the error check

and corrections are performed while the data is transmitted.

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <ECM RX> Select <Off> or <On>

Specify settings for sounding a ring to notify you of incoming faxes. This feature is only available when <Auto>

or <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)> is selected for the receive mode. Specify how many times the incoming call rings

when the machine receives a fax call. You can also disable the settings to prevent the incoming call from

ringing.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 2 to 99 (times)

●When <On> is specied, you need to connect your telephone to the machine beforehand.

●When <Off> is specied, the machine does not enter sleep mode.

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Incoming Ring> <On> Specify how

many times the incoming call rings <Apply>

Specify settings for receiving a fax by operating a telephone that is connected to the machine (Remote

Reception). When a fax is sent to the machine, you can receive it just by picking up the handset of the telephone

and entering a specic ID number by using the telephone. This feature can save you the trouble of going all the

way to the machine. For instructions on how to use Remote Reception, see Using a Telephone to Receive

Faxes (Remote Reception)(P. 205) .

<Off>

<On>

00 to 25 to 99

Setting Menu List

395

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Remote RX> <On> Specify the ID

number for receiving a fax <Apply>

Specify settings for automatically receiving a fax after the machine has rung for a specied time period. This

feature is only available when <Manual> is selected for the receive mode. By using this feature, faxes can be

received even when no one is available to pick up the handset.

<Off>

<On>

1 to 15 to 99 (sec.)

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Switch to Auto RX> <On> Specify how

long the incoming call rings <Apply>

Select whether to store received faxes without immediately printing them. Stored fax documents can be printed

at any time by changing the setting to <Off>. Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory

Reception)(P. 213)

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Function Settings> <Memory Lock Settings> <On> Specify

settings <Apply>

Specify settings for printing received faxes.

Setting Menu List

396

Specify settings for printing received faxes on both sides of paper.

<Off>

<On>

Specify settings for reducing the image size of a received document. You can select an automatic reduction ratio

that reduces the received document to size of the loaded paper. You can also select a ratio from a list.

<Off>

<On>

<Ratio>

<Auto>

<97%>

<95%>

<90%>

<75%>

<Menu> <Fax Settings> <RX Print Settings> <Reduce RX Size> <On> Specify the settings

<Apply>

<Ratio>

<Auto> reduces the image by a ratio that is based on the size of the loaded paper. <97%>, <95%>, <90%>, or

<75%> reduce the image by the corresponding ratio.

Select <Vertical/Horizontal> to reduce the image both vertically and horizontally. Select <Vertical Only> to

reduce only vertically.

Select whether to print information, including date and time of reception and page numbers, on the bottom of

received faxes.

Setting Menu List

397

<Off>

<On>

If receiving faxes when the amount remaining in a toner cartridge is nearly empty, the machine holds them in

memory instead of printing. However, if this function is enabled, the machine continues printing.

<Off>

<On>

When this function is enabled, faxes may fade or blur. Because received documents are not stored in

memory, you need to ask the sender to resend the document.

<On>

Specify settings for forwarding faxes.

Select whether to forward all the received fax documents to a specied destination. You can specify an e-mail

address or a shared folder in a computer as the forwarding destination. Forwarding the Received

Documents Automatically(P. 215)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to print forwarded fax documents. You can set the machine to print forwarded documents only

when an error occurs. Printing Documents to be Forwarded(P. 215)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to store fax documents in memory when they are not successfully forwarded. You can resend or

print the documents later as necessary. Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be

Forwarded(P. 215)

<Off>

Setting Menu List

398

Select to display on-screen instructions for specifying settings, including the fax number and the telephone line type.

Conguring Initial Settings for Fax Functions(P. 70)

Setting Menu List

399

2KUU-07S

All the settings about the scan are listed with short descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<E-Mail Settings>(P. 400)

<File Settings>(P. 401)

<Register Unit Name (E-Mail)>(P. 402)

<Output File Image Settings>(P. 403)

<Shortcut Key Settings>(P. 403)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using.

<E-Mail Settings> *

Change the default settings used for scanning originals to send as e-mails.

You can change the default settings used for scanning originals to send as e-mails. The selected settings are

used as the default settings when scanning originals. Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 154)

<LTR>

<LGL>

<STMT>

<Color>

<PDF>

<JPEG>

<TIFF>

9 Levels

<Text>

Setting Menu List

400

<Photo>

<2-Sided Original> *

<Off>

7 Levels

<Small: Memory Priority>

<Large: Image Quality Priority>

<None>

<Low>

<High>

Select this option to restore the default e-mail transmission settings.

<File Settings> *

Change the default settings used when originals are saved to a shared folder.

You can change the default settings used when originals are saved to a shared folder. The selected settings are

used as the default settings when scanning. Changing the Default Settings for Functions(P. 154)

<LTR>

<LGL>

<STMT>

Setting Menu List

401

<Color>

<PDF>

<JPEG>

<TIFF>

9 Levels

<Text>

<Photo>

<2-Sided Original> *

<Off>

7 Levels

<Small: Memory Priority>

<Large: Image Quality Priority>

You can change and register the settings used when documents are saved to a shared folder.

<Register Unit Name (E-Mail)> *

address. If the sender name is not registered, only the e-mail address is displayed.

Setting Menu List

402

<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Register Unit Name (E-Mail)> Enter the sender name <Apply>

<Output File Image Settings> *

Specify settings for the gamma value for converting scanned originals into les.

Select the gamma value used when converting scanned color documents into the specied le format. You can

specify the same gamma value as that of the monitor which is to be used for viewing the converted les. The

les are displayed with brightness that is true to the original documents.

<Menu> <Scan Settings> <Output File Image Settings> <YCbCr TX Gamma Value> Select

the gamma value

computer that scanned images are saved in, the type of scan (color or black and white), and the le format (PDF

or JPEG). Registering these settings enables you to scan documents into a specied computer just by pressing a

button. You can view the registered settings by selecting <Conrm Destination>. Scanning Using the

Shortcut Key(P. 236)

Touch Panel Model

<Off>

<B&W Scan>

<B&W Scan>

<Off>

Setting Menu List

403

<B&W Scan>

<B&W Scan>

<Conrm Destination>

5 Lines LCD Model

<Off>

<B&W Scan>

<B&W Scan>

<Conrm Destination>

Setting Menu List

404

2KUU-07U

All the settings related to the printer are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a dagger ( ).

<Action When Paper Size Mismatch> (P. 405)

<Image Quality Settings for Mobile Print>(P. 405)

<Copies>(P. 406)

<2-Sided Printing>(P. 406)

<Default Paper>(P. 406)

<Print Quality>(P. 407)

<Layout>(P. 408)

<Timeout>(P. 409)

<PCL>(P. 409)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with (*) may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country or

region.

Priority of settings

●If a print setting is specied both from the printer driver and the operation panel of the machine, the

specication from the printer driver overrides that from the operation panel. The specication from the

operation panel becomes effective in some specic cases, such as when printing from UNIX or other

operating system that does not support printer drivers.

Set whether printing goes ahead if a paper size other than the size loaded in the drawer is selected. You can also set

the machine not to go ahead with printing and instead display an alert message.

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Action When Paper Size Mismatch> Select <Force Output>

or <Display Error>

Select the image processing when printing from a mobile device.

Setting Menu List

405

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Image Quality Settings for Mobile Print> Select

<Halftone> or <Priority> Select the item <Apply>

●When <Priority> is set to <Speed Priority>, you cannot select <Error Diffusion>.

Set the number of copies to print.

1 to 999

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Copies> Set the number of copies to print <Apply>

( )

<2-Sided Printing>

Select whether to make 2-sided printouts.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <2-Sided Printing> Select <Off> or <On>

Use this item to specify the paper size. Available Paper(P. 538)

Setting Menu List

406

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Default Paper> Select the paper size

You can change settings related to print quality.

Adjust the toner density.

17 Levels

<High>

17 Levels

17 Levels

<Low>

17 Levels

●The settings specied for <Density> are disabled when <Toner Save> is enabled.

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density> Adjust the density <Apply>

You can save toner consumption when printing from a mobile device. Select <On> when you want to check the

layout or other appearance characteristics before proceeding to nal printing of a large job.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Toner Save> Select <Off> or <On>

Specify the resolution to be used for print data processing.

<1200 dpi>

<600 dpi>

Setting Menu List

407

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Resolution> Select <1200 dpi> or <600

dpi>

Finely adjust the density. You can specify this setting only when <1200 dpi> is selected in <Resolution>.

<-1>

<0>

<+1>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Print Quality> <Density Fine Adjustment> Specify the

density

Specify the page layout settings such as binding position.

If you are binding the printouts with a binding tool such as a stapler, use this item to specify whether to bind on

the long or short edge.

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Layout> <Binding Location> Select <Long Edge> or

Specify this to bind on the long edge of paper.

Setting Menu List

408

Specify this to bind on the short edge of paper.

Set the time period after which the current print job is automatically canceled in the case of a print data reception

interruption.

5 to 15 to 300 (sec.)

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <Timeout> Set the time period <Apply> ( )

<PCL>

Specify the PCL printing settings such as page layout and print quality.

Select whether to save paper by not outputting blank pages in documents. By selecting <On>, the machine will

not output blank pages. To output all your document data when printing, including any blank pages that you

have inserted in your document, select <Off>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Paper Save> Select <Off> or <On>

Select <Portrait> (vertical orientation) or <Landscape> (horizontal orientation) for the page orientation.

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Orientation> Select <Portrait> or <Landscape>

Setting Menu List

409

Specify the font to use by selecting a corresponding font ID number. You can print the PCL font list with font

samples from the operation panel. PCL Font List(P. 458)

0 to 54

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Font Number> Select the font number

<Apply> ( )

Set the font size in points, adjustable in 0.25 increments. You can specify this setting only when a proportionally-

spaced scalable font is selected in <Font Number>.

4.00 to 12.00 to 999.75 (point)

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Point Size> Specify the point size <Apply>

( )

<Pitch>

Set the font pitch, or cpi (characters per inch), adjustable in 0.01 increments. You can specify this setting only

when a xed-pitch scalable font or a bitmap font is selected in <Font Number>.

0.44 to 10.00 to 99.99 (cpi)

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Pitch> Specify the pitch value <Apply> ( )

<Form Lines> *

Set the number of lines printed on one page from 5 to 128. This setting is automatically changed according to

the settings specied in <Default Paper Size> and <Orientation>.

5 to 60 to 128 (lines)

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Form Lines> Specify the number of lines

<Apply> ( )

Setting Menu List

410

Select the character code that is most suited for the computer you send print data from. The specied setting is

ignored when the character code is controlled by the font specied in <Font Number>.

<ISO4>

<ISO6>

<ISO11>

<ISO15>

<ISO17>

<ISO21>

<ISO60>

<ISO69>

<ISOL1>

<ISOL2>

<ISOL5>

<ISOL6>

<LEGAL>

<MATH8>

<PC775>

<PC8>

<PC850>

<PC852>

<PC8DN>

<PC8TK>

<VNUS>

<WIN30>

<WINL1>

<WINL2>

<WINL5>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Character Code> Select the character code

Select whether to set a custom paper size. Select <On> to set the dimensions of the paper in <X dimension> and

<Y dimension>.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Custom Paper> Select <Off> or <On>

<Unit of Measure> *

Select the unit of measurement to use to set a custom paper size.

Setting Menu List

411

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Unit of Measure> Select <Millimeters> or

Specify the horizontal dimension (short edge) of the custom paper.

3 to 8 1/2 (inches) or 77 to 215 (mm)

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <X dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>

( )

Specify the vertical dimension (long edge) of the custom paper.

5 to 14 (inches) or 127 to 355 (mm)

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Y dimension> Specify the dimension <Apply>

( )

Select whether to append a carriage return (CR) when the machine receives a line feed code (LF). If <Yes> is

selected, the print position moves to the beginning of the next line when the machine receives an LF code. If

<No> is selected, the print position moves to the next line, just under the received LF code.

<Yes>

<No>

Setting Menu List

412

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Append CR to LF> Select <Yes> or <No>

Select whether to expand the width of the printable area of A4 size paper in portrait orientation to that of LTR

size.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Enlarge A4 Print Width> Select <Off> or <On>

You can select the printing method to reproduce halftones (the intermediate range between the lighter and

darker areas of an image) for optimal image quality. For each document, you can make settings by type of

image.

<Text>

<Image>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Halftones> Select the type of image Select the

halftone reproduction method

Setting Menu List

413

Type of image

Select the object for which to change the setting. <Text> represents letters and characters, <Graphics>

represents lines and gures, and <Image> represents photos and images.

Setting value

Produces a sharp print with strong contrast of lightness and darkness. It is suitable for printing image data

such as photo image data.

Produces a print with smooth gradation or smooth edges. It is suitable for printing gures or graphs

containing gradation areas.

Produces a ne print with clear edges of text. It is suitable for printing characters and ne lines.

Enable or disable horizontal feeding when printing A5 size.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Printer Settings> <PCL> <Feed A5 Horizontally> Select <Off> or <On>

Setting Menu List

414

2KUU-07W

All the settings related to adjustment and maintenance are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger ( ).

<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 415)

<Toner Save>(P. 415)

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

<Clean Fixing Assembly>(P. 419)

<Control Condensation>(P. 420)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with an asterisk (*) may not be displayed depending on the model you are using.

<Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>

Set the display timing for the message notifying you that the amount remaining in the toner cartridge or the drum

cartridge is low.

<Menu> ( ) <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.> Select

<Toner Cartridge> or <Drum Cartridge> Enter the cartridge level <Apply> ( )

Select whether to reduce toner consumption when copying or faxing.

<Copy>

<Off>

<On>

<Fax> *

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Toner Save> Select <Copy> or <Fax> <On>

Setting Menu List

415

When set to <On>

●Fine lines and portions with lighter print density may become blurred.

If the print results on special types of paper are not satisfactory, the following settings may improve the quality of the

printouts.

Sometimes toner appears splattered around text or patterns in a printout. In such cases, setting this to <On>

may improve the quality of the printout.

<Off>

<On>

<On>

●Setting this to <On> may affect the print quality for some types of paper (especially for lightweight

paper) or in some printing environments (especially in high humidity environments).

●When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, <Special Printing Mode R>, and <Special

Printing Mode T> are set to <Off> automatically.

Set this item when the printed paper turns out grayish or printing is faded.

<Off>

<On>

<On>

If streaks adhere to the print paper, changing this may improve the print quality. <Mode 2> can improve the

quality more signicantly than <Mode 1>.

<Off>

Setting Menu List

416

Select the mode

If streaks adhere to the print paper output when copying or faxing, changing this may improve the print quality.

<Mode 2> can improve the quality more signicantly than <Mode 1>.

Touch Panel Model

<Copy>

<Off>

<Fax>

<Off>

5 Lines LCD Model

<Off>

Touch Panel Model

Select <Copy> or <Fax> Select the mode

5 Lines LCD Model

<Adjustment/Maintenance> <Special Processing> <Special Printing Mode Z> Select

the mode

Printed images may fade or streaks may appear when the paper has a lot of paper dust. In such cases, setting

this to <On> may improve the quality of the printout.

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

417

<On>

Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. In such cases, setting this to <On>

may improve the quality of the printout.

<Off>

<On>

<On>

●Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality.

●When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode R>, and <Special

Printing Mode T> are set to <Off> automatically.

Printing may be faint when you print on the back of a printed sheet. In such cases, setting this to <On> may

improve the quality of the printout.

<Off>

<On>

<On>

●If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of

time elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.

●When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, and <Special

Printing Mode T> are set to <Off> automatically.

Printing may be uneven when you print in a high-humidity environment. In such cases, setting this to <On> may

improve the quality of the printout.

Setting Menu List

418

<Off>

<On>

<On>

●Printed images or text may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity

environment.

●When you set this to <On>, <Special Printing Mode U>, <Special Printing Mode Q>, and <Special

Printing Mode R> are set to <Off> automatically.

Smudges may appear in a printout when the paper has a lot of paper dust or other dust particles. In such cases,

setting this to <On> may improve the quality of the printout.

<Off>

<On>

<On>

If a printed barcode cannot be read, changing this may resolve the problem.

<Auto>

<Thin>

<Thick>

Select the line width

Clean the xing assembly after the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge is replaced or if black streaks appear on

printouts. Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 439)

Setting Menu List

419

<Control Condensation> *

Restrict fax and print operation while removing condensation that has formed due to changes in the environment.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> <Adjustment/Maintenance> <Control Condensation> <On> <OK> Select <Use

Fax Memory Lock> or <Use Fax Mem. Lock+Do Not Allow Job Print> <Yes>

●While condensation is being removed, blurred images may be printed and print density may

decrease.

●When the machine is removing condensation, it does not enter sleep mode.

Setting Menu List

420

2KUU-07X

All the settings related to System Management Settings are listed with descriptions. Default settings are marked with a

dagger ( ).

<Network Settings>(P. 421)

<System Manager Information Settings>(P. 421)

<Device Information Settings>(P. 422)

<Security Settings>(P. 422)

<Select Country/Region>(P. 423)

<Remote UI Settings>(P. 423)

<Auto Online for Remote Scan>(P. 424)

<Restrict TX Function>(P. 424)

<Display Job Log>(P. 425)

<Use as USB Device>(P. 425)

<Enable Product Extended Survey Program>(P. 425)

<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>(P. 426)

<Google Cloud Print Settings>(P. 426)

<Import/Export Address Book>(P. 427)

<PDL Selection (Plug and Play)>(P. 427)

<Update Firmware>(P. 428)

<Initialize Address Book>(P. 428)

<Initialize Eco Report Counter>(P. 428)

<Initialize Menu>(P. 428)

<Initialize All Data/Settings>(P. 428)

Asterisks (*)

●Settings marked with "*1" may be unavailable or vary or have different defaults depending on your country

or region.

●Settings marked with "*2" may not be displayed depending on the model you are using, or other setting

items.

See <Network Settings>(P. 363) .

Specify the PIN exclusively for Administrators who have access privileges to <Network Settings> and <System

Management Settings>. You can set the PIN from <System Manager PIN>. You can also register the name of an

Administrator. Setting the System Manager PIN(P. 293)

Enter a number for the System Manager PIN.

Setting Menu List

421

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name of an Administrator.

Enter alphanumeric characters for the name and the installation location to identify the machine.

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Device Information Settings> Select

<Device Name> or <Location> Enter the device name or location ( Entering Text(P. 123) )

<Apply>

Enable or disable settings for IP address or MAC address packet ltering.

Select whether to use the TLS encrypted communication. Conguring the Key and Certicate for

TLS(P. 308)

<Off>

<On>

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied IPv4 addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 300)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv4 Address

Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied IPv6 addresses.

Specifying IP Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 300)

< Inbound Filter>

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

422

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <IPv6 Address

Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>

Enable or disable settings for ltering packets received from devices with specied MAC addresses.

Specifying MAC Addresses for Firewall Settings(P. 303)

< Inbound Filter>

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Security Settings> <MAC Address

Filter> <Inbound Filter> Select <Off> or <On>

<Select Country/Region> *1

Specify the country or region where the machine is used. The default setting may vary depending on the setting

selected at initial power-on.

<Other>

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Select Country/Region> Select a country or

region

Congure settings for using the Remote UI. Using the Remote UI allows you to congure machine settings from a Web

browser.

Select whether to use the Remote UI. Disabling Remote UI(P. 333)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

423

Select <Off> or <On>

Specify so that entry of a PIN is required for access to the Remote UI. Set a PIN of up to 7 digits. All users use a

common PIN. Setting a Remote UI PIN(P. 295)

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Remote UI Settings> <Remote UI Access

Security Settings> <On> Enter a PIN <Apply> Enter the PIN (Conrm) <Apply>

Select whether to use this feature to go online for remote scanning, even without using the operation panel.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Auto Online for Remote Scan> Select <Off>

or <On>

<Restrict TX Function> *2

Specify settings for restricting access to sending functions for selected destinations.

Specify a PIN and require entering it to add new entries to or edit existing entries in the Address Book.

Restricting Use of the Address Book(P. 325)

Select whether to limit the fax numbers and e-mail addresses that can be specied as destinations to those

already registered in the Address Book. Limiting Available Destinations(P. 327)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

424

Select whether to prevent a destination from being selected from the sent job logs. Disabling Use of

Previously Used Destinations(P. 327)

<Off>

<On>

<One-Touch/Coded Dial TX Conrmation>

Select whether to display the details of an entered coded dial number when it is selected as a destination.

Displaying Destinations in Address Book(P. 327)

<Off>

<On>

Select whether to display the copying, printing, faxing, and scanning logs on the display of the machine and in the

Communication Management Report.

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Display Job Log> Select <Off> or <On>

Enable or disable the USB port that is used for connecting the machine to a computer. Restricting the USB

Connection with a Computer(P. 331)

<Off>

<On>

Enable or disable the Product Extended Survey Program (a program for the machine usage survey).

<Off>

<On>

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <Enable Product Extended Survey

Program> Select <Off> or <On>

Setting Menu List

425

<Displ. Consmbls. Info (RUI/Toner Status)>

Set whether to display a button in the Remote UI or Toner Status for accessing the Web site for purchasing toner

cartridges, etc. Also set whether to use Toner Status.

<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>

<Off>

<On>

<Off>

<On>

<Displ. Purchase Button>

<Off>

<On>

Specify the settings

<Displ. Consumables Purchase Button (RUI)>

Select <Off> to prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing toner cartridges, etc. from being displayed in

the Remote UI.

If you do not want to use Toner Status, select <Off>. To prevent a button that accesses sites for purchasing

toner cartridges, etc. from being displayed in Toner Status, select <On> and then <Off>.

Enable or disable Google Cloud Print. Registering the Machine with Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

<Off>

<On>

Setting Menu List

426

<Import/Export Address Book> *2

You can import an Address Book from a computer or export an Address Book from the machine. Importing/

Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software(P. 353)

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that language

when it is connected to a computer by using Plug and Play.

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that

language when it is detected over the network.

<FAX>*2

<PCL6>

<USB>

Select a page description language so that the machine is detected as a printer that is compatible with that

language when it is connected to a computer via USB.

<PCL6>

<Menu> ( ) <System Management Settings> <PDL Selection (Plug and Play)> Select

<Network> or <USB> Select a page description language Restart the machine

<FAX> *2

Detects and connects the machine as a fax device.

Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII printer.

Detects and connects the machine as a UFRII printer that is compatible with XML Paper Specication (XPS).

<PCL6>

Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.

Setting Menu List

427

Detects and connects the machine as a PCL6 printer.

Select how to install the rmware update according to the environment of the machine. Updating the

Firmware(P. 355)

<Initialize Address Book> *2

Select to restore the Address Book settings to the factory defaults. Initializing Address Book(P. 359)

Select to restore the Eco Report Counter settings to the factory defaults. Initializing Eco Report Counter(P. 358)

Select to restore the settings listed below to the factory defaults. You can restore all the settings listed below at once,

or you can restore individual settings separately. Initializing Menu(P. 358)

<Fax Settings>*2

Restores all data including logs and setting values to their default settings. Initializing All Data/Settings(P. 359)

Setting Menu List

428

Maintenance

Maintenance ..................................................................................................................................................... 430

Regular Cleaning ............................................................................................................................................... 432

Cleaning the Exterior .................................................................................................................................... 433

Cleaning the Platen Glass ............................................................................................................................. 434

Cleaning the Feeder ..................................................................................................................................... 435

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly ....................................................................................................................... 439

Cleaning the Machine Interior ...................................................................................................................... 440

Replacing the Toner Cartridge ......................................................................................................................... 443

Replacing the Drum Cartridge .......................................................................................................................... 447

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables ......................................................................................... 451

Relocating the Machine .................................................................................................................................... 452

Viewing the Counter Value ............................................................................................................................... 454

Printing Reports and Lists ................................................................................................................................ 455

Consumables ..................................................................................................................................................... 460

Maintenance

429

Maintenance

2KUU-07Y

This chapter describes upkeep of the machine, including how to clean the machine and adjustment of print quality.

◼Basic Cleaning

Regular Cleaning(P. 432)

◼Replacing Consumables

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 451)

Consumables(P. 460)

Maintenance

430

◼Adjusting and Managing the Machine

Relocating the Machine(P. 452) Viewing the Counter Value(P. 454)

Printing Reports and Lists(P. 455)

Maintenance

431

Regular Cleaning

2KUU-080

Regularly clean the machine to prevent deterioration in printing quality and to ensure that you use it safely and easily.

Where to Clean

Exterior of the machine and ventilation slots

Cleaning the Exterior(P. 433)

Feeder

Cleaning the Feeder(P. 435)

Interior of the machine and xing assembly

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 439)

Cleaning the Machine Interior(P. 440)

Platen glass and the underside of the feeder

Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 434)

Maintenance

432

Cleaning the Exterior

2KUU-081

Regularly wipe the exterior of the machine, especially around the ventilation slots, to keep the machine in good

condition.

1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

●Turning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,

documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are

not deleted.

2Clean the exterior of the machine and the ventilation slots.

●Use a soft, well-wrung-out cloth dampened with water or a mild detergent diluted with water.

●To locate the ventilation slots, see Front Side(P. 95) .

3Wait for the exterior of machine to dry completely.

4Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

433

Cleaning the Platen Glass

2KUU-082

Regularly wipe off the dust from the platen glass and the underside of the feeder to prevent smudges to be printed on

originals or printouts.

1Turn OFF the machine, and unplug the power cord from the AC power outlet.

●Turning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,

documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are

not deleted.

2Open the feeder.

3Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder.

●Clean the areas with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

4Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.

5Gently close the feeder.

6Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

434

Cleaning the Feeder

2KUU-083

Graphite powder or dust on the rollers inside the feeder or on the original scanning area may cause smudges to

appear on printouts. If this occurs or if a paper jam occurs frequently, clean the feeder.

Feeder scan area cleaning notication

●To display a message for soiling on the original scanning area, <Menu> ( ) <Preferences> <Display

Settings> <Notify to Clean Original Scanning Area> <On>.

1Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power outlet.

●Turning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,

documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are

not deleted.

2Open the original supply tray.

3Open the feeder cover.

MF269dw / MF269dw VP MF267dw / MF264dw

4Wipe roller ( ) inside feeder.

●Wipe the rollers with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out. Then wipe with a dry cloth.

Maintenance

435

MF269dw / MF269dw VP MF267dw / MF264dw

●If the rollers and surrounding areas are very dirty, clean them out. To do this, wet a cloth with water and

wring it out well, then wipe the dirty areas. Afterwards, wipe the areas with a soft and dry cloth.

MF269dw / MF269dw VP MF267dw / MF264dw

5Close the feeder cover and original supply tray.

6Open the feeder.

7Wipe the original scanning area.

●Wipe with a cloth that has been moistened with water and wrung out, and then wipe with a dry cloth.

Maintenance

436

●When wiping the transparent plastic part ( ), take care not to bend the plastic.

If the problem persists

Remove the transparent plastic part ( ) and wipe it.

1Hold the tabs ( ) at both ends of the transparent plastic part, and remove the plastic part by gently

lifting the rearward end rst.

●The plastic part ( ) is rather damageable. When removing it, be careful not to bend it.

2Wipe the original scanning area ( ).

3Wipe the back side of the transparent plastic part.

Maintenance

437

4Wait for the plastic part to dry completely.

5Place the transparent plastic part back into position.

●Make sure of the proper orientation, then hold the tabs and place the plastic part back into position

by gently lowering the frontward end rst.

8Wait for the cleaned area to dry completely.

9Gently close the feeder cover.

10 Plug the machine back into the power outlet and switch it on.

Maintenance

438

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly

2KUU-084

Dirt may adhere to the xing assembly inside the machine and cause black streaks to appear on printouts. To clean

the xing assembly, perform the following procedure. Note that you cannot clean the xing assembly when the

machine has documents waiting to be printed. To clean the xing assembly, you need plain A4 or Letter size paper. Set

the paper in the drawer before performing the following procedure. Loading Paper(P. 132)

●Cleaning consumes the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge. Make sure that there is sucient amount

remaining in the toner cartridge and the drum cartridge beforehand. Checking the Remaining Amount

of Consumables(P. 451)

1Display the <Menu> screen. Home Screen(P. 111)

Touch Panel Model

Select <Menu> in the Home screen.

5 Lines LCD Model

Press .

2Select <Adjustment/Maintenance>.

3Select <Clean Fixing Assembly>.

4Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine, and select <Start>.

➠Cleaning starts.

Maintenance

439

Cleaning the Machine Interior

2KUU-085

Clean the interior of the machine regularly so that toner/paper dust does not collect.

1Turn off the machine and unplug it from the power outlet.

●Turning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,

documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are

not deleted.

2Lift the operation panel.

If you cannot lift the operation panel

●Make sure the feeder is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass,

remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.

3Open the toner cover.

4Remove the toner cartridge.

Maintenance

440

●Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge,

such as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak.

Remove the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.

5Remove the drum cartridge.

●Do not shake or tilt the drum cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the drum cartridge,

such as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the drum cartridge to leak.

Remove the drum cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.

6Using a lint-free clean, soft, dry cloth, wipe away toner/paper dust from the inside.

7Insert the drum cartridge.

Maintenance

441

8Insert the toner cartridge.

9Close the toner cover.

10 Lower the operation panel.

11 Reconnect the power cord and turn ON the machine.

Maintenance

442

Replacing the Toner Cartridge

2KUU-086

The machine displays a message when the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is low. Note that the print quality

may suffer if you continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the toner

cartridge on the display ( Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 451) ).

When a Message Appear(P. 443)

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 444)

When a Message Appear

The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the toner cartridge. Depending on which message

is displayed, prepare a new toner cartridge ( Consumables(P. 460) ) or replace the current toner cartridge with a

new one ( Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 444) ).

<Preparing a toner cartridge is recommended.>/<Preparing a toner cart. is

recommended.>

This message noties you that the toner cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a

replacement toner cartridge ready. Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print

a large job.

When this message is displayed

●When copying or printing, you can continue printing the original.

Specify when this message is displayed

●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge that triggers

this message. <Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 415)

<Toner cart. end of lifetime. Replacement is recommended.>/<Toner cart. life end.

Replcmt. recommended.>

This message noties you that the toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that

you replace the toner cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be

guaranteed.

Maintenance

443

<Error Information/Notication> <Toner Cartridge End of Lifetime> to display the procedure for

replacing the toner cartridge.

To replace a consumable

●Press and hold . Select <Consumables Status Report>, print the consumables status report to nd

out the cartridge name. Printing Reports and Lists(P. 455)

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge

When you replace the toner cartridge, simple instructions on the replacement procedure are displayed on the screen.

See the on-screen instructions as well as the following procedure.

1Lift the operation panel.

If you cannot lift the operation panel

●Make sure the feeder is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass,

remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.

2Open the toner cover.

3Remove the toner cartridge.

Maintenance

444

●Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge,

such as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak.

Remove the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.

4Remove the new toner cartridge from the protective package.

1Pull the tab of the protective package on a at place.

2Pull out the toner cartridge.

5Shake the toner cartridge 5 or 6 times as shown below to evenly distribute the toner

inside the cartridge, and then place it on a at surface.

Maintenance

445

6Replace the toner cartridge.

7Close the toner cover.

8Lower the operation panel.

LINKS

Consumables(P. 460)

Maintenance

446

Replacing the Drum Cartridge

2KUU-087

The machine displays a message when the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is low. Note that the print quality

may suffer if you continue printing without resolving this issue. You can check the amount remaining in the drum

cartridge on the display ( Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables(P. 451) ).

When a Message Appear(P. 447)

Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 448)

When a Message Appear

The message that is displayed depends on the amount remaining in the drum cartridge. Depending on which

message is displayed, prepare a new drum cartridge ( Consumables(P. 460) ) or replace the current drum cartridge

with a new one ( Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 448) ).

<Preparing a drum cartridge is recommended.>/<Preparing a drum cart. is

recommended.>

This message noties you that the drum cartridge needs to be replaced soon. Make sure that you have a

replacement drum cartridge ready. Replace the drum cartridge if you see this message before you start to print

a large job.

When this message is displayed

●When copying or printing, you can continue printing the original.

Specify when this message is displayed

●You can set any value as the percentage of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge that triggers

this message. <Displ. Timing for Cartridge Prep. Notif.>(P. 415)

<Drum cart. end of lifetime. Replacement is recommended.>/<Drum cart. life end.

Replcmt. recommended.>

This message noties you that the drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime. It is recommended that

you replace the drum cartridge with a new one. You can continue printing, but the print quality cannot be

guaranteed.

Maintenance

447

<Error Information/Notication> <Drum Cartridge End of Lifetime> to display the procedure for

replacing the drum cartridge.

To replace a consumable

●Press and hold . Select <Consumables Status Report>, print the consumables status report to nd

out the cartridge name. Printing Reports and Lists(P. 455)

Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge

When you replace the drum cartridge, simple instructions on the replacement procedure are displayed on the screen.

See the on-screen instructions as well as the following procedure.

1Lift the operation panel.

If you cannot lift the operation panel

●Make sure the feeder is completely closed. If a thick original such as a book is placed on the platen glass,

remove the original. Forcing the operation panel up may cause damage.

2Open the toner cover.

3Remove the toner cartridge.

Maintenance

448

Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge, such

as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak. Remove

the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.

4Remove the drum cartridge.

Do not shake or tilt the drum cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the drum cartridge, such

as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the drum cartridge to leak. Remove

the drum cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.

5Remove the new drum cartridge from the protective bag.

6Replace the drum cartridge.

Maintenance

449

7Insert the toner cartridge.

8Close the toner cover.

9Lower the operation panel.

LINKS

Consumables(P. 460)

Maintenance

450

Checking the Remaining Amount of Consumables

2KUU-088

Use the procedure below to check the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, etc. It is particularly important to

check whether you need to have a new toner cartridge or a new drum cartridge ready before starting a large print job.

Amount Remaining in Toner Cartridge

Displays the amount remaining in the toner cartridge.

Amount Remaining in Drum Cartridge

Displays the amount remaining in the drum cartridge.

●The displayed amount remaining in the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge can be used only as a guide

and may differ from the actual amount.

●Other internal parts may reach the end of their lifetime before the amount remaining in the toner cartridge

or the drum cartridge reaches its lifetime.

LINKS

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Consumables(P. 460)

Maintenance

451

Relocating the Machine

2KUU-089

The machine is heavy. Make sure to follow the procedure below when moving the machine to avoid injury.

1Turn OFF the machine and computer.

●Turning the printer OFF erases any queued print data. Data such as documents received and held in memory,

documents waiting to be sent, and reports that are automatically printed after sending or receiving faxes are

not deleted.

2Disconnect the cables and cord from the machine in numerical order as in the

illustration below.

●Whether the cables with "*" are connected depends on your environment.

Power plug

Power cord

USB cable*

LAN cable*

External telephone*

Telephone cable*

3When transporting the machine across a long distance, remove the toner cartridge

and the drum cartridge.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 444)

Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 448)

4Open the front cover and remove any paper.

●If the paper guides are extended, return them so that they t in the drawer.

5Close the front cover, paper stopper, and all similar parts, and then move the

machine to a new location.

●Check how heavy the machine is and carry it without straining. Main Unit(P. 533)

Maintenance

452

●Hold the lift handles, and lift up the machine.

6Carefully place the machine at the new installation site.

●For information about how to install the machine after relocating it, see "Getting Started." Manuals and

Their Contents(P. 549)

Maintenance

453

Viewing the Counter Value

2KUU-08A

You can check total for the number of pages used for printouts. The number of printouts includes printouts of the list

as well as printouts of data from computers.

<Device Information> <Check Counter> Check the number of pages printed

Maintenance

454

Printing Reports and Lists

2KUU-08C

You can print reports and lists to check information such as machine settings.

Setting Reports on the Communication Results(P. 455)

Printing Lists of Settings(P. 457)

Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine(P. 457)

Setting Reports on the Communication Results

You can print reports on the results of sending by e-mail and sending/receiving by fax, as well as results of saving to a

shared folder. Some reports can be printed automatically while others are only printed when an error occurs.

●If "Result" in a printed list contains "NG," you can check details of the error from a three-digit number

prexed with "#" displayed in the next to the result. Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 504)

●Reports printed for e-mail indicate the transmission result between the machine and the mail server, not

between the machine and the destination address.

Communication Management Report (Touch Panel Model)

You can check the fax and e-mail logs of sent and received documents by printing a Communication

Management Report. The report can be printed automatically after every 40 transmissions, or you can print it

manually.

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Report Settings> <Communication Management

Report> Congure report settings

Select <On> to print the report automatically after every 40 transmissions, or <Off> if you do not want to print

the report automatically.

Select <On> to print sent and received reports separately, or <Off> to print both reports on one sheet.

Print the report manually

Maintenance

455

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Communication Management Report> Check that

the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select

Fax TX Result Report (Touch Panel Model)

You can check the fax logs of sent documents by printing a Fax TX Result Report. The report can be printed

either every time a transmission is completed or only when a sending error occurs.

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Report Settings> <Fax TX Result Report> Select <On> or <Only

When Error Occurs> Select <Off> or <On>

When you select <On>, a part of a sent document can be included in the TX Result Report.

E-Mail/File TX Result Report (Touch Panel Model)

You can check the e-mail logs of sent documents as well as documents saved to a shared folder by printing an

E-Mail/File TX Result Report. The report can be printed either every time a transmission is completed or only

when a sending error occurs.

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Report Settings> <E-Mail/File TX Result Report> Select <On> or

Communication result

●If an error occurs during transmission by e-mail or saving to a shared folder, the report does not

show the error code. To check the error code, print a Communication Management Report.

Communication Management Report (Touch Panel Model)(P. 455)

RX Result Report (Touch Panel Model)

You can check the logs of received fax documents by printing an RX Result Report. The report can be printed

either every time a transmission is completed or only when a receiving error occurs.

Maintenance

456

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Report Settings> <RX Result Report> Select <On> or <Only When

Error Occurs>

Printing Lists of Settings

You can print information and settings registered in the machine as a list.

Address Book List (Touch Panel Model)

You can check the list of destinations registered in the Address Book as <Coded Dial>, <One-Touch>, and

<Group> by printing an Address Book List.

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Address Book List> Select the setting you want to

print out Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the

machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

User Data List

You can check the list of the settings ( Setting Menu List(P. 361) ) as well as the content that has been

registered in the machine by printing a User Data List. The list include the rmware version and the paper size

and type registered in the machine.

Touch Panel Model

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <User Data List> Check that the size and type of

paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

5 Lines LCD Model

<Output Report> <User Data List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on

the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

Printing Reports and Lists on the Usage Status of the Machine

You can print the machine status report, the usage log of consumables, and the list of fonts available in PCL mode.

Eco Report

You can check the monthly total volume of printouts and the power consumption with a report. This report

includes tips that are useful for saving paper and power consumption based on the usage status.

Touch Panel Model

Maintenance

457

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Eco Report> Check that the size and type of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

5 Lines LCD Model

<Output Report> <Eco Report> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the

screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

Consumables Status Report

You can check the consumables status installed in the machine with a report.

Touch Panel Model

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size and

type of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

5 Lines LCD Model

<Output Report> <Consumables Status Report> Check that the size and type of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

PCL Font List

You can check the list of fonts available in PCL mode with a report.

Touch Panel Model

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <PCL Font List> Check that the size and type of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

5 Lines LCD Model

<Output Report> <PCL Font List> Check that the size and type of paper displayed on the

screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

Cartridge Log Report

You can check the usage logs of toner cartridge and the drum cartridge with a report.

Maintenance

458

Touch Panel Model

<Menu> <Output Rprt.> <Print List> <Cartridge Log Report> Check that the size and type

of paper displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and select <OK> <Yes>

5 Lines LCD Model

<Output Report> <Cartridge Log Report> Check that the size and type of paper

displayed on the screen is loaded in the machine, and press <Yes>

Maintenance

459

Consumables

2KUU-08E

The following is a guide to the estimated replacement time for the consumables used in

this machine. Purchase consumables at your local authorized Canon dealer. Observe

safety and health precautions when storing and handling consumables. For optimum

print quality, using Canon genuine Toner, Cartridge and Parts is recommended.

●To handle and store consumables, observe precautions in "Getting Started" provided for this product.

●Depending on the installation environment, printing paper size, or original type, you may need to replace

consumables before the end of the estimated lifetime.

◼Toner Cartridges

Supplied Toner Cartridge

The average yield and the weight of the toner cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.

●Average yield*

MF269dw / MF267dw / MF264dw

1,700 sheets

MF269dw VP

4,100 sheets

●Weight

MF269dw / MF267dw / MF264dw

Approx. 0.3 Kg

MF269dw VP

Approx. 0.4 Kg

Replacement Toner Cartridges

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine toner cartridges is recommended.

Canon Genuine Toner Cartridge Average yield and weight of toner cartridge

Canon Toner Cartridge 051

●Average yield*

1,700 sheets

●Weight

Approx. 0.3 Kg

Canon Toner Cartridge 051H

●Average yield*

4,100 sheets

●Weight

Maintenance

460

Approx. 0.4 Kg

*The average yield is based on "ISO/IEC 19752" (the global standard related to "Method for the determination of toner

cartridge yield for monochromatic electrophotographic printers and multi-function devices that contain printer

components" issued by ISO [International Organization for Standardization]) when printing A4 size paper with the default

print density setting.

Be careful of counterfeit toner cartridges

●Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon toner cartridges in the marketplace. Use of

counterfeit toner cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not

responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit toner cartridge.

For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.

●When replacing toner cartridge, see Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443) .

◼Drum Cartridge

Supplied Drum Cartridge

The average yield and the weight of the drum cartridge that comes with the machine are shown below.

●Average yield*

23,000 sheets

●Weight

Approx. 0.2 Kg

Replacement Drum Cartridges

For optimum print quality, using Canon genuine drum cartridges is recommended.

Canon Genuine Drum Cartridge Average yield and weight of drum cartridge

Canon Drum Cartridge 051

●Average yield*

23,000 sheets

●Weight

Approx. 0.2 Kg

*The average yield is on the basis of our evaluation criteria when printing at 2-sheet intervals (2-sheet intermittent) of plain

A4 size paper.

Maintenance

461

Be careful of counterfeit drum cartridges

●Please be aware that there are counterfeit Canon drum cartridges in the marketplace. Use of

counterfeit drum cartridge may result in poor print quality or machine performance. Canon is not

responsible for any malfunction, accident or damage caused by the use of counterfeit drum cartridge.

For more information, see canon.com/counterfeit.

●When replacing drum cartridge, see Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447) .

Maintenance

462

Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................................. 464

Common Problems ............................................................................................................................................ 466

Installation/Settings Problems ..................................................................................................................... 467

Copying/Printing Problems .......................................................................................................................... 471

Faxing/Telephone Problems ......................................................................................................................... 474

When You Cannot Print Properly ...................................................................................................................... 476

Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory ............................................................................................................ 478

Paper Creases or Curls ................................................................................................................................. 487

Paper Is Fed Incorrectly ................................................................................................................................ 489

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed ........................................................ 490

Countermeasures for Each Message ............................................................................................................ 491

Countermeasures for Each Error Code ......................................................................................................... 504

Clearing Paper Jams .......................................................................................................................................... 510

Paper Jams in the Feeder .............................................................................................................................. 511

Paper Jams inside the Machine ..................................................................................................................... 514

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved .................................................................................................................. 518

Troubleshooting

463

Troubleshooting

2KUU-08F

When a problem occurs, check this chapter to nd out solutions before contacting Canon.

◼Common Problems

This section describes how to take action when you suspect that the machine is malfunctioning. Common

Problems(P. 466)

◼When You Cannot Print Properly

This section describes how to take action when printing results are not satisfactory or the paper creases or curls.

When You Cannot Print Properly(P. 476)

◼A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) is Displayed

This section describes how to take action when a message or error code (three digits) appears on the display. A

Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error Code) Is Displayed(P. 490)

◼Clearing Paper Jams

This section describes how to take action when a paper is jammed. Clearing Paper Jams(P. 510)

◼When a Problem Cannot Be Solved

If a problem persists, see When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 518) to nd out where to contact.

Troubleshooting

464

Troubleshooting

465

Common Problems

2KUU-08H

If you encounter problems when using the machine, check the items in this section before contacting us. If the

problems persist, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Check the Following

Is the machine turned ON? Is the power cord connected?

●If the machine is turned ON but does not respond, turn it OFF, check whether the power cord is connected

correctly, and turn it back ON. For information on connecting the power cord, see Getting Started.

Manuals and Their Contents(P. 549)

Are the phone cord, LAN cable and USB cable connected correctly?

●Check whether these cables are connected correctly. Use care not to mistake the phone cord's port for the

other cables' ports.

Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 74)

Parts and Their Functions(P. 94)

Is sleep mode activated?

●If you leave the machine unattended for a specic period of time, it enters sleep mode for power

conservation, not allowing you to operate it.

To cancel sleep mode, press any key other than the power switch.

Is any message displayed on the screen?

●If a problem occurs, a message is displayed. Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 491)

If a problem persists even after checking

Click the link that corresponds to the problem.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 467)

Copying/Printing Problems(P. 471)

Faxing/Telephone Problems(P. 474)

Troubleshooting

466

Installation/Settings Problems

2KUU-08J

See Common Problems(P. 466) also.

Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection(P. 467)

Problem with the USB Connection(P. 470)

Problem with the Print Server(P. 470)

Problems with the Wireless/Wired LAN Connection

The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time.

●The wireless LAN and wired LAN cannot be connected at the same time. The following can be used at the

same time: a USB cable and a wireless LAN, or a USB cable and a wired LAN.

Remote UI is not displayed.

●Are <Use HTTP> and <Use Remote UI> set to <On>?

Disabling HTTP Communication(P. 332)

Disabling Remote UI(P. 333)

●If the machine is connected to a wireless LAN on a touch panel model, check that the Wi-Fi icon is displayed

in the Home screen and that the IP address is set correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.

Home Screen(P. 111)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

●If the machine is connected to a wired LAN, check that the cable is connected rmly and the IP address is set

correctly, and then start the Remote UI again.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)

Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

●Are you using a proxy server? If so, add the machine's IP address to the [Exceptions] list (addresses that do

not use the proxy server) in the Web browser's proxy settings dialog.

●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is

incorrectly entered, the Remote UI cannot be displayed. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to

set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 299)

<IPv4 Address Filter>(P. 422)

<IPv6 Address Filter>(P. 422)

<MAC Address Filter>(P. 423)

A connection to a network cannot be established.

●The IP address may not be set correctly. Set the IP address again.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)

●When you connect the machine to a computer via wireless LAN, check whether the machine is properly

installed and ready to connect to the network.

When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 468)

Troubleshooting

467

You are unsure of the set IP address. Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

The connection method cannot be switched between a wired LAN and a wireless

LAN.

●Did you select a wired LAN or a wireless LAN on the operation panel on the machine as well? This selection is

required to have the machine switch to your selection.

Selecting Wired LAN or Wireless LAN(P. 16)

You are unsure of the SSID or the network key of the wireless router to be

connected. The SSID is not displayed on the screen.

●Check whether the SSID can be found on the wireless router or package box.

●Check the SSID or the network key of the wireless router by using Canon MF/LBP Wireless Setup Assistant.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

The SSID of the wireless router to be connected is not displayed in the access

point list.

●Check whether the SSID is correct.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

●If the SSID of the wireless router is hidden (using a stealth mode*), set the SSID to be visible on the wireless

router.

* A mode that disables the SSID auto-detection of other devices.

●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.

When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN(P. 468)

The machine dials up to an unintended connection destination (if a dialup router

is connected to a network).

●If a dialup router does not need to pass broadcast packets, set the dialup router so that the broadcast

packets will not pass. If the dialup router needs to pass broadcast packets, check whether the settings are

correct.

●If a DNS server is located in an external network, set the IP address to be connected, not the host name, even

if connecting to the devices that are on the network that is connected to the machine.

●If a DNS server is located on a network that is connected to the machine and the information about the

devices that are connected to an external network is registered to the DNS server, check whether the settings

are correct.

When the Machine Cannot Connect to the Wireless LAN

Check the status of your computer.

●Have the settings of the computer and the wireless router been completed?

●Are the cables of the wireless router (including the power cord and LAN cable)

correctly plugged in?

●Is the wireless router turned on?

Troubleshooting

468

If the problem persists even after checking the above:

●Turn off the devices, and then turn them on again.

●Wait for a while, and try again to connect to the network.

Check whether the machine is turned ON.

●If the machine is turned ON, turn it OFF, and then turn it back ON.

Check the installation site of the machine and the wireless router.

●Is the machine too far from the wireless router?

●Are there any obstacles such as walls between the machine and the wireless router?

●Are there any appliances such as microwave ovens or digital cordless phones that

emit radio waves near the machine?

Perform one of the following settings again.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 20)

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 22)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

When you need to manually set up the connection

If the wireless router is set as described below, manually enter all the required information for the wireless LAN

connection ( Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27) ).

●ANY connection refusal* is activated.

●The WEP key that was automatically generated (hexadecimal) is selected.

●The stealth mode is activated.

* A function in which the wireless router refuses the connection if the SSID on the device to be connected is set to "ANY"

or is blank.

When you need to change the settings of the wireless router

If the wireless router is set as described below, change the settings of the router.

●The MAC address packet ltering is set.

Troubleshooting

469

●When only IEEE 802.11n is used for the wireless communication, WEP is selected or the WPA/WPA2

encryption method is set to TKIP.

Problem with the USB Connection

Cannot communicate.

●Change the USB cable. If you are using a long USB cable, replace it with a short one.

●If you are using a USB hub, connect the machine directly to your computer using a USB cable.

Problem with the Print Server

You cannot nd the print server to connect to.

●Are the print server and computer connected correctly?

●Is the print server running?

●Do you have user rights to connect to the print server? If you are not sure, contact the server administrator.

●Is [Network discovery] enabled?

Enabling [Network discovery](P. 556)

You cannot connect to a shared printer.

●On the network, does the machine appear among the printers of the print server? If it is not displayed,

contact the network or server administrator.

Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 557)

Troubleshooting

470

Copying/Printing Problems

2KUU-08K

See Common Problems(P. 466) also.

Printing/copy results are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When You

Cannot Print Properly(P. 476)

You cannot print.

●Can you print a Windows test page? If you can print a Windows test page, there is no problem with the

machine or the printer driver. Check the print settings of your application.

Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 558)

If you cannot print a test page, check the following according to your environment.

Wireless LAN connection

●Check the connection status (signal strength) of the wireless LAN.

Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

●If the connection is poor, try the following.

- Change the channel of your wireless LAN router. If you have more than one router, set the channels to

be at least ve channels apart.

- If you can change the radio output power of your wireless LAN router, raise the output power.

●If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN, are the computer and this machine using the same

wireless LAN router SSID? If they are different, reset the wireless LAN connection settings of this machine.

Viewing Network Settings(P. 38)

Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 563)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

When you reset wireless LAN connection settings

●As the wireless LAN router, select the one with the SSID to which the computer is connected.

●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.

Checking the Printer Port(P. 561)

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are incorrectly entered,

you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation panel to set <IPv4

Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 299)

<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 422)

<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 422)

<MAC Address Filter> (P. 423)

●Disable security software and other resident software.

●Reinstall the printer driver.

Installing Drivers(P. 69)

Troubleshooting

471

●Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Wired LAN connection

●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use, create a port.

Checking the Printer Port(P. 561)

Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

●Is communication not limited by the rewall on your computer? If IP addresses are or an MAC address is

incorrectly entered, you will be not able to access the machine. In that case, you need to use the operation

panel to set <IPv4 Address Filter>, <IPv6 Address Filter>, or <MAC Address Filter> to <Off>.

Restricting Communication by Using Firewalls(P. 299)

<IPv4 Address Filter> (P. 422)

<IPv6 Address Filter> (P. 422)

<MAC Address Filter> (P. 423)

●Disable security software and other resident software.

●Reinstall the printer driver.

Installing Drivers(P. 69)

●Can you print from other computers on the network? If you also cannot print from other computers,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

USB connection

●Have you selected the correct port? If there is no port to use or you are not sure, reinstall the printer

driver. When you reinstall the printer driver, the correct port is created automatically.

Checking the Printer Port(P. 561)

Installing Drivers(P. 69)

●Is bidirectional communication enabled? Enable bidirectional communication, and restart the computer.

Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 562)

●Disable security software and other resident software.

●Connect to another USB port on the computer.

●Can you print from a USB connection to another computer? If you also cannot print from other computers,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

Via print server

●Can you print from the print server? If you can print from the print server, check the connection between

the print server and your computer.

Problem with the Print Server(P. 470)

●Disable security software and other resident software.

●Reinstall the printer driver.

Installing Drivers(P. 69)

●Can you print from other computers via the print server? If you also cannot print from other computers,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

●Has an error occurred? Check the job log.

Checking the Copying Status and Log(P. 179)

Checking the Printing Status and Log(P. 228)

Printing seems to be slow. *

●Print or delete data in memory.

Troubleshooting

472

* When the free space in memory is running low, the processing speed of the machine becomes slow, just as a computer

does. There is nothing abnormal.

You cannot print with Google Cloud Print. Using Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

It takes a long time before printing starts.

●Did you print to narrow width paper? After you print to narrow width paper, the machine may cool itself to

maintain the print quality. As a result, it may take some time before the next job is printed. Wait until the

machine is ready to print. Printing will resume when the temperature inside the machine has fallen.

Troubleshooting

473

Faxing/Telephone Problems

2KUU-08L

See Common Problems(P. 466) also.

Sending Problems(P. 474)

Receiving Problems(P. 475)

Sending Problems

A fax cannot be sent.

●Is an external phone line busy? Wait until the line becomes free.

●Has an error occurred? Print and check a Communication Management Report.

Communication Management Report (Touch Panel Model)(P. 455)

●Is a telephone line set correctly?

Connecting the Telephone Line(P. 74)

●When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

A fax cannot be sent with a destination in the history specied.

●Did you turn OFF the machine? If so, the stored history was deleted.

●Did you set <Restrict New Destinations> to <On>? If so, the history before you set was deleted.

●Did you set <Restrict Resending from Log> to <On>? If so, the destinations in the history cannot be specied.

A fax cannot be sent on an optical ber line.

●The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical ber line or IP phone line, the

machine may not work correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a

case, contact the provider of the optical ber line or IP phone.

The results of a sent fax are not satisfactory.

●Clean the platen glass or feeder. If cleaning does not improve the results, the recipient's fax machine may be

a cause.

Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 434)

Cleaning the Feeder(P. 435)

Troubleshooting

474

Receiving Problems

The results of received fax are not satisfactory. Paper creases or curls. When

You Cannot Print Properly(P. 476)

Telephone and fax cannot be switched automatically.

●Check that the receive mode is set to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>, <Answering Machine>, or <DRPD: Select Fax>.

Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 73)

●Free space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.

Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 214)

Printing Documents in Memory(P. 213)

A fax cannot be received automatically.

●Check that the receive mode is set to <Fax/Tel (Auto Switch)>, <Auto>, <Answering Machine>, or <DRPD:

Select Fax>.

Selecting the Receive Mode(P. 73)

●Free space in memory may be running low. Print or delete data in memory.

Checking/Forwarding/Deleting Documents in Memory(P. 214)

Printing Documents in Memory(P. 213)

A fax cannot be received on an optical ber line.

●The machine is compliant with use on analog lines. When using an optical ber line or IP phone line, the

machine may not work correctly depending on the connection environment or connected devices. In such a

case, contact the provider of the optical ber line or IP phone.

Troubleshooting

475

When You Cannot Print Properly

2KUU-08R

If printing results are not satisfactory, or paper creases or curls, try the following solutions. If the problems persist,

contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

◼Problems with Image Quality Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory(P. 478)

Smudge Marks Appear on the

Edge of Printouts(P. 478)

Smudges Appear on

Printouts(P. 478)

Afterimages Appear in Blank

Areas(P. 479)

Toner Smudges and Splatters

Appear(P. 479)

Printouts Are Faded(P. 480) A Portion of the Page Is Not

Printed(P. 482)

Streaks Appear/Printing is

Uneven(P. 482)

Printouts Are Entirely or

Partially Grayish(P. 483)

White Spots Appear(P. 484)

Troubleshooting

476

Spots Appear(P. 485) Reverse Side of Paper is

Smudged(P. 486)

Printed Barcode Cannot Be

Read(P. 486)

◼Problems with Printout Paper Paper Creases or Curls(P. 487)

Paper Creases(P. 487) Paper Curls(P. 487)

◼Problems with Paper Feed Paper Is Fed Incorrectly(P. 489)

Printouts Are Skewed(P. 489) Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together(P. 489)

Troubleshooting

477

Printing Results Are Not Satisfactory

2KUU-08S

Dirt inside the machine may affect printing results. Perform care and cleaning to the machine rst. Regular

Cleaning(P. 432)

Smudge Marks Appear on the Edge of Printouts

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check the supported paper types and replace with an appropriate type. Also, set the paper size and type

correctly.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

Do you print data without margins?

●This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 1/4" (5 mm) or less

around the edge of paper or 3/8" (10 mm) or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the

machine. Make sure to have margins around the document to print.

[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]

Smudges Appear on Printouts

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

●If using the appropriate paper still does not solve the problem, changing the <Special Printing Mode A> or

<Special Printing Mode Z> setting may solve the problem. <Mode 2> can improve the quality more

signicantly than <Mode 1>.

Troubleshooting

478

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

Afterimages Appear in Blank Areas

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Toner Smudges and Splatters Appear

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Troubleshooting

479

●Setting <Special Printing Mode U> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

Are you using paper containing much paper dust or other dust particles?

●Smudges may appear in a printout when the paper has a lot of paper dust or other dust particles. Setting

<Special Printing Mode L> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Printouts Are Faded

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings

properly.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

Are you using paper containing much paper dust?

●Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. Setting <Special

Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

Troubleshooting

480

Are you using rough-surface paper?

●Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. Setting <Special Printing

Mode Q> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

●Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality.

Are you using the machine in an environment with high humidity?

●Setting <Special Printing Mode T> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

●Printed images or text may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity environment.

Did you print on the back of a printed sheet?

●Printing may be faint when you print on the back of a printed sheet. Setting <Special Printing Mode R> to

<On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

●If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time

elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.

Is the machine installed in the appropriate environment?

●Install the printer in an appropriate location.

Relocating the Machine(P. 452)

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Troubleshooting

481

A Portion of the Page Is Not Printed

Do you print data without margins?

●This symptom occurs if a margin is set to none in the printer driver. A margin of 1/4" (5 mm) or less

around the edge of paper or 3/8" (10 mm) or less around the edge of envelopes is not printable with the

machine. Make sure to have margins around the document to print.

[Finishing] tab [Advanced Settings] [Expand Print Region and Print] [Off]

Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?

●If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, part of a document may not be printed.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Streaks Appear/Printing is Uneven

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Is the platen glass dirty?

●Clean the platen glass and the underside of the feeder.

Cleaning the Platen Glass(P. 434)

Have you cleaned the xing unit?

●Clean the xing unit.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 439)

Troubleshooting

482

Are you using rough-surface paper?

●Printed images may be faint when they are printed on rough-surface paper. Setting <Special Printing

Mode Q> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

●Setting this to <On> may affect the image quality.

Are you using the machine in an environment with high humidity?

●Change the setting for <Special Printing Mode T>. Setting this item to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

●Printed images or text may be blurred when you set this to <On> and print in a low-humidity environment.

Are you using paper containing much paper dust?

●Using paper containing much paper dust may result in a faded or streaky printout. Setting <Special

Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Printouts Are Entirely or Partially Grayish

Troubleshooting

483

Is <Correct Density> in <Copy Settings> set too dark?

●Adjust the setting so that density is lighter.

<Correct Density>(P. 388)

Does the original have background color, is it stained, or are you copying an

original such as a newspaper that is printed on thin paper so that text or images

on the other side are visible through the paper?

●Check the original and then adjust the density to the correct settings.

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Are you using a specic type of paper?

●The printed side may come out in grayish color for certain type of paper. Check the type of paper you are

using and try a different type.

Available Paper(P. 538)

●Setting <Special Printing Mode U> or <Special Printing Mode G> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

●A desirable effect may not be attained even with these settings applied.

Is the machine installed in the appropriate environment?

●Install the printer in an appropriate location.

●Store the toner cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This

may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Has the drum cartridge been left in direct sunlight for a long period of time?

●Store the drum cartridge in an appropriate location for two to three hours, then try printing again. This

may solve the problem. If the problem persists, replace the drum cartridge.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

White Spots Appear

Troubleshooting

484

Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?

●Replace with appropriate paper.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Is the amount remaining in the toner cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the toner cartridge is left, and replace the toner cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the toner cartridge, the toner cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Is the amount remaining in the drum cartridge running low?

●Check how much the amount remaining in the drum cartridge is left, and replace the drum cartridge as

necessary.

●Regardless of the amount remaining in the drum cartridge, the drum cartridge may reach the end of its

lifetime depending on the use environment or the deterioration of materials inside the drum cartridge.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Spots Appear

Have you cleaned the xing unit?

●Clean the xing unit.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 439)

Troubleshooting

485

Reverse Side of Paper is Smudged

Have you loaded paper that is smaller than the size of the print data?

●Check to make sure that the paper size matches the size of the print data.

Have you cleaned the xing unit?

●Clean the xing unit.

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 439)

Do smudges appear on 2-sided printed paper?

●The back side of the paper may become smudged during 2-sided printing. Setting <Special Printing Mode

R> to <On> may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

●If you set to <On>, image quality may be affected or a paper jam may occur when a certain length of time

elapses after printing on the front side or depending on the ambient humidity.

Printed Barcode Cannot Be Read

Are you trying to read a small barcode or one with thick lines?

●Enlarge the barcode.

●Changing the <Select Line Width> setting may solve the problem.

<Special Processing>(P. 416)

Troubleshooting

486

Paper Creases or Curls

2KUU-08U

Paper Creases

Is paper loaded correctly?

●If paper is not loaded below the load limit line or is loaded obliquely, it may crease.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?

●Replace with appropriate paper.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Paper Curls

Are you using appropriate paper?

●Check usable paper, and replace with appropriate paper. Also, specify the paper size and type settings

properly.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

●Change the setting of <Paper Type> to a setting for thinner paper. For example, if the current setting is

<Plain (19 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>, change it to <Plain L (17 lb Bond-18 lb Bond)> or <Plain L2 (16 lb Bond)>.

Troubleshooting

487

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

Available Paper(P. 538)

●Reload the paper by changing the side to print on (front side/back side).

●In rare cases the symptom may become worse depending on the paper. If this occurs, change the side to

print on back to the previous side.

Are you using paper that has absorbed moisture?

●Replace with appropriate paper.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Troubleshooting

488

Paper Is Fed Incorrectly

2KUU-08W

Printouts Are Skewed

Do the paper guides align with the edges of the paper?

●If the paper guides are too loose or too tight, the printouts are skewed.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Are you printing on curled envelopes?

●Uncurl the envelopes, and print again.

Loading Envelopes(P. 141)

Paper Is Not Fed/Two or More Sheets Are Fed Together

Is paper loaded correctly?

●Fan the paper stack thoroughly so that paper is not stuck together.

●Check whether paper is loaded correctly.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

●Check whether the number of sheets of paper loaded is appropriate and whether the appropriate paper is

used.

Available Paper(P. 538)

Loading Paper(P. 132)

●Check whether mixed sizes and types of paper are loaded together.

●There are cases where the paper does not load properly depending on its thickness. If this occurs, reverse

the paper orientation, or ip the paper over.

Troubleshooting

489

A Message or a Number Starting with "#" (an Error

Code) Is Displayed

2KUU-08X

When a message appears on the machine's display, or a number (error code) prexed with "#" appears, see the

following sections to check the solution.

Countermeasures for Each Message(P. 491)

Countermeasures for Each Error Code(P. 504)

Troubleshooting

490

Countermeasures for Each Message

2KUU-08Y

If you cannot send a fax or the memory is full, or you encounter operation problems, a message appears on the

display. Find out more information about messages in the following list.

A counterfeit or non-Canon drum cartridge may be in use. The amount

remaining in the cartridge cannot be displayed correctly./A counterfeit or

non-Canon drum cartridge may be in use.

The drum cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.

●Only genuine Canon drum cartridges should be used as replacement drum cartridges.

Consumables(P. 460)

A counterfeit or non-Canon toner cartridge may be in use. The amount

remaining in the cartridge cannot be displayed correctly./A counterfeit or

non-Canon toner cartridge may be in use.

The toner cartridge used may not be a genuine Canon product.

●Only genuine Canon toner cartridges should be used as replacement toner cartridges.

Consumables(P. 460)

Amount remaining in drum cart. cannot be displayed correctly./Amount in

cart. cannot be displ. correctly. (for drum cartridge)

The drum cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the drum cartridge.

●Reinstall the drum cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the drum

cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the store where you purchased the drum cartridge, or consult

the Canon Customer Help Center.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

You might not be using a Canon genuine drum cartridge.

●We recommend Canon genuine drum cartridges as replacement drum cartridges.

Consumables(P. 460)

Amount remaining in tnr. cart. cannot be displayed correctly./Amount in cart.

cannot be displ. correctly. (for toner cartridge)

The toner cartridge is not installed correctly, or there is possible trouble on the toner cartridge.

Troubleshooting

491

●Reinstall the toner cartridge. If this message does not disappear after reinstalling several times, the toner

cartridge might be possibly broken. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge, or consult

the Canon Customer Help Center.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

You might not be using a Canon genuine toner cartridge.

●We recommend Canon genuine toner cartridges as replacement toner cartridges.

Consumables(P. 460)

Cannot change the destination type of any destination that is registered to a

group.

A selected destination could not be edited because it was registered to Group Dial.

●To change the type of destination that is registered to Group Dial, rst delete the registered destination

from Group Dial. Next, change the destination type, and then register the destination to Group Dial again.

Cannot connect using Direct Connection.

An error has occurred while starting Access Point Mode.

●Set an IP address other than "192.168.22.xx". If you still cannot connect, check the subnet mask setting.

For details, contact your Network Administrator.

Setting IPv4 Address(P. 32)

Cannot connect using Direct Connection. Check the network connection.

Access Point Mode was started without the device being connected to the access point.

●Start Access Point Mode after connecting the device with the access point.

Cannot export. An error has been detected during le creation.

Exporting the address book failed.

●Check the USB cable connecting the machine to a computer.

●Check if you have access permission to the destination folder of the address book on the computer.

Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software(P. 353)

You cannot access or edit the address book if you do not have access permission to the destination folder of

the address book. If you do not have permission, log on as a user with access privileges, or change the

destination for saving the address book.

Troubleshooting

492

Cannot nd the access point.

When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, a wireless router could not be detected within a

specic period of time.

●Connect again paying attention to the time limit.

Setting Up Connection Using WPS Push Button Mode(P. 20)

Setting Up Connection Using WPS PIN Code Mode(P. 22)

An SSID of a wireless router was entered, but the entry was incorrect.

●Check the SSID and enter the correct one again.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

A wireless router could not be detected due to setting problems of the network to be connected.

●Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 467)

●If the problem persists, check the security settings of the wireless router.

Cannot import. A le error has been detected.

Importing the address book failed.

●Check the USB cable connecting the machine to a computer.

●Check if the contents of address book to be imported is correct.

Importing/Exporting Address Book Data with the Supplied Software(P. 353)

Cannot print RX data.

A received document cannot be printed due to the following:

●Replacement period of the toner cartridge or the drum cartridge is near.

●A cover is opened.

●The toner cartridge or the drum cartridge is not set.

●Paper is not set.

●An original or paper jams.

●An error has occurred.

●Check whether the problems above are occurring. If messages including causes and solutions appear on

the display, check the contents.

Cannot receive the fax. Make sure the fax was sent correctly by the sender.

The recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.

●Ask the sender to send the fax again. If you hear a beep, select <Start Receiving> to receive the fax.

Receiving Faxes(P. 203)

Troubleshooting

493

Cannot send because more than one destination is specied.

Sending a fax to multiple destinations is disabled.

●To specify multiple destinations, you need to set <Restrict Sequential Broadcast> to <Off> or <Conrm

Sequential Broadcast>. For more information, contact your Administrator.

Restricting Sequential Broadcasts(P. 329)

Cannot specify a group.

Group Dial was specied as a destination after pressing <Hook>.

●Once you select <Hook>, you cannot specify destinations in Group Dial. Select <End> on the <Specify

destination.> screen, and specify destinations to send fax documents without selecting <Hook>.

Cannot use Google Cloud Print. Server authentication failed./Google Cloud

Print not avail. Server auth err

Cloud Print could not perform server authentication, or could not acquire information for registration.

●Check whether the date and time settings are correctly specied.

<Date/Time Settings>(P. 381)

Cannot use Google Cloud Print. Server communication error./Google Cloud

Print not avail. Server comm err

Cloud Print is unavailable due to an error.

Check whether the machine is correctly connected to a wired LAN or a wireless LAN.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

●A port that is used for Cloud Print may be blocked by a rewall or other protection. Check whether the

5222 port is available with your computer.

●If a proxy server is used on the network, check whether the proxy settings on the machine and the server

are correct. For details, contact your Network Administrator.

Setting a Proxy(P. 306)

Cartridge communication error. A counterfeit or non-Canon drum cartridge

may be in use./Cart. Comm. Error A counterfeit or non-Canon drum cart.

may be in use.

The drum cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.

Troubleshooting

494

●Re-install the drum cartridge. If re-installing the drum cartridge fails to clear the error message, the drum

cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the drum cartridge or consult the Canon

Customer Help Center.

Procedure for Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 448)

Cartridge communication error. A counterfeit or non-Canon toner cartridge

may be in use./Cart. Comm. Error A counterfeit or non-Canon toner cart.

may be in use.

The toner cartridge may not be installed correctly or may be faulty.

●Re-install the toner cartridge. If re-installing the toner cartridge fails to clear the error message, the toner

cartridge may be faulty. Contact the store where you purchased the toner cartridge or consult the Canon

Customer Help Center.

Procedure for Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 444)

Check the authentication settings.

The authentication method set on the machine does not match the authentication method set on the

RADIUS server.

●Check that the same authentication method is set on this machine and the RADIUS server, and set the

correct authentication method.

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 318)

Cooling down... Wait a moment, then try again.

The temperature of the xing assembly is high.

●Wait for a while until the xing assembly cools down. After the temperature of the xing assembly falls, try

the operation again.

Cooling down... Wait a moment.

The temperature of the xing assembly is high.

●Wait for a while until the xing assembly cools down. After the temperature of the xing assembly falls,

the message will disappear.

Could not connect. (for Access Point Mode connection)

Connection in Access Point Mode failed due to an error.

●Wait a few moments and try again. If you still cannot connect, turn OFF the machine, and then turn it back

on again.

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

Troubleshooting

495

Could not connect. (for Easy Connection via PC connection)

An error has occurred while starting Easy Connection via PC (cableless setup mode).

●Press to return to the previous screen, and then try <Easy Connection via PC> again.

●If the same message still appears after retrying <Easy Connection via PC>, turn OFF the machine, and then

turn it back on again.

Could not connect. Check the PSK settings.

The network key (PSK) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.

●Check the network key (PSK) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

●If the problem persists even after checking the network key, check whether the machine is properly

installed and ready to connect to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 467)

Could not connect using the wireless LAN. Turn the main power OFF and ON,

then congure the settings again./Could not connect using the wireless LAN.

A connection failed due to an error while setting wireless LAN connection.

●Restart the machine and set again.

●If the problem persists even after restarting the machine, check whether the machine is properly installed

and ready to connect to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 467)

●If the problem persists even after checking the wireless LAN connection, check the security settings of the

wireless router.

Could not connect using WPS. Wait a moment, then congure the settings

again./Could not connect using WPS.

When automatic setting with WPS was attempted, the connection failed due to an error.

●Wait for a while, and set again. If the problem persists, check whether the wireless router supports WPS.

If WPS is supported:

Check whether the machine is properly installed and ready to connect to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 467)

If WPS is not supported:

Set using another connecting method.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Troubleshooting

496

Could not detect any connections from wireless devices.

It was not possible to detect any mobile device within the predetermined length of time.

●Connect again paying attention to the time limit.

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

Could not perform cleaning.

Paper jammed during cleaning.

●Remove the jammed paper, set paper correctly, and perform cleaning again.

Paper Jams inside the Machine(P. 514)

Cleaning the Fixing Assembly(P. 439)

Could not perform Shared Key authentication. Check the WEP settings./

Could not perform Shared Key auth. Check WEP settings.

The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.

●Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

●Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to

<Open System>.

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to

"Open System."

●Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For

more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or

contact your manufacturer.

Could not set the current date and time.

The communication failed due to a network error and a timeout occurred.

●Check the network environment that the machine connects with.

●Use <Current Date/Time Settings> to set the time manually, or, in [SNTP Settings], clear the [Use SNTP]

check box.

Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 11)

Conguring SNTP(P. 67)

Troubleshooting

497

Could not update the device time because its battery has run out. Cannot

use Google Cloud Print if the time settings are incorrect.

The machine's battery has run out and the correct time settings could not be kept.

●Set the correct time again.

Setting the Current Date and Time(P. 11)

Direct Connection terminated.

Connection with the mobile device was interrupted.

●Establish Direct Connection again.

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

Direct Connection terminated. Check the network connection./Direct

Connection terminated. Check network connection.

Connection with the mobile device was interrupted.

●Establish Direct Connection again.

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

Drum cart. end of lifetime. Replacement is recommended./Drum cart. life

end. Replcmt. recommended.

The drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.

●Replacement of the drum cartridge is recommended.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Easy Connection via PC ended because the session timed out./Easy

Connection via PC ended due to timeout.

A connection to the computer has not been established for 30 minutes since Easy Connection via PC

(cableless setup mode) started.

●Press to return to the previous screen, and then try <Easy Connection via PC> again.

Insert the drum cartridge.

The drum cartridge is not set or properly set.

Troubleshooting

498

●Properly set the drum cartridge.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

Insert the toner cartridge.

The toner cartridge is not set or properly set.

●Properly set the toner cartridge.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Maximum number of wireless devices connected using Direct Connection

has been reached. To connect other devices, terminate some of the current

connections./Maximum number of wireless devices connected w/ Direct

Connection has been reached. To connect other devices, terminate some of

current connections.

The number of directly connected mobile devices is at a maximum.

●To connect other devices by Direct Connection, disconnect current device(s) and try connecting again.

Connecting Directly (Access Point Mode)(P. 269)

No Paper: XXXX*

* <Drawer 1> or <MP Tray> is displayed for XXXX.

Paper is not loaded in the drawer or the multi-purpose tray.

●Load the paper.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Paper on which reports or lists can be printed is not loaded.

●Reports or lists can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its size.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

Paper on which received documents can be printed is not loaded.

●Received documents can be printed on A4 or Letter size paper. Load A4 or Letter size paper and set its

size. Also, set the paper type to <Plain (19 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)>, <Plain L (17 lb Bond-18 lb Bond)>, or

<Recycled (19 lb Bond-23 lb Bond)> depending on the loaded paper.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

If you print received documents on paper other than A4 or Letter size, some portions of the image may be

missing or the image may be divided and printed onto several sheets.

Troubleshooting

499

No reply from the destination.

A network cable may be disconnected, or there may be a problem in a switch.

●Check the status of the network cables and switches.

No response from the host./No response from host.

The machine is not connected to a network correctly.

●Check the machine and network settings, and connect again.

Setting Up the Network Environment(P. 14)

Paper jammed.

Paper jams.

●Remove the jammed paper, and print again (Printing may resume automatically).

Clearing Paper Jams(P. 510)

Preparing a drum cartridge is recommended./Preparing a drum cart. is

recommended.

Drum cartridge replacement time is near.

●Replace the drum cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job.

Consumables(P. 460)

Preparing a toner cartridge is recommended./Preparing a toner cart. is

recommended.

Toner cartridge replacement time is near.

●Replace the toner cartridge if you see this message before you start to print a large job.

Consumables(P. 460)

Set the correct authentication information.

The client authentication information (key and certicate, user name and password, or CA certicate) is

not set correctly.

●Check the specied authentication method and authentication information (key and certicate, user name

and password, and CA certicate).

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 318)

Troubleshooting

500

Size/Settings Mismatch

The paper size setting on the operation panel does not match the loaded paper size.

●Match the paper size setting specied in <Paper Settings> and the size of the paper that is actually loaded.

To use the loaded paper

Change the setting of <Paper Settings> to match the loaded paper size.

Specifying Paper Size and Type(P. 145)

If printing from a computer, check whether the paper size setting in the printer driver matches the loaded

paper size.

To load paper without changing the settings

Load the paper with the size that is set to <Paper Settings>.

Loading Paper(P. 132)

Specifying and registering new destinations is restricted.

Only destinations that are registered in the Address Book can be specied to send a fax or e-mail.

●To enter a new destination with the operation panel, or add or edit it in the Address Book, you need to set

<Restrict New Destinations> to <Off>. For more information, contact your Administrator.

Restricting New Destinations that Can Be Specied(P. 327)

The connection with the PC has been lost. Check the connection.

The connection to the computer was lost during a scan.

●Check the connection between the machine and the computer.

Preparing to Use the Machine as a Scanner(P. 77)

The drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime./Drum cart. reached

end of lifetime.

The drum cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.

●Replace the drum cartridge with a new one.

Replacing the Drum Cartridge(P. 447)

The memory is full.

A fax could not be sent or received, or an original could not be scanned due to insucient memory

space.

●If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.

●If a received document is stored to memory, print or delete it.

Troubleshooting

501

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 213)

●If sending an original with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.

●If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the original.

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

●If scanning, change the le format to reduce its le size.

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

The memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Do you want to print?/The

memory is full. Scanning will be canceled. Print?

The document being printed contains a page with a very large amount of data.

●Select whether to print as far as the portion scanned into memory or to cancel the job.

●Copy the document in two or more parts.

The number of entered characters is incorrect or invalid characters are

used./Incorrect number of characters/invalid characters entered.

The network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of a wireless router is not entered correctly.

●Check the network key (the WPA/WPA2-PSK or WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine

again. For more information about how to check the network key, see the instruction manuals for your

networking devices or contact your manufacturer.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

The WEP key is not set correctly. Check the WEP settings.

The network key (the WEP key) of a wireless router to be connected is not set to the machine correctly.

●Check the network key (the WEP key) of the wireless router, and set it to the machine again.

Checking the SSID and Network Key(P. 30)

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

The authentication method of the machine is set to <Shared Key>, but that of the wireless router is set to

"Open System."

●Connect again by selecting a wireless router or by manually changing the WEP authentication method to

<Open System>.

Setting Up Connection by Selecting a Wireless Router(P. 24)

Setting Up Connection by Specifying Detailed Settings(P. 27)

●Change the WEP authentication method to "Shared Key" at the wireless router, and connect again. For

more information about how to change, see the instruction manuals for your networking devices or

contact your manufacturer.

Troubleshooting

502

Toner cart. end of lifetime. Replacement is recommended./Toner cart. life

end. Replcmt. recommended.

The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.

●Replacement of the toner cartridge is recommended.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime./Toner cart. reached end

of lifetime.

The toner cartridge has reached the end of its lifetime.

●Replace the toner cartridge with a new one.

Replacing the Toner Cartridge(P. 443)

Turn the main power OFF and ON. If the device does not recover, contact

your dealer or service representative.

An error has occurred with the machine.

●Turn OFF the power switch, wait 10 seconds, and turn it back ON. If the problem persists, turn OFF the

power switch, disconnect the power cord, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon

help line. Be sure to provide the displayed <Ennn-nnnn>.

Use Remote UI to set the information necessary for authentication./Use

Remote UI to set info. necessary for authentication.

The IEEE 802.1X settings are incorrect.

●Check whether [Login Name] is set correctly.

●Check whether the [Use TLS], [Use TTLS], or [Use PEAP] check box is selected.

●If using TLS, check whether a "key and certicate" is registered.

●If using TTLS or PEAP, check whether a user name and password are set correctly.

Conguring IEEE 802.1X Authentication Settings(P. 318)

Troubleshooting

503

Countermeasures for Each Error Code

2KUU-090

If printing is not successful or you cannot send or receive a fax or scanned document, or another error occurs, that

error appears on a report or a message on the <Status Monitor> screen as a three-digit number (error code). Check

the following to nd out causes and solutions for each error code. For how to print an error report and information in

the report, see <Status Monitor> Screen(P. 115) .

#001

An original jams in the feeder.

●Remove the jammed original.

Paper Jams in the Feeder(P. 511)

#003

A fax could not be sent or received due to its large data size.

●When sending a fax: Reduce the resolution, and scan the original a portion at a time.

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

●When receiving a fax: Ask the sender to divide the original into multiple sections or reduce the resolution

before sending.

#005

A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine did not respond within 35 seconds.

●When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to

check the machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

#012

A fax could not be sent because the recipient's machine ran out of paper.

●Ask the recipient to reload the paper.

Troubleshooting

504

#018

A fax could not be sent since the recipient's machine did not respond because the line was busy or for

other reasons.

●When the recipient's machine is turned OFF or the line is busy, a fax may not be sent. Ask the recipient to

check the machine status. When sending the fax overseas, insert pauses in the fax number.

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

#022

Sending of a fax from a computer is disabled.

●To send a fax from a computer, you need to set <Allow Fax Driver TX> to <On>. For more information,

contact your Administrator.

Restricting Fax Sending from a Computer(P. 329)

A fax could not be forwarded because the specied destination was deleted from the Address Book.

●Register the forwarding destination again. If the documents that failed to be forwarded remain in

memory, you can forward it again.

Registering Destinations(P. 161)

Printing/Resending/Deleting Documents that Failed to be Forwarded(P. 215)

#037

Memory is full.

●If a sending or printing job is queued, wait until the job is completed.

●If a received document is stored to memory, print or delete it.

Saving Received Documents into the Machine (Memory Reception)(P. 213)

●If sending a document with many pages, divide it into multiple sections.

●If sending a fax, reduce the resolution to scan the document.

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

●If several destinations are specied in the fax driver, specify only one destination.

#054

A fax could not be sent because the specied destination fax number exceeded 40 digits.

●Specify the destination fax number within 40 digits.

#099

Printing, sending, or receiving was canceled.

Troubleshooting

505

●When you cancel an operation, this error code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print, send, or receive

documents again as necessary.

#752

E-mail sending was impossible because an incorrect SMTP server name was set.

●Check the SMTP server name, and correct the setting.

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 79)

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82)

E-mail sending was impossible because an incorrect domain name was set.

●Check the domain name, and correct the setting.

Conguring DNS(P. 57)

E-mail sending was impossible because the machine was not connected to a network correctly.

●Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 467)

#753

Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or stored in the shared folder because the LAN cable is

disconnected.

●Check whether the LAN cable is connected correctly.

Connecting to a Wired LAN(P. 17)

#755

Scanned data could not be sent as e-mail or stored in the shared folder because TCP/IP was not working

correctly.

●Check <TCP/IP Settings>, and set correctly.

<Network Settings>(P. 363)

An IP address is not set.

●Set the IP address correctly.

Setting IP Addresses(P. 31)

The machine cannot communicate with devices on a network immediately after the machine starts up

because the waiting time for the start of the communication is set.

●The machine cannot start communicating immediately after it is turned ON. Wait until the set time for

<Waiting Time for Connection at Startup> passes after turning ON the machine, and send again.

Setting a Wait Time for Connecting to a Network(P. 56)

#801

When communicating with an SMTP server to send an e-mail, a timeout error occurred from the server.

Troubleshooting

506

●Check whether SMTP is running on the network correctly.

●Check whether the machine is properly installed and correctly connected to the network.

Installation/Settings Problems(P. 467)

When communicating with the SMTP server, an error returned from the server.

●Check whether the SMTP server is set correctly.

A destination is not set correctly.

●Check whether the destination is set correctly.

When storing a scanned original into the shared folder, an error occurred from the folder.

●Check whether the shared folder and the computer that has the shared folder are running correctly.

The incorrect folder name or password was specied when storing to the shared folder.

●Check the destination settings.

#802

The SMTP/POP3 server name is not set correctly.

●Set the SMTP/POP3 server name correctly.

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 79)

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82)

#804

No access privileges to access the shared folder are granted.

●Assign the privilege for writing data to the storage folder to the sender (user name registered in the

destination). For details, contact your Network Administrator.

The incorrect folder name was specied when storing to the shared folder.

●Check the destination settings.

#806

When storing data to a shared folder, an incorrect user name or password was specied.

●The same user name and password as those registered in a shared folder must be registered in the

Address Book.

Setting a Shared Folder as a Save Location(P. 86)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

When sending an e-mail, an incorrect destination was specied.

●Enter the correct e-mail address, and send the message again. If the destination that was registered in the

Address Book was used, check whether the e-mail address is correct.

Registering Destinations(P. 161)

Troubleshooting

507

#810

An error has been returned from the POP3 server when sending an e-mail.

●Check whether the POP3 server is set correctly.

●Check whether your mail server and network are running correctly. For more information, contact your

Network Administrator.

#813

The login name or the password that is used on the POP3 server is not set correctly.

●Correctly enter login name or the password that is used on the POP3 server.

#839

A user name and password that are used for SMTP authentication are not set correctly.

●Set the user name and password correctly.

Conguring Basic E-Mail Settings(P. 79)

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82)

#841

When sending an e-mail, an encryption algorithm that is common to the mail server is not present.

●Clear the [Use TLS for SMTP] check box for the SMTP server.

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82)

●Add the common encryption algorithm to the mail server settings.

A TLS server certicate verication error has occurred during communication with the SMTP server.

●Check that the CA certicate that signed the TLS server certicate on the SMTP server side is registered to

the machine by using the Remote UI.

●Check that the TLS server certicate on the SMTP server side is valid.

●Check that the TLS server certicate is not a self-signed certicate.

#844

TLS encrypted communication to a POP3 server failed when sending an e-mail with POP before SMTP.

●Check the TLS encrypted communication settings in the POP3 server.

●Clear the [Use TLS for POP] check box for the POP3 server. If the problem persists, clear the [Use POP

Authentication Before Sending] check box, and set the communication setting to a setting other than POP

before SMTP.

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82)

Troubleshooting

508

When verifying a TLS server certicate to communicate to the POP3 server, a verication error occurred.

●Check that the CA certicate that signed the TLS server certicate on the POP3 server side is registered to

the machine by using the Remote UI.

●Check that the TLS server certicate on the POP3 server side is valid.

●Check that the TLS server certicate is not a self-signed certicate.

#846

An e-mail could not be sent due to a POP authentication failure.

●Check the setting, and try again.

Conguring E-Mail Communication Settings(P. 82)

#852

The machine turns OFF for some reason.

●Check whether the power plug is inserted into an outlet rmly.

#853

A document could not be printed because its data size exceeded the machine's upper processing

capability.

●The machine may not be able to print documents with many pages. Reduce the number of pages per

printing, or print when no print job is queued or no document is being printed. If you are still unable to

print, check the document data for any defects.

Printing was canceled from the computer.

●If you cancel an operation when the print data is being sent to the machine from a computer, this error

code is displayed, but this is not abnormal. Print again as necessary.

A PC fax was sent after setting a resolution not guaranteed on the machine.

●Reduce the resolution setting in the fax driver.

#995

A document waiting to be sent was canceled.

●Send the document again as necessary.

Troubleshooting

509

Clearing Paper Jams

2KUU-091

If a paper jams, <Paper jammed.> is displayed on the screen. Press <Next> ( ) to display simple solutions. If it is

dicult to understand the procedures on the display, see the following sections to clear jams.

Feeder

Paper Jams in the

Feeder(P. 511)

Inside of the machine

Paper Jams inside the

Machine(P. 514)

Back side

Paper Jams inside the

Machine(P. 514)

When removing the jammed paper, do not turn OFF the machine

●Turning OFF the machine deletes the data that is being printed. Be especially careful when receiving fax

documents.

If paper tears

●Remove all the paper fragments to prevent them from becoming jammed.

If paper jams repeatedly

●Tap the paper stack on a at surface to even the edges of the paper before loading it into the machine.

●Check that the paper is appropriate for the machine. Available Paper(P. 538)

●Check that no jammed paper fragments remain in the machine.

●If you use paper with a coarse surface, set <Paper Type> to <Bond 1 (16 lb Bond-27 lb Bond)> or <Bond 2 (28

lb Bond-60 lb Cover)>.

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Drawer(P. 146)

Specifying Paper Size and Type in the Multi-Purpose Tray(P. 147)

Printing from a Computer(P. 224)

Do not forcibly remove the jammed paper from the machine

●Forcibly removing the paper may damage parts. If you are not able to remove the paper, contact your local

authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line. When a Problem Cannot Be Solved(P. 518)

Troubleshooting

510

Paper Jams in the Feeder

2KUU-092

If there are originals placed in the feeder, remove them rst. Then, follow the procedure below. Do not forcibly remove

jammed paper from the machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.

Paper Jams in the Feeder (MF269dw / MF269dw VP)(P. 511)

Paper Jams in the Feeder (MF267dw / MF264dw)(P. 512)

Paper Jams in the Feeder (MF269dw / MF269dw VP)

1Remove the jammed original from the feeder cover.

1Open the feeder cover.

2Move the lever to unlock.

3Gently pull out the original.

Troubleshooting

511

2Remove the jammed original from the inner cover inside the feeder.

1Hold the green knob, and open the inner cover.

2Gently pull out the original.

3Close the inner cover.

3Return the lever back in place, and close the feeder cover.

4Place the original again.

Paper Jams in the Feeder (MF267dw / MF264dw)

1Open the feeder cover.

Troubleshooting

512

2Gently pull out the original.

3Close the feeder cover.

4Place the original again.

Troubleshooting

513

Paper Jams inside the Machine

2KUU-093

Remove the jammed paper according to the procedure below. Do not forcibly remove jammed paper from the

machine. If the jammed paper cannot be removed easily, proceed to the next step.

1Lift the operation panel.

●The operation panel cannot be opened if the feeder is not completely closed. Forcing the operation panel up

may cause damage.

2Open the toner cover.

3Remove the cartridges.

1Remove the toner cartridge.

Troubleshooting

514

Do not shake or tilt the toner cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the toner cartridge,

such as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the toner cartridge to leak.

Remove the toner cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.

2Remove the drum cartridge.

Do not shake or tilt the drum cartridge. Also, make sure to avoid applying shocks to the drum cartridge,

such as by hitting it against something. Doing so may cause the toner left in the drum cartridge to leak.

Remove the drum cartridge gently at the same angle as the slot.

4Gently pull out the paper.

5Check whether paper is jammed inside the paper exit guide.

1Pull out toward you while pressing the button ( ) to open the paper exit guide.

Troubleshooting

515

2Gently pull out the paper.

3Close the paper exit guide.

6Check whether paper is jammed inside the machine.

1Gently pull out the paper.

●Hold both edges of the paper, pull the leading edge of the paper down, and then pull it out.

7Check whether paper is jammed in the back cover.

1Open the back cover.

2Gently pull out the paper.

Troubleshooting

516

3Close the back cover.

8Insert the cartridges.

1Insert the drum cartridge.

2Insert the toner cartridge.

9Close the toner cover, and lower the operation panel.

➠The paper jam message disappears, and the machine is ready to print.

Troubleshooting

517

When a Problem Cannot Be Solved

2KUU-094

If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact your local authorized Canon

dealer or the Canon help line.

Do not disassemble or repair the machine yourself

●If you disassemble or repair the machine yourself, it may not be covered by warranty.

Customer Support (U.S.A.)

If you cannot solve a problem by referring to the information in this chapter, contact the Canon Customer Care

Center at 1-800-OK-CANON, Monday through Friday, between 8:00 A.M. and 8:00 P.M. EST. On-line support is

available 24 hours a day at http://www.canontechsupport.com.

Customer Support (Canada)

Canon Canada Inc., offers a full range of customer technical support options*:

●To perform step-by-step troubleshooting, send an e-mail to technical support, download drivers or support

documents, or view answers to frequently asked questions, visit http://www.canon.ca/.

●Free live technical support is available from 9 A.M. to 8 P.M. EST, Monday through Friday (excluding holidays),

for products still under warranty 1-800-OK-CANON.

●To nd the location of the authorized service facility nearest you, visit http://www.canon.ca/ or call 1-800-OK-

CANON.

●If the problem cannot be corrected via these technical support options, repair options are available from the

technical support personnel via the Web site at http://www.canon.ca/.

*Available support options are subject to change without notice.

◼When Contacting Canon

When contacting us, have the following information ready:

●Product name (MF269dw / MF267dw / MF264dw / MF269dw VP)

●Dealer where you purchased the machine

●Details about your problem (such as what you did and what happened as a result)

●Serial number (found on the label on the back side of the machine)

Troubleshooting

518

Checking the serial number from the operation panel

●Press <Device Information> <Serial Number>.

Troubleshooting

519

Appendix

Appendix ............................................................................................................................................................. 521

Third Party Software ......................................................................................................................................... 522

Feature Highlights ............................................................................................................................................ 523

Going Green and Saving Money ................................................................................................................... 524

Improving Eciency ..................................................................................................................................... 526

Going Digital ................................................................................................................................................ 528

So Much More .............................................................................................................................................. 530

Specications .................................................................................................................................................... 532

Main Unit ...................................................................................................................................................... 533

Feeder .......................................................................................................................................................... 536

Available Paper ............................................................................................................................................. 538

Fax Function ................................................................................................................................................. 541

Scan Function ............................................................................................................................................... 542

Printer Functions .......................................................................................................................................... 543

Management Functions ................................................................................................................................ 545

System Environment .................................................................................................................................... 546

Network Environment .................................................................................................................................. 548

Manuals and Their Contents ............................................................................................................................. 549

Using User's Guide ............................................................................................................................................ 550

Screen Layout of User's Guide ...................................................................................................................... 551

Viewing User's Guide .................................................................................................................................... 554

Basic Windows Operations ............................................................................................................................... 556

Menu Route Map ............................................................................................................................................... 564

Notice ................................................................................................................................................................. 565

Appendix

520

Appendix

2KUU-095

This chapter contains technical specications of this machine, instructions on how to use the User's Guide, disclaimers,

◼Machine Specications

See the following section(s) when you want to check the specications of the machine, network environment, print

function, and so on.

Specications(P. 532)

◼Referencing the Manual of This Machine

See the rst of the following sections when you want to be sure of the kinds of the manuals describing the functions of

the machine and how to operate the machine. When you want to know how to read and use the User's Guide (this

manual), see the second section.

Manuals and Their Contents(P. 549)

Using User's Guide(P. 550)

◼Others

See the following section(s) when you want to get useful information, and check the disclaimers and copyright

information.

Third Party Software(P. 522)

Feature Highlights(P. 523)

Basic Windows Operations(P. 556)

Menu Route Map(P. 564)

Notice(P. 565)

Appendix

521

Third Party Software

2KUU-096

For information related to third-party software, click the following icon(s).

Appendix

522

Feature Highlights

2KUU-097

This section describes tips for leveraging the features of the machine by category. You can make use of the features

according to your intended purposes and operating environment.

Going Green and Saving Money(P. 524)

Improving Eciency(P. 526)

Going Digital(P. 528)

So Much More(P. 530)

Appendix

523

Going Green and Saving Money

2KUU-098

There are lots of ways to cut back on paper, toner, power, and expenses.

2-Sided Printing Print Multiple Pages on a Single Sheet

You can use 2-sided printing for copies, print jobs sent from

your computer, and even incoming faxes. Because you'll

only be using half the paper you would otherwise, you can

cut your paper costs in half. To save even more, combine 2-

sided printing with N on 1 printing of multiple pages on one

sheet of paper. You can print up to 32 pages on a single

sheet, which is both economical and environmentally

friendly.

Basic Copy Operations(P. 173)

Printing from a Computer(P. 224)

<Fax Settings>(P. 389) <RX Print Settings> <Print on

Both Sides>

To really start saving paper, shrink multiple pages

onto one side of a sheet - 2 or 4 pages for copies,

and up to 16 pages for print jobs sent from your

computer. This is even more effective when used

together with 2-sided printing.

Copying Multiple Documents onto One Sheet (N

on 1)(P. 185)

Printing from a Computer(P. 224)

Sleep Mode Paperless Faxing

Appendix

524

For saving energy and money, a sleep mode that

powers down a machine when nobody is using it has

become an essential feature. This machine will enter

sleep mode automatically, and can also be put to

sleep whenever you want. Press once to put the

machine to sleep. Press it again to instantly wake the

machine back into action.

Entering Sleep Mode(P. 159)

Assume you need paper to fax? Those old paper printouts

you always make are a thing of the past. Send documents

by fax just as they are, created on your computer. It's

paperless, so it's fast. And, received documents are rst

stored in memory, allowing you to print out only those

needed and eliminating worry about paper getting used on

direct mailings, etc.

Sending Faxes from Your Computer (PC Fax)(P. 219)

Saving Received Documents into the Machine

(Memory Reception)(P. 213)

Canon strives to be environmentally and energy conscious in all aspects of its

operations. Click here to learn about the ways in which Canon is helping to protect the

environment.

Appendix

525

Improving Eciency

2KUU-099

Here are some simple operations that can make complicated tasks more ecient.

Address Book Shortcut Keys for Copying and Scanning

Entering fax and e-mail addresses in the Address Book

saves you the inconvenience of entering them number-

by-number, letter-by-letter every time you have

something to send. Display the addresses you use most

frequently with the <One-Touch> feature to quickly and

easily send what you need to the people who need it.

You can save your Address Book data on your computer

and feel secure knowing that your important contact

information is backed up.

Registering Destinations(P. 161)

Registering Destinations from Remote UI(P. 347)

Basic Operations for Sending Faxes(P. 195)

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Saving/Loading Address Book from Remote

UI(P. 351)

Take advantage of the shortcut keys on the operation

panel so you don't have to recongure the same settings

over and over again. Use <Paper Save> ( ) to

save paper by copying two or four pages onto one sheet.

If you are using a machine capable of 2-sided printing,

you can also copy on both sides of the sheet. For

scanning, use <Scan -> PC1> ( ) or <Scan -> PC2>

to preset your favorite save destinations, scan types, and

le formats. Just place your originals and press the

shortcut to scan.

Using <Paper Save Copy>(P. 187)

Scanning Using the Shortcut Key(P. 236)

Appendix

526

Remote Management with Remote UI Make Print Settings Quickly with Intuitive

Operation

Remote UI lets you manage a lot from your computer, all

without having to go over to the machine. Congure

settings and keep an eye on the machine's status with an

intuitive, easy-to-understand Web browser interface that

you'll master immediately. Save your time and energy for

things other than taking care of the machine.

Managing the Machine from a Computer (Remote UI)

(P. 334)

You can easily specify the page layout as well as

binding position, switching between 1-sided and 2-

sided printing, etc. intuitively on the preview image in

the printer driver. The simple click-operation allows

you to conveniently make settings while viewing how

settings are applied.

Printing from a Computer(P. 224)

Appendix

527

Going Digital

2KUU-09A

Digitalizing a document enables editing using a computer as well as reducing cost and time by using e-mail.

Scan and E-Mail Scan and Share

E-mail scanned originals without even turning on

your computer. Just convert your scanned original

into an e-mail attachment right from the machine. If

you're one of those people who'd rather send a fax

than mess around with a computer, this feature is for

you.

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Say you've got a paper copy of a report for a company-wide

meeting. Scan it, convert it, and now everyone can see it.

It's saved directly in a shared folder on your network, so

there's no need to print out copies and pass them out. Once

you start talking about hundreds of pages of documents

that everyone needs, there's just no other way to go.

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Scan Only What You Need Searchable PDFs

Appendix

528

What if you're scanning a whole page of a newspaper but

all you're really interested in is a headline and a photo?

Use ScanGear MF. You can select what you want from a

preview, and then have the scanner disregard the rest.

Otherwise you'll have to use an editing program to crop

out everything you don't need.

Using ScanGear MF(P. 264)

●Using your product to scan, print or otherwise

reproduce certain documents, and the use of

such images as scanned, printed or otherwise

reproduced by your product, may be

prohibited by law and may result in criminal

and/or civil liability. If you are uncertain about

the legality of using your product to scan,

print or otherwise reproduce any particular

document, and/or of the use of the images

scanned, printed or otherwise reproduced,

you should consult in advance with your legal

advisor for guidance.

Searching of text in a PDF can be done with a

"searchable PDF." By scanning an original with both

text and images, text portions are converted by OCR

into text data. In addition to being able to search for

text information, you can also copy required portions

into an Excel spreadsheet or Word document in

Microsoft Oce. Eliminate the need to type in

customer data, addresses, etc. from scratch.

Basic Operations for Scanning Originals(P. 233)

Using Your Computer to Scan (Remote Scan)

(P. 261)

Add Images to a Work in Progress

Some applications work with the machine to let you easily import scanned

images directly into documents you're working on. This way you can skip the

steps of opening a separate application just for receiving the scanned images

and then exporting them to the application you're really using.

Scanning Documents from an Application(P. 262)

Appendix

529

So Much More

2KUU-09C

There are a variety of features for whatever you need to do - at home, in the oce, or even on the road.

Using a smartphone/tablet Easy Printing with Google Cloud Print

At times such as when you want to quickly print out a

proposal you completed on a tablet while travelling to a

business destination, Canon PRINT Business comes in handy.

Even in environments without a wireless LAN router, you can

connect to the machine with a mobile device wirelessly and

directly.

PCless, quick, and easy! An even broader range of possibilities

for work/play with functionality made for this age of speed.

Linking with Mobile Devices(P. 266)

Hook up to Google Cloud Print with your laptop or

cell phone, send your data, and out come your

printed documents. With this machine, Google

Cloud Print, and your mobile device, print whenever

you want from wherever you want.

Using Google Cloud Print(P. 286)

Go Wireless Get Faxes Wherever You Go

Appendix

530

No cables, easy installation, simple maintenance. If you've

got a WPS wireless LAN router, bypass the settings process

altogether and be ready to go before you know it. Enjoy the

kind of clutter-free and easy to use document system that

you can only get from wireless. Compatible with IEEE

802.11b/g/n for stress-free wireless, and also supports WEP

and WPA/WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP) for tighter security.

Connecting to a Wireless LAN(P. 18)

Never worry about missing a fax when you're out of

the oce. Set a forwarding destination and any fax

that comes in on the machine will go right to you.

Better yet, make the forwarding destination the e-

mail address for your tablet or mobile.

Forwarding the Received Documents

Automatically(P. 215)

Appendix

531

Specications

2KUU-09E

Specications are subject to change without notice for product improvement or future release.

◼Machine Specications

Main Unit(P. 533)

Feeder(P. 536)

Available Paper(P. 538)

◼Functional Specications

Fax Function(P. 541)

Scan Function(P. 542)

Printer Functions(P. 543)

Management Functions(P. 545)

◼Environment To Use the Machine

System Environment(P. 546)

Network Environment(P. 548)

Appendix

532

Main Unit

2KUU-09F

●For information on paper sizes and types for each paper source, see " Available Paper(P. 538) ."

Name Canon imageCLASS MF269dw / MF267dw / MF264dw / MF269dw VP

Type Desktop

Color Supported Black and White

Resolution for Reading 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Resolution for Writing 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Number of Tones 256

Acceptable Originals Up to 8 1/2" x 11 3/4" (215.9 mm x 297.0 mm)

Maximum thickness of original: 1 5/8" (40 mm)

Copy Size/Copy Paper Paper Sizes

●Max: 8 1/2" x 14" (215.9 mm x 355.6 mm)*1

●Min: 3" x 5" (76.2 mm x 127 mm)*1

Margin

Top:

●When copying via the platen glass

1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 2.0 mm)

●When copying via the feeder

1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 3.0 mm)

Left or Right:

●When copying via the platen glass

1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 2.0 mm)

●When copying via the feeder

1/4" ± 1/8" (5 mm ± 3.0 mm)

Paper Weight

●16 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (60 g/m² to 163 g/m²)

Paper Type Available Paper(P. 538)

Warm-Up Time *2 After Powering ON

15.0 seconds or less

Returning from the Sleep mode

Appendix

533

1.6 seconds or less

First Copy Time

(Letter)

Approx. 8.0 seconds

Copy Speed *3

(Letter)

30.0 sheets/minute

Scanning Speed

(Letter)

2.5 seconds or less (300 dpi x 600 dpi)

Magnication 25 % to 400 % (in 1 % increments)

Paper Feeding System/Capacity *4 Drawer

250 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))/250 sheets (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²))

Multi-Purpose Tray

1 sheet (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))/1 sheet (17 lb Bond (64 g/m²))

Paper Output System/Capacity *4 100 sheets (18 lb Bond (68 g/m²))

Multiple Copies 999 sheets

Power Source AC 120 V - 127 V, 3.9 A, 60 Hz

Power Consumption *2 Maximum Power Consumption

1,080 W or less

During Sleep Mode

●Approx. 0.7 W (USB connection)

●Approx. 0.7 W (wired LAN connection)

●Approx. 0.7 W (wireless LAN connection)

With the Main Power Turned OFF

0.5 W or less

Dimensions

(W x D x H)

MF269dw:

15 3/8" x 16" x 14 3/4" (390 mm x 405 mm x 375 mm)

MF267dw:

15 3/8" x 16" x 14 3/4" (390 mm x 405 mm x 375 mm)

MF264dw:

15 3/8" x 16" x 14 3/4" (390 mm x 405 mm x 375 mm)

MF269dw VP:

15 3/8" x 16" x 14 3/4" (390 mm x 405 mm x 375 mm)

Weight MF269dw / MF269dw VP:

Main Unit *5

Appendix

534

Approx. 29.3 lb (13.3 kg)

Consumables

Consumables(P. 460)

MF267dw / MF264dw:

Main Unit *5

Approx. 27.3 lb (12.4 kg)

Consumables

Consumables(P. 460)

Installation Space See "Getting Started"

Manuals and Their Contents(P. 549)

Memory Capacity RAM: 256 MB

Environmental Conditions Temperature: 50°F to 86°F (10°C to 30°C)

Humidity: 20 % to 80 % RH (no condensation)

*1Including multi-purpose tray

*2May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.

*3Copy/print speeds are measured based on internal testing using Letter size paper copied/printed with 100% copy/print

ratio to original on one-sided paper. Internal testing involved continuously copying/printing the same one page of

content on plain paper (copy speed is tested by copying on the platen glass). Copy/print speeds may vary depending on

paper type, paper size or paper feeding direction.

The device may automatically pause or slow down in order to adjust printer condition such as controlling temperature of

a certain unit or limiting impact to image quality during continuous copying/printing.

*4May vary depending on the installation environment and paper to use.

*5The toner cartridge and the drum cartridge are not included.

Appendix

535

Feeder

2KUU-09H

Original Feeding Mechanism MF269dw / MF269dw VP:

Automatic 2-Sided Document Feeder

MF267dw / MF264dw:

Automatic 1-Sided Document Feeder

Original Size *1 /Type MF269dw / MF269dw VP:

Size of Originals

●Max : 8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 356 mm)

●Min : 5 1/2" x 5" (140 mm x 127 mm)

Weight of Originals

●1-Sided Originals: 13 lb Bond to 27.9 lb Bond (50 g/m² to 105 g/m²) (1 Sheet: 13 lb Bond to 47 lb

Cover (50 g/m² to 128 g/m²))

●2-Sided Originals: 16 lb Bond to 27.9 lb Bond (60 g/m² to 105 g/m²)

MF267dw / MF264dw:

Size of Originals

●Max: 8 1/2" x 14" (216 mm x 356 mm)

●Min: 5 7/8" x 4 1/8" (148 mm x 105 mm)

Weight of Originals

●1-Sided Originals: 13 lb Bond to 27.9 lb Bond (50 g/m² to 105 g/m²) (1 Sheet: 13 lb Bond to 47

lb Cover (50 g/m² to 128 g/m²))

Original Tray Capacity

(Letter)

MF269dw / MF269dw VP:

50 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))

MF267dw / MF264dw:

35 sheets (21 lb Bond (80 g/m²))

Original Scanning Speed MF269dw / MF269dw VP:

Copying (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Letter)

1-Sided Scanning:

23.0 pages/minute

2-Sided Scanning:

8.0 pages/minute

Scanning (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Letter) *2

1-Sided Scanning:

●Full Color (PDF): 7.7 pages/minute

●Black and White (TIFF): 11.6 pages/minute

2-Sided Scanning:

●Full Color (PDF): 2.4 pages/minute

●Black and White (TIFF): 4.0 pages/minute

MF267dw / MF264dw:

Appendix

536

Copying (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Letter)

21.0 pages/minute

Scanning (300 dpi x 600 dpi, Letter) *2

●Full Color (PDF): 8.0 pages/minute

●Black and White (TIFF): 10.6 pages/minute

*1To maintain the optimum image quality, it is recommended to scan A6 size original(s) from the platen glass.

*2May vary depending on the environment and conditions under which the machine is being used.

Appendix

537

Available Paper

2KUU-09J

The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table.

◼Supported Paper Sizes

: Available : Unavailable

Paper Sizes Drawer Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1

A4 *2

A5 *3

A6 *4

Legal

Letter *2

Statement

Executive

Ocio

Ocio (Brazil)

Ocio (Mexico)

Letter (Government)

Legal (Government)

Foolscap

Foolscap (Australia)

Legal (India)

3x5inch

Appendix

538

Paper Sizes Drawer Multi-Purpose Tray Automatic 2-Sided Printing *1

F4A

Envelope No. 10 (COM10)

Envelope Monarch

Envelope C5

Envelope DL

Custom *5 *5

*1Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*2Allows you to print received fax documents.

*3If feeding in landscape orientation, can be specied only from the printer driver.

*4Available only from the printer driver.

*5The custom size ranging from 3" x 5" (76.2 x 127.0 mm) to 8 1/2" x 14" (215.9 x 355.6 mm) is available.

◼Supported Paper Types

Chlorine-free paper can be used with this machine.

: Available : Unavailable

Paper Type Drawer Multi-Purpose

Tray

Automatic 2-Sided

Printing *1

Plain 19 to 23 lb Bond (71 to 89 g/m²) *2

Plain L 17 to 18 lb Bond (61 to 70 g/m²) *2

Plain L2 16 lb Bond (60 g/m²) *2

Heavy 1 24 to 28 lb Bond (90 to 105 g/m²) *2

Heavy 2 29 to 32 lb Bond (106 to 120 g/m²)

Heavy 3 33 to 60 lb Cover (121 to 163 g/m²)

Heavy 4 *3 33 to 60 lb Cover (121 to 163 g/m²)

Recycled 19 to 23 lb Bond (71 to 89 g/m²) *2

Bond 1 16 to 27 lb Bond (60 to 104 g/m²) *2

Appendix

539

Paper Type Drawer Multi-Purpose

Tray

Automatic 2-Sided

Printing *1

Bond 2 28 lb Bond to 60 lb Cover (105 to 163 g/m²)

Index Card 33 to 60 lb Cover (121 to 163 g/m²)

Labels

Envelope

Envelope H *4

*1Automatic 2-sided printing is available without replacing paper.

*2Usable paper sizes are A4, Legal, Letter, Ocio, Ocio (Brazil), Ocio (Mexico), Legal (India), Foolscap/Folio, and F4A.

*3When using paper of 33 to 60 lb Cover (121 to 163 g/m²) with <Heavy 3> specied, select this paper type if toner is not

fully xed and the printouts are faded.

*4Select this paper type if toner is not fully xed and the printouts are faded when the paper type is set to <Envelope>.

Appendix

540

Fax Function

2KUU-09K

Telephone Line Used *1 Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN)

Scan Line Density Normal

G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 3.85 line/mm

Fine

G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 7.7 line/mm

Superne

G3: 8 pels*2/mm x 15.4 line/mm

Transmission Speed *3 Super G3: 33.6 kbps

G3: 14.4 kbps

Compression Method MH, MR, MMR

Transmission Type Super G3, G3

Max. Sending Original Sizes Letter

Receiving Paper Sizes Available Paper(P. 538)

Transmission Times Approx. 3.0 seconds/page*4

*1Depending on your locale or your telephone connection, you may be unable to perform data communication. In this

case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer or the Canon help line.

*2Pels stands for picture elements (pixels).

*3With the Automatic Fallback function.

*4Based on ITU-T (ITU Telecommunication Standardization Sector) Standard Chart No. 1, JBIG standard mode.

Appendix

541

Scan Function

2KUU-09L

Type Color Scanner

Original Scanning Size (Max) Scanning on Platen Glass

Same as "Acceptable Originals" in "Main Unit"

Main Unit(P. 533)

Scanning from Feeder

Same as "Size of Originals" in "Feeder"

Feeder(P. 536)

Resolution (Max) 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Scanning Speed Scanning on Platen Glass

Same as "Scanning Speed" in "Main Unit"

Main Unit(P. 533)

Scanning from Feeder

Same as "Original Scanning Speed" in "Feeder"

Feeder(P. 536)

Interface USB

USB 1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed

Wired LAN

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Protocol Supported *SMB (TCP/IP), SMTP, TCP/IP, USB

Output Format (Push Scan) TIFF (MMR), JPEG (Single-Page), PDF

* Some formats are not supported depending on the function.

Appendix

542

Printer Functions

2KUU-09R

◼UFR II-LT Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 538)

Print Speed Same as "Copy Speed" in "Main Unit"

Main Unit(P. 533)

Resolution Data Processing

1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) UFR II-LT

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD

Resident Fonts None

Interface USB

USB 1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed

Wired LAN

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

◼PCL Printer Function

Type Internal

Print Size Available Paper(P. 538)

Print Speed Same as "Copy Speed" in "Main Unit"

Main Unit(P. 533)

Resolution Data Processing

1200 dpi x 1200 dpi, 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Page Description Language (PDL) PCL6, PCL5e

Protocol Supported TCP/IP: LPD, Port9100, IPP, IPPS, WSD

Appendix

543

Resident Fonts 45 Roman

Interface USB

USB 1.1 Full-Speed, USB 2.0 Hi-Speed

Wired LAN

10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (IEEE 802.3 compliant)

Wireless LAN

IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Appendix

544

Management Functions

2KUU-09S

◼Firewall Settings

●Up to 4 IP addresses (or ranges of IP addresses) can be specied for both IPv4 and IPv6.

●Up to 10 MAC addresses can be specied.

◼Registration of Keys and Certicates

●If you install a key or CA certicate from a computer, make sure that they meet the following requirements:

Format

●Key: PKCS#12*1

●CA certicate: X.509 DER/PEM

File extension

●Key: ".p12", ".pfx"

●CA certicate: ".cer"

Public key algorithm (and key length)

●RSA (512 bits*2, 1024 bits, 2048 bits, 4096 bits)

●ECDSA (P256, P384, P521)

Certicate signature algorithm

●RSA: SHA1*3, SHA256, SHA384*4, SHA512*4, MD2*5, MD5*5

●ECDSA: SHA1*3, SHA256, SHA384, SHA512

*1Requirements for the certicate contained in a key are pursuant to CA certicates.

*2The signature algorithm is available only for SHA1-RSA or SHA256-RSA.

*3Available only for a generated key and certicate signature request (CSR) or installation from the Remote UI.

*4Available only when the key algorithm is 1024 bits or more.

*5Available only for installation from the Remote UI.

●The machine does not support use of a certicate revocation list (CRL).

Appendix

545

System Environment

2KUU-09U

System Environment for WSD Scan ●Windows Vista

●Windows 7

●Windows 8.1

●Windows 10

System Requirements for the Remote UI *1 Windows

●Windows Vista / 7 / 8.1 / 10: Internet Explorer 11 or later

●Windows 10: Edge

macOS

●Mac OS X 10.6 and later

●Safari 3.2.1 and later

iOS

●Safari

Android

●Chrome

File Servers Available as Destinations for File

Transmission

SMB

●Windows Vista SP2 / 7 / 8 / 8.1 / 10

●Windows Server 2008 / Server 2012

●Solaris Version 2.6 and later

●Red Hat Linux 7.2 and later

●Mac OS X 10.6 and later

SMTP

●Sendmail 8.12.5 and later

●Sendmail 8.13.x

●Sendmail 8.14.x

●Exchange Server 2003 / 2007 / 2010

●Lotus Domino 6.x / 7.x / 8.x

System Requirements for the Send Function

Setting Tool

●Windows 7 / 8.1 / 10 / Server 2003 / Server 2008: Internet Explorer 7 or later

●Windows 10: Edge

System Requirements for the User's Guide Windows

●Internet Explorer 9 and later

●Microsoft Edge

●Firefox

●Firefox ESR

●Chrome*2

macOS

●Safari

●Firefox

●Chrome*2

Appendix

546

Linux

●Firefox

iOS

●Safari*2

Android

●Chrome*2

*1Before changing the settings of the machine, set your Web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript.

*2Only when viewing manuals on the Internet

Appendix

547

Network Environment

2KUU-09W

◼Common Specications

Protocol Supported TCP/IP

●Frame type: Ethernet II

●Print applications: LPD, Raw, IPP, IPPS, WSD, Mopria, Google Cloud Print, AirPrint, Windows10

Mobile Print

◼Wired LAN Specications

Interface 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX (RJ-45)

◼Wireless LAN Specications

Standard IEEE 802.11b, IEEE 802.11g, IEEE 802.11n

Transmission Scheme IEEE 802.11b (Modulation system: DS-SS)

IEEE 802.11g (Modulation system: OFDM method)

IEEE 802.11n (Modulation system: OFDM method)

Frequency Range 2.412 GHz to 2.462 GHz

Maximum Radio-Frequency Power Transmitte 15.9 dBm

Communication Mode ●Infrastructure Mode

●Access Point Mode

Security (encryption method) Infrastructure Mode

●128 (104)/64 (40) bit WEP

●WPA-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

●WPA2-PSK (TKIP/AES-CCMP)

Access Point Mode

WPA2-PSK (AES-CCMP)

Connection Method WPS (Wi-Fi Protected Setup), Manual setup

Appendix

548

Manuals and Their Contents

2KUU-09X

The manuals listed below are included with the machine. Refer to them as necessary.

Getting Started Read this manual rst. It describes basic setup procedures, from removing the

packing materials to setting up the machine.

User's Guide (This Manual) This manual describes all the functions of the machine in a manual that is viewed

using a Web browser. You can browse information by category or enter a

keyword to search for pages on a specic topic. Using User's Guide(P. 550)

Send Setting Guide This manual describes how to congure settings and prepare for sending

scanned images by e-mail and saving scanned images to shared folders.

Appendix

549

Using User's Guide

2KUU-09Y

The User's Guide is a manual that can be viewed on your computer or mobile device and it describes all of the

functions of the machine. You can search from your intended use or enter a keyword to quickly nd the page you are

looking for. The section describes the screen layout of the User's Guide and how to read the Guide. You can specify

how the appearance of the User's Guide looks.

◼Screen Layout of User's Guide

This section describes the screens conguring the User's Guide and how to use the on-screen buttons. Screen

Layout of User's Guide(P. 551)

◼Viewing User's Guide

This section describes the meaning of the marks used in the User's Guide, how the keys on the operation panel and

the buttons on the computer display are represented, and other matters that help you understand the information

contained in the User's Guide. Viewing User's Guide(P. 554)

◼Specifying How the Appearance of the User's Guide Looks

You can change the character size used in the User's Guide, and switch the screen layout to t to the device you use to

view the User's Guide.

●If you do not have access to Adobe Reader to view the manuals in PDF format, try other programs such as

PDF Preview developed by Vivid Document Imaging Technologies.

How to Find the Topic You Are Looking for

Search the contents

●You can nd the page you are looking for by selecting the topic from the "Contents" on the left side of the

screen.

Search by keyword

●Perform a search by entering a keyword, such as "envelope" or "toner cartridge," and the pages containing

the keyword are displayed. You can nd the page you are looking for from those results. You can also enter

phrases such as "connecting to a network." The keyword search also supports the AND Boolean to search for

multiple keywords. For the organization of the search screen and how to operate the search screen, see

Search(P. 553) .

Appendix

550

Screen Layout of User's Guide

2KUU-0A0

The User's Guide is divided into different screens, and the content of each screen varies.

Top Page

Appears when User's Guide is started.

Click to also display all of the sections under the chapters. Click to return to the previous display.

Click to toggle the display between the contents and search. When the table of contents is displayed, each

click on switches between hiding and showing the display. When the search display is shown, each

click on switches between hiding and showing the display.

Click to set parameters to determine how the User's Guide is displayed, such as character size or layout.

Click to display information on how to view the User's Guide, how to perform a search, and other

information.

Click to display the previous or following topic.

[Notice]

Click to view important information you should know when using the machine.

Appendix

551

Topic Page

Contains information about how to congure and use the machine.

Navigation

See what chapter topic you are currently viewing.

Click to jump to the corresponding page. To return to the previous page, click "Back" on your Web

browser.

●When you click the icon, the current page may go dark and a pop-up window may appear. To return to

the page, click [Close] in the pop-up window.

Appendix

552

Click to display the hidden detailed descriptions. Click to close the detailed descriptions.

Click to return to the page top.

Click to display the search window. Contains a text box to perform a search by keyword and nd the page

you are looking for.

[Enter keyword(s) here]

Enter a keyword or keywords and click to display the search results. You can search for pages

containing all the keywords by separating the keywords by a space (blank). Also you can only search for

pages containing an exact phrase by enclosing the keywords in double quotation marks.

Search result

Displays the search results of the pages that contain the specied keywords. From the results, locate the

page you are looking for and click the topic title of the page.

●The specied keyword(s) are shown in bold in the search results.

Appendix

553

Viewing User's Guide

2KUU-0A1

This section describes the marks, buttons, screens, and other items used in the User's Guide. The warnings and

cautions are also given in the "Important Safety Instructions" in the "Getting Started" included with the machine. See

also these instructions.

Marks

Cautions regarding safety, restrictions and cautions regarding the handling of the machine, useful tips, and

other information are indicated using the marks below.

Indicates an operation that must not be performed. Read these items carefully,

and make sure not to perform the described operations.

Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items

carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine or

property.

Indicates a clarication of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a

procedure.

Indicates useful functions or tips for using the machine.

Keys and Buttons Used in this Manual

Keys on the operation panel and buttons on the computer display appear in the following notation:

Type Example

Keys on the operation panel

Settings displayed on the operation panel <Timer Settings>

Buttons and other text interfaces displayed on the computer display [Preferences]

●A case in which a user taps a button on the display for the Touch Panel Model, and a case in which a

user presses a key on the operation panel for the 5 Lines LCD Model are described even when their

operations are the same. For example, the operation for displaying the <Menu> screen is represented

by "Press <Menu> ( )."

/ / (5 Lines LCD Model)

, , and on the operation panel are used to select the target item in settings, but their description

is omitted in the User's Guide. The operation for selecting <XXXXX> using or and pressing is

represented as shown below in the User's Guide.

1Select <XXXXX>.

Appendix

554

Computer Screens Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise noted, displays used in the User's Guide are those for the MF269dw. Depending on the model

or operating system you are using, the appearance of the displays used in this manual may slightly differ from

the actual displays. Also, the appearance of drivers and software may differ depending on their version.

Illustrations Used in This Manual

Unless otherwise noted, illustrations used in the User's Guide are those for the MF269dw. When differences are

signicant, multiple illustrations are used with the model names, such as "MFXXX / MFXXX." The illustrations of

the toner cartridge are those for the Canon Toner Cartridge 051.

Appendix

555

Basic Windows Operations

2KUU-0A3

Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 556)

Enabling [Network discovery](P. 556)

Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server(P. 557)

Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen(P. 558)

Printing a Test Page in Windows(P. 558)

Checking the Bit Architecture(P. 559)

Checking the Computer Name(P. 560)

Checking the Printer Port(P. 561)

Checking Bidirectional Communication(P. 562)

Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected(P. 563)

When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App(P. 563)

●Depending on the computer that you use, the operation may differ.

◼Displaying the Printer Folder

Windows Vista

[Start] select [Control Panel] [Printer].

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2

[Start] select [Devices and Printers].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View devices and printers].

Windows 10

[] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [Hardware and Sound] [Devices and Printers].

Windows Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Printers].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [Hardware] [Devices and Printers].

◼Enabling [Network discovery]

Enable [Network discovery] to view the computers on your network.

Windows Vista

[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] select [Turn on network discovery] under

[Network discovery].

Windows 7/Server 2008 R2

[Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing settings]

select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Appendix

556

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks]

[Change advanced sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing

settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows 10

[] select [Windows System] [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced

sharing settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel] double-click [Network and Sharing Center] select [Turn on network

discovery] under [Network discovery].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel] [View network status and tasks] [Change advanced sharing

settings] select [Turn on network discovery] under [Network discovery].

◼Displaying Shared Printers in the Print Server

1Open Windows Explorer.

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] select [All Programs] or [Programs] [Accessories] [Windows Explorer].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [File Explorer].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [File Explorer].

Windows 10/Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [File Explorer].

2Select the printer server in [Network] or [My Network Places].

●To view computers on the network, you may need to turn on network discovery or search the network for

computers.

➠Shared printers are displayed.

Appendix

557

◼Displaying the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] Screen

If your computer does not display the [Software Programs/Manuals Setup] screen after inserting the provided CD-

ROM/DVD-ROM, follow the procedure below. The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name is indicated as "D:" in this manual.

The CD-ROM/DVD-ROM drive name may differ depending on the computer you are using.

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] enter "D:\MInst.exe" in [Search programs and les] or [Start Search] press the [ENTER] key.

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] [Run] Enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [OK]

Windows 10

Enter "D:\MInst.exe" in the search box click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.

Windows Server 2016

Click [ ] enter "D:\MInst.exe" click [D:\MInst.exe] displayed as the search result.

◼Printing a Test Page in Windows

You can check whether the printer driver is operational by printing a test page in Windows.

1Load Letter size paper in the drawer. Loading Paper in the Drawer(P. 134)

2Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 556)

3Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

Appendix

558

4Click [Print Test Page] in [General] tab.

➠The test page is printed.

◼Checking the Bit Architecture

If you are not sure whether your computer is running 32-bit or 64-bit Windows follow the procedure below.

1Display [Control Panel].

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 10/Server 2016

Proceed to step 2.

2Display [System].

Appendix

559

Windows Vista/7/8/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012

Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].

Windows 10/Server 2016

Click [ ] [Settings] [System] select [About].

Windows Server 2008

Double-click [System].

3Check the bit architecture.

For 32-bit versions

[32-bit Operating System] is displayed.

For 64-bit versions

[64-bit Operating System] is displayed.

◼Checking the Computer Name

1Display [Control Panel].

Windows Vista/7/Server 2008

[Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 8/Server 2012

Right-click the lower-left corner of the screen select [Control Panel].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Right-click [Start] select [Control Panel].

Windows 10

Click [ ] select [Windows System] [Control Panel].

Windows Server 2016

Right-click [ ] select [Control Panel].

2Display [System].

Windows Vista/7/8/10/Server 2008 R2/Server 2012/Server 2016

Click [System and Maintenance] or [System and Security] [System].

Appendix

560

Windows Server 2008

Double-click [System].

3Check the computer name.

◼Checking the Printer Port

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 556)

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

Appendix

561

3In the [Ports] tab, check that the port is selected correctly.

If you are using a network connection and have changed the machine's IP address

●If [Description] for the selected port is [Canon MFNP Port], and the machine and the computer are on the

same subnet, then the connection will be maintained. You do not need to add a new port. If it is [Standard

TCP/IP Port], you need to add a new port. Conguring Printer Ports(P. 45)

◼Checking Bidirectional Communication

1Open the printer folder. Displaying the Printer Folder(P. 556)

2Right-click the printer driver icon for this machine, and click [Printer properties] or

[Properties].

3In the [Ports] tab, make sure that the [Enable bidirectional support] check box is

selected.

Appendix

562

◼Checking the SSID to Which Your Computer is Connected

If your computer is connected to a wireless LAN network, click , , , or in the system tray to display the

SSID of the connected wireless LAN router.

◼When Printing or Sending from the Windows Store App

Windows 8/Windows Server 2012

Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] The driver that you use [Print].

Windows 8.1/Server 2012 R2

Display the charms on the right side of the screen Tap or click [Devices] [Print] The driver that you use

[Print].

Windows 10

Tap or click [Print] on the application The driver that you use [Print].

●If you print a document or send a fax using this method, only a limited number of functions are available.

●If the message [The printer requires your attention. Go to the desktop to take care of it.] is displayed, go to

the desktop and perform the required operations. This message appears when the machine is set to display

the user name when printing documents, sending faxes or similar instances.

Appendix

563

Menu Route Map

2KUU-0A4

For the settings on the machine's display, see Menu Route Map (PDF manual).

Touch Panel Model

5 Lines LCD Model

Appendix

564

Notice

2KUU-0AJ

◼ENERGY STAR® (for USA and Canada only)

The ENERGY STAR Program is an international program that promotes energy saving

through the use of computers and other oce equipment.

The program backs the development and dissemination of products with functions that

effectively reduce energy consumption. It is an open system in which business proprietors

can participate voluntarily.

◼IPv6 Ready Logo

The protocol stack included in this machine has obtained the IPv6 Ready Logo Phase-1

established by the IPv6 Forum.

◼Disclaimers

●The information in this document is subject to change without notice.

●CANON INC. MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

EXCEPT AS PROVIDED HEREIN, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, THEREOF, WARRANTIES AS TO MARKETABILITY,

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF USE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. CANON INC. SHALL

NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY NATURE, OR LOSSES OR

EXPENSES RESULTING FROM THE USE OF THIS MATERIAL.

◼Trademarks

Adobe, Acrobat, and Reader are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or

other countries.

Apple, Bonjour, iPad, iPhone, iPod touch, Mac, macOS, OS X and Safari are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista, Windows Server, Internet Explorer, Word and Excel are either registered

trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

iOS is a trademark or registered trademark of Cisco in the U.S. and other countries and is used under license.

Google Cloud Print, Google Chrome and Android are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Google Inc.

Mopria®, the Mopria® Logo and the Mopria® Alliance logo are registered trademarks and service marks of Mopria

Alliance, Inc. in the United States and other countries. Unauthorized use is strictly prohibited.

This product contains the Universal Font Scaling Technology or UFST® under license from Monotype Imaging, Inc.

UFST® is a trademark of Monotype Imaging, Inc. registered in the United States Patent and Trademark Oce and may

be registered in certain jurisdictions.

Appendix

565

The Adobe PDF logo is a trademark or registered trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and

other countries.

Protected by U.S. Patents 6,185,684; 6,205,549; 7,213,269; 7,272,628; 7,278,168; Patents pending in the U.S. and other

countries.

All instances of the name PostScript in the text are references to the PostScript language as dened by Adobe Systems

Incorporated unless otherwise stated. The name PostScript also is used as a product trademark for Adobe Systems'

implementation of the PostScript language interpreter.

Except as otherwise stated, any reference to a "PostScript printing device," "PostScript display device," or similar item

refers to a printing device, display device or item (respectively) that contains PostScript technology created or licensed

by Adobe Systems Incorporated and not to devices or items that purport to be merely compatible with the PostScript

language.

Adobe, the Adobe logo, Adobe LiveCycle® Policy Server, InDesign, PostScript, the PostScript Logo, and PostScript 3 are

either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other

countries.

All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.

All other product and brand names are registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.

◼Copyright

Reproduction of the contents of this document in whole or in part without prior permission is prohibited.

V_181127

Appendix

566

This Font Software is licensed under the SIL Open Font License,

Version 1.1.

This license is copied below, and is also available with a FAQ at:

http://scripts.sil.org/OFL

-----------------------------------------------------------

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE Version 1.1 - 26 February 2007

-----------------------------------------------------------

PREAMBLE

The goals of the Open Font License (OFL) are to stimulate worldwide

development of collaborative font projects, to support the font

creation efforts of academic and linguistic communities, and to

provide a free and open framework in which fonts may be shared and

improved in partnership with others.

The OFL allows the licensed fonts to be used, studied, modied and

redistributed freely as long as they are not sold by themselves. The

fonts, including any derivative works, can be bundled, embedded,

redistributed and/or sold with any software provided that any reserved

names are not used by derivative works. The fonts and derivatives,

however, cannot be released under any other type of license. The

requirement for fonts to remain under this license does not apply to

any document created using the fonts or their derivatives.

DEFINITIONS

"Font Software" refers to the set of les released by the Copyright

Holder(s) under this license and clearly marked as such. This may

include source les, build scripts and documentation.

"Reserved Font Name" refers to any names specied as such after the

"Original Version" refers to the collection of Font Software

components as distributed by the Copyright Holder(s).

"Modied Version" refers to any derivative made by adding to,

deleting, or substituting -- in part or in whole -- any of the

components of the Original Version, by changing formats or by porting

the Font Software to a new environment.

"Author" refers to any designer, engineer, programmer, technical

writer or other person who contributed to the Font Software.

PERMISSION & CONDITIONS

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of the Font Software, to use, study, copy, merge, embed,

modify, redistribute, and sell modied and unmodied copies of the

Font Software, subject to the following conditions:

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

567

1) Neither the Font Software nor any of its individual components, in

Original or Modied Versions, may be sold by itself.

2) Original or Modied Versions of the Font Software may be bundled,

redistributed and/or sold with any software, provided that each copy

contains the above copyright notice and this license. These can be

included either as stand-alone text les, human-readable headers or

in the appropriate machine-readable metadata elds within text or

binary les as long as those elds can be easily viewed by the user.

3) No Modied Version of the Font Software may use the Reserved Font

Name(s) unless explicit written permission is granted by the

corresponding Copyright Holder. This restriction only applies to the

primary font name as presented to the users.

4) The name(s) of the Copyright Holder(s) or the Author(s) of the Font

Software shall not be used to promote, endorse or advertise any

Modied Version, except to acknowledge the contribution(s) of the

permission.

5) The Font Software, modied or unmodied, in part or in whole,

must be distributed entirely under this license, and must not be

distributed under any other license. The requirement for fonts to

remain under this license does not apply to any document created using

the Font Software.

TERMINATION

This license becomes null and void if any of the above conditions are

not met.

DISCLAIMER

THE FONT SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT

OF COPYRIGHT, PATENT, TRADEMARK, OR OTHER RIGHT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE

INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

DAMAGES, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING

FROM, OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE FONT SOFTWARE OR FROM

OTHER DEALINGS IN THE FONT SOFTWARE.

SIL OPEN FONT LICENSE

568

- 1 -

The Software Subjected to Other License Conditions

Please refer to Table of Software and respective License terms below, for more detail and corresponding

license conditions.

Table of Software

Names of Software Terms and Conditions of the

License:

See Page

Adobe PDF Scan Library 2

bldimake 5

carouFredSel 6

FreeType 7

snmp 12

Incl 15

JPEG 16

jQuery 17

jQuery Mobile 18

math 19

mDNSResponder 20

mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared) 24

OpenSSL 25

xpm 29

- 2 -

Adobe PDF Scan Library

Portions use software under the following terms:

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product contains either BSAFE and/or TIPEM software by RSA Security Inc.

______________________________________________________________________________________

This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/).

Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the

following conditions are met:

1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer.

2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the

following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

3. The end-user documentation included with the redistribution, if any, must include the following

acknowledgment:

"This product includes software developed by the Apache Software Foundation (http://www.apache.org/)."

Alternately, this acknowledgment may appear in the software itself, if and wherever such third-party

acknowledgments normally appear.

4. The names "Xerces" and "Apache Software Foundation" must not be used to endorse or promote products

derived from this software without prior written permission. For written permission, please contact

apache@apache.org.

5. Products derived from this software may not be called "Apache", nor may "Apache" appear in their name,

without prior written permission of the Apache Software Foundation.

THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES,

INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS

FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE

FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR

BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN

CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN

ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH

DAMAGE.

- 3 -

This software consists of voluntary contributions made by many individuals on behalf of the Apache Software

http://www.ibm.com. For more information on the Apache Software Foundation, please see

<http://www.apache.org/>.

______________________________________________________________________________________

March 27, 2003

Portions of this product are based on Modifications created from the Original Code known as the "Sablotron

XSLT Processor". The Sablotron XSLT Processor is subject to the Mozilla Public License Version 1.1 (the

"License"). You may obtain a copy of

the License at http://www.mozilla.org/MPL/

Software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" basis, WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing rights and limitations

under the License.

The Original Code is the Sablotron XSLT Processor.

The Initial Developer of the Original Code is Ginger Alliance Ltd. Portions created by Ginger Alliance are

Pursuant to sections 3.2 and 3.6 of the License, the Modifications created by Adobe Systems Incorporated

are available as Source Code. The Modifications may be downloaded via the Internet from:

http://partners.adobe.com/asn/tech/xml/sablotron/index.jsp

The Original Code may be downloaded via the Internet from:

https://sourceforge.net/projects/sablotron/

______________________________________________________________________________________

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is

hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that

representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or

implied warranty.

______________________________________________________________________________________

- 4 -

The Loki Library

Andrei. "Modern C++ Design: Generic Programming and Design Patterns Applied".

software for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all

copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation.

The author or Addison-Wesley Longman make no representations about the suitability of this software for any

purpose. It is provided "as is" without express or implied warranty.

______________________________________________________________________________________

Updated Information/Additional Third Party Code Information available at

http://www.adobe.com/go/thirdparty .

______________________________________________________________________________________

- 5 -

bldimake

Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is

hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that

notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OPEN GROUP BE

LIABLE

FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF

CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE

SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of The Open Group shall not be used in advertising or otherwise

to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from The Open

Group.

- 6 -

carouFredSel

The MIT License (MIT)

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated

documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the

rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to

permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of

the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR

AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION

WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

- 7 -

FreeType

The FreeType Project LICENSE

----------------------------

2006-Jan-27

David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg

Introduction

============

The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages;

some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine,

various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the

FreeType Project.

This license applies to all files found in such packages, and

which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license

affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs,

documentation and makefiles, at the very least.

This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG

(Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion

and use of free software in commercial and freeware products

alike. As a consequence, its main points are that:

o We don't promise that this software works. However, we will be

interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution)

o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or

full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage)

o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use

it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge

- 8 -

somewhere in your documentation that you have used the

FreeType code. (`credits')

We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this

software, with or without modifications, in commercial products.

We disclaim all warranties covering The FreeType Project and

assume no liability related to The FreeType Project.

Finally, many people asked us for a preferred form for a

credit/disclaimer to use in compliance with this license. We thus

encourage you to use the following text:

"""

Please replace <year> with the value from the FreeType version you

actually use.

Legal Terms

===========

0. Definitions

--------------

Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project',

and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally

distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and

Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType Project', be they named as alpha,

beta or final release.

`You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where

`using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source

code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'.

This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType

- 9 -

engine'.

This license applies to all files distributed in the original

FreeType Project, including all source code, binaries and

documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its

original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive.

If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by

this license, you must contact us to verify this.

specified below.

1. No Warranty

--------------

THE FREETYPE PROJECT IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY

KIND, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,

WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS

BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO

USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT.

2. Redistribution

-----------------

This license grants a worldwide, royalty-free, perpetual and

irrevocable right and license to use, execute, perform, compile,

display, copy, create derivative works of, distribute and

sublicense the FreeType Project (in both source and object code

forms) and derivative works thereof for any purpose; and to

authorize others to exercise some or all of the rights granted

herein, subject to the following conditions:

o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file

(`FTL.TXT') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to

the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying

documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered,

- 10 -

original files must be preserved in all copies of source

files.

o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that

states that the software is based in part of the work of the

FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also

encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your

documentation, though this isn't mandatory.

These conditions apply to any software derived from or based on

the FreeType Project, not just the unmodified files. If you use

our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid

to us.

3. Advertising

--------------

Neither the FreeType authors and contributors nor you shall use

the name of the other for commercial, advertising, or promotional

purposes without specific prior written permission.

We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the

following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation

or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine',

`FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'.

As you have not signed this license, you are not required to

accept it. However, as the FreeType Project is copyrighted

material, only this license, or another one contracted with the

authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it.

Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType

Project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms

of this license.

4. Contacts

-----------

There are two mailing lists related to FreeType:

- 11 -

o freetype@nongnu.org

Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as

future and wanted additions to the library and distribution.

If you are looking for support, start in this list if you

haven't found anything to help you in the documentation.

o freetype-devel@nongnu.org

Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues,

specific licenses, porting, etc.

Our home page can be found at

http://www.freetype.org

--- end of FTL.TXT ---

- 12 -

snmp

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its

documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,

provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that

both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in

supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU not be

used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the

software without specific, written prior permission.

CMU DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING

ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO EVENT SHALL

CMU BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR

ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,

WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION,

ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS

SOFTWARE.

* This package is an SSL implementation written

* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as

* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions

* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,

* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation

* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms

* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

* Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in

- 13 -

* the code are not to be removed.

* If this package is used in a product, Eric Young should be given attribution

* as the author of the parts of the library used.

* This can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or

* in documentation (online or textual) provided with the package.

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the

* documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software

* must display the following acknowledgement:

* "This product includes cryptographic software written by

* Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com)"

* The word 'cryptographic' can be left out if the rouines from the library

* being used are not cryptographic related :-).

* 4. If you include any Windows specific code (or a derivative thereof) from

* the apps directory (application code) you must include an acknowledgement:

* "This product includes software written by Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com)"

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG ``AS IS'' AND

* ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE

* ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE

* FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

* DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS

* OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT

* LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY

* OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF

* SUCH DAMAGE.

* The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or

* derivative of this code cannot be changed. i.e. this code cannot simply be

- 14 -

* copied and put under another distribution licence

* [including the GNU Public Licence.]

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software and its

documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted,

provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that

both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in

supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and TGV not be used

in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software

without specific, written prior permission.

CMU AND TGV DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE,

INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS, IN NO

EVENT SHALL CMU OR TGV BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR

CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF

USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR

OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR

PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.

- 15 -

Incl

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this

software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software

without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify,

merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to

permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following

conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies

or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SUNSOFT INC. OR ITS

PARENT COMPANY BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN

ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH

THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

Except as contained in this notice, the name of SunSoft, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to

promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from SunSoft, Inc.

- 16 -

JPEG

"this software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group.".

- 17 -

jQuery

http://jquery.com/

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining

a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the

"Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including

without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish,

distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to

permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to

the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be

included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND,

EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF

MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND

NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE

LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION

OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION

WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

- 18 -

jQuery Mobile

http://jquery.org/license

Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated

documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the

rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to

permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:

The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of

the Software.

THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A

PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR

AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION

WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

- 19 -

math

Developed at SunPro, a Sun Microsystems, Inc. business.

Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software is freely granted, provided that this notice is

preserved.

- 20 -

mDNSResponder

Apache License

Version 2.0, January 2004

http://www.apache.org/licenses/

TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR USE, REPRODUCTION, AND DISTRIBUTION

1. Definitions.

"License" shall mean the terms and conditions for use, reproduction, and distribution as defined by Sections 1

through 9 of this document.

"Licensor" shall mean the copyright owner or entity authorized by the copyright owner that is granting the

License.

"Legal Entity" shall mean the union of the acting entity and all other entities that control, are controlled by, or

are under common control with that entity. For the purposes of this definition, "control" means (i) the power,

direct or indirect, to cause the direction or management of such entity, whether by contract or otherwise, or (ii)

ownership of fifty percent (50%) or more of the outstanding shares, or (iii) beneficial ownership of such entity.

"You" (or "Your") shall mean an individual or Legal Entity exercising permissions granted by this License.

"Source" form shall mean the preferred form for making modifications, including but not limited to software

source code, documentation source, and configuration files.

"Object" form shall mean any form resulting from mechanical transformation or translation of a Source form,

including but not limited to compiled object code, generated documentation, and conversions to other media

types.

"Work" shall mean the work of authorship, whether in Source or Object form, made available under the

License, as indicated by a copyright notice that is included in or attached to the work (an example is provided

in the Appendix below).

"Derivative Works" shall mean any work, whether in Source or Object form, that is based on (or derived from)

the Work and for which the editorial revisions, annotations, elaborations, or other modifications represent, as a

whole, an original work of authorship. For the purposes of this License, Derivative Works shall not include

works that remain separable from, or merely link (or bind by name) to the interfaces of, the Work and

Derivative Works thereof.

- 21 -

"Contribution" shall mean any work of authorship, including the original version of the Work and any

modifications or additions to that Work or Derivative Works thereof, that is intentionally submitted to Licensor

for inclusion in the Work by the copyright owner or by an individual or Legal Entity authorized to submit on

behalf of the copyright owner. For the purposes of this definition, "submitted" means any form of electronic,

verbal, or written communication sent to the Licensor or its representatives, including but not limited to

communication on electronic mailing lists, source code control systems, and issue tracking systems that are

managed by, or on behalf of, the Licensor for the purpose of discussing and improving the Work, but

excluding communication that is conspicuously marked or otherwise designated in writing by the copyright

owner as "Not a Contribution."

"Contributor" shall mean Licensor and any individual or Legal Entity on behalf of whom a Contribution has

been received by Licensor and subsequently incorporated within the Work.

2. Grant of Copyright License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby

grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable copyright license to

reproduce, prepare Derivative Works of, publicly display, publicly perform, sublicense, and distribute the Work

and such Derivative Works in Source or Object form.

3. Grant of Patent License. Subject to the terms and conditions of this License, each Contributor hereby

grants to You a perpetual, worldwide, non-exclusive, no-charge, royalty-free, irrevocable (except as stated in

this section) patent license to make, have made, use, offer to sell, sell, import, and otherwise transfer the

Work, where such license applies only to those patent claims licensable by such Contributor that are

necessarily infringed by their Contribution(s) alone or by combination of their Contribution(s) with the Work to

which such Contribution(s) was submitted. If You institute patent litigation against any entity (including a

cross-claim or counterclaim in a lawsuit) alleging that the Work or a Contribution incorporated within the Work

constitutes direct or contributory patent infringement, then any patent licenses granted to You under this

License for that Work shall terminate as of the date such litigation is filed.

4. Redistribution. You may reproduce and distribute copies of the Work or Derivative Works thereof in any

medium, with or without modifications, and in Source or Object form, provided that You meet the following

conditions:

a. You must give any other recipients of the Work or Derivative Works a copy of this License; and

b. You must cause any modified files to carry prominent notices stating that You changed the files; and

c. You must retain, in the Source form of any Derivative Works that You distribute, all copyright, patent,

trademark, and attribution notices from the Source form of the Work, excluding those notices that do

not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works; and

- 22 -

d. If the Work includes a "NOTICE" text file as part of its distribution, then any Derivative Works that You

distribute must include a readable copy of the attribution notices contained within such NOTICE file,

excluding those notices that do not pertain to any part of the Derivative Works, in at least one of the

following places: within a NOTICE text file distributed as part of the Derivative Works; within the

Source form or documentation, if provided along with the Derivative Works; or, within a display

generated by the Derivative Works, if and wherever such third-party notices normally appear. The

contents of the NOTICE file are for informational purposes only and do not modify the License. You

may add Your own attribution notices within Derivative Works that You distribute, alongside or as an

addendum to the NOTICE text from the Work, provided that such additional attribution notices cannot

be construed as modifying the License.

You may add Your own copyright statement to Your modifications and may provide additional or different

license terms and conditions for use, reproduction, or distribution of Your modifications, or for any such

Derivative Works as a whole, provided Your use, reproduction, and distribution of the Work otherwise

complies with the conditions stated in this License.

5. Submission of Contributions. Unless You explicitly state otherwise, any Contribution intentionally submitted

for inclusion in the Work by You to the Licensor shall be under the terms and conditions of this License,

without any additional terms or conditions. Notwithstanding the above, nothing herein shall supersede or

modify the terms of any separate license agreement you may have executed with Licensor regarding such

Contributions.

6. Trademarks. This License does not grant permission to use the trade names, trademarks, service marks, or

product names of the Licensor, except as required for reasonable and customary use in describing the origin

of the Work and reproducing the content of the NOTICE file.

7. Disclaimer of Warranty. Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing, Licensor provides the

Work (and each Contributor provides its Contributions) on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied, including, without limitation, any warranties or

conditions of TITLE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

PURPOSE. You are solely responsible for determining the appropriateness of using or redistributing the Work

and assume any risks associated with Your exercise of permissions under this License.

8. Limitation of Liability. In no event and under no legal theory, whether in tort (including negligence), contract,

or otherwise, unless required by applicable law (such as deliberate and grossly negligent acts) or agreed to in

writing, shall any Contributor be liable to You for damages, including any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or

consequential damages of any character arising as a result of this License or out of the use or inability to use

the Work (including but not limited to damages for loss of goodwill, work stoppage, computer failure or

- 23 -

malfunction, or any and all other commercial damages or losses), even if such Contributor has been advised

of the possibility of such damages.

9. Accepting Warranty or Additional Liability. While redistributing the Work or Derivative Works thereof, You

may choose to offer, and charge a fee for, acceptance of support, warranty, indemnity, or other liability

obligations and/or rights consistent with this License. However, in accepting such obligations, You may act

only on Your own behalf and on Your sole responsibility, not on behalf of any other Contributor, and only if

You agree to indemnify, defend, and hold each Contributor harmless for any liability incurred by, or claims

asserted against, such Contributor by reason of your accepting any such warranty or additional liability.

END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS

APPENDIX: How to apply the Apache License to your work

To apply the Apache License to your work, attach the following boilerplate notice, with the fields enclosed by

brackets "[]" replaced with your own identifying information. (Don't include the brackets!) The text should be

enclosed in the appropriate comment syntax for the file format. We also recommend that a file or class name

and description of purpose be included on the same "printed page" as the copyright notice for easier

identification within third-party archives.

you may not use this file except in compliance with the License. You may obtain a copy of the License at

http://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE-2.0 Unless required by applicable law or agreed to in writing,

software distributed under the License is distributed on an "AS IS" BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OR

CONDITIONS OF ANY KIND, either express or implied. See the License for the specific language governing

permissions and limitations under the License.

- 24 -

mDNSResponder (part of mDNSShared)

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice,

* this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice,

* this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation

* and/or other materials provided with the distribution.

* 3. Neither the name of Apple Computer, Inc. ("Apple") nor the names of its

* contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this

* software without specific prior written permission.

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY APPLE AND ITS CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY

* EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED

* WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE

* DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL APPLE OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY

* DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES

* (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND

* ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT

* (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS

* SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

- 25 -

OpenSSL

OpenSSL License

---------------

/* ====================================================================

* Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without

* modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions

* are met:

* 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.

* 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright

* notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in

* the documentation and/or other materials provided with the

* distribution.

* 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this

* software must display the following acknowledgment:

* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit. (http://www.openssl.org/)"

* 4. The names "OpenSSL Toolkit" and "OpenSSL Project" must not be used to

* endorse or promote products derived from this software without

* prior written permission. For written permission, please contact

* openssl-core@openssl.org.

* 5. Products derived from this software may not be called "OpenSSL"

* nor may "OpenSSL" appear in their names without prior written

* permission of the OpenSSL Project.

* 6. Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following

* acknowledgment:

* "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project

* for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)"

- 26 -

* THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY

* EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE

* IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR

* PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR

* ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,

* SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT

* NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;

* LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)

* HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT,

* STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE)

* ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED

* OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.

* ====================================================================

* This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young

* (eay@cryptsoft.com). This product includes software written by Tim

* Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

Original SSLeay License

-----------------------

* This package is an SSL implementation written

* by Eric Young (eay@cryptsoft.com).

* The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL.

* This library is free for commercial and non-commercial use as long as

* the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions

* apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA,

* lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation

* included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms

* except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com).

- 27 -